Chromalox 4081 Single and Dual Channel Installation and Operation Manual
Add to my manuals
236 Pages
advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 236
Installation & Operation Manual 4081/4082 Graphical Profile Controller & Recorder PK532-1 0037-75562 March 2016 A B Note: It is strongly recommended that applications incorporate a high or low limit protective device, which will shut down the equipment at a pre-set process condition in order to prevent possible damage to property or products. This manual supplements the Concise Product manual(s) supplied with each instrument at the time of shipment. Information in this installation, wiring and operation manual is subject to change without notice. Copyright © February 2016, Chromalox, all rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed or stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form by any means without the written permission of Chromalox. Warranty and Returns Statement These products are sold by Chromalox under the warranties set forth in the following paragraphs. Such warranties are extended only with respect to a purchase of these products, as new merchandise, directly from Chromalox or from a Chromalox distributor, representative or reseller and are extended only to the first buyer thereof who purchases them other than for the purpose of resale. Copies of this manual are available in electronic format on the Chromalox web site (www.chromalox.com) Printed versions are available from Chromalox or its representatives. Note: It is strongly recommended that applications incorporate a high or low limit protective device, which will shut down the equipment at a preset process condition in order to prevent possible damage to property or products. Warranty The Safety Alert Symbol: is found throughout these installation instructions to identify potential hazards that can result in personal injury. The seriousness of the potential risk is identified by one of these three words: These products are warranted to be free from functional defects in material and workmanship at the time the products leave Chromalox factory and to conform at that time to the specifications set forth in the relevant C instruction manuals sheet or sheets, for such products for a period of three years. DANGER – will result in serious injury or death. WARNING – could result in serious injury or death. THERE ARE NO EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE WARRANTIES HEREIN AND ABOVE SET FORTH. CHROMALOX MAKES NO WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS. CAUTION – may result in minor or moderate injury. Limitations Chromalox shall not be liable for any incidental damages, consequential damages, special damages, or any other damages, costs or expenses excepting only the cost or expense of repair or replacement as described above. Products must be installed and maintained in accordance with Chromalox instructions. There is no warranty against damage to the product resulting from corrosion. Users are responsible for the suitability of the products to their application. THE INTERNATIONAL HAZARD SYMBOL IS INSCRIBED ADJACENT TO THE REAR CONNECTION TERMINALS. IT IS IMPORTANT TO READ THIS MANUAL BEFORE INSTALLING OR COMMISSIONING THE UNIT. For a valid warranty claim, the product must be returned carriage paid to the supplier within the warranty period. The product must be properly packaged to avoid damage from Electrostatic Discharge or other forms of harm during transit. THIS SYMBOL MEANS THE EQUIPMENT IS PROTECTED THROUGHOUT BY DOUBLE INSULATION. This user guide covers all versions of the Chromalox 4081/4082 Controller & Recorder. WARNING: PRODUCTS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL ARE SUITABLE FOR INDOOR USE, INSTALLATION CATEGORY II, POLLUTION CATEGORY 2 ENVIRONMENTS. i Table of Contents Contents Page Number Warranty and Returns Statement.......................................................................................................................... i 1Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 1 2Installation........................................................................................................................................................ 1 Unpacking.......................................................................................................................................................... 1 Installation.......................................................................................................................................................... 2 Panel-Mounting................................................................................................................................................. 2 Cleaning............................................................................................................................................................. 2 3 Field Upgrade Options..................................................................................................................................... 3 Plug-Modules and Upgradeable Functions....................................................................................................... 3 Preparing to Install or Remove Plug-in Modules............................................................................................... 4 Removing/Replacing Option Modules............................................................................................................... 4 Replacing the Instrument in its Housing............................................................................................................ 5 Auto Detection of Plug-in Modules.................................................................................................................... 5 Data Recorder Board......................................................................................................................................... 5 Profiler Enabling................................................................................................................................................. 5 4 Electrical Installation....................................................................................................................................... 6 Avoiding EMC Problems.................................................................................................................................... 6 Cable Isolation & Protection......................................................................................................................... 6 Noise Suppression at Source....................................................................................................................... 6 Sensor Placement (Thermocouple or RTD)....................................................................................................... 7 Thermocouple Wire Identification...................................................................................................................... 7 Thermocouple Wire Color CHART................................................................................................................ 7 Pre-wiring – Cautions, Warnings & Information ................................................................................................ 8 Connections and Wiring.................................................................................................................................... 9 Central Terminal Connections....................................................................................................................... 9 Outer Terminal Connections....................................................................................................................... 10 Power Connections.................................................................................................................................... 10 Universal Input 1 Connections.................................................................................................................... 11 Universal / Auxiliary Input 2 Connections................................................................................................... 12 Base Option 1............................................................................................................................................. 13 Base Option 2............................................................................................................................................. 13 Plug-in Module Slot 1 Connections............................................................................................................ 13 Plug-in module slot 2 Connections............................................................................................................ 14 Plug-in Slot 3 Connections......................................................................................................................... 15 Plug-in Slot A Connections......................................................................................................................... 16 Option C Connections................................................................................................................................ 17 5 Powering Up................................................................................................................................................... 18 Powering Up Procedure................................................................................................................................... 18 Front Panel Overview....................................................................................................................................... 18 Display............................................................................................................................................................. 18 LED Functions.................................................................................................................................................. 19 Keypad Functions & Navigation....................................................................................................................... 19 ii Contents Page Number 6 Messages & Error Indications....................................................................................................................... 20 Plug-in Module Problems................................................................................................................................ 20 Sensor Break Detection .................................................................................................................................. 20 Un-Calibrated Input Detection......................................................................................................................... 20 PV Over-range or Under-range Indication....................................................................................................... 20 Auxiliary Input Over-range or Under-range Indication .................................................................................... 20 Cascade-Open................................................................................................................................................. 20 Profile Not Valid............................................................................................................................................... 20 USB Data Transfer Failure message................................................................................................................ 20 Getting Help..................................................................................................................................................... 20 7 Application Setup........................................................................................................................................... 21 Pre-Commissioning Considerations................................................................................................................ 21 8 Operation and Configuration Menus............................................................................................................ 23 Operation Mode............................................................................................................................................... 23 Navigating and Adjusting Values in Operator Mode................................................................................... 23 OPERATION MODE SCREEN SEQUENCE ................................................................................................ 24 Main Menu....................................................................................................................................................... 29 Entry into the Main Menu............................................................................................................................ 29 Unlock Codes ............................................................................................................................................ 29 Main Menu Options .............................................................................................................................. 29 Setup Wizard................................................................................................................................................... 30 Manual entry to the Setup Wizard.............................................................................................................. 30 Setup Wizard Screens........................................................................................................................... 30 Supervisor Mode.............................................................................................................................................. 30 Entry into Supervisor Mode ....................................................................................................................... 30 Supervisor Mode Screens .................................................................................................................... 31 Configuration Menu......................................................................................................................................... 31 Entry into the Configuration Menu................................................................................................................... 31 Configuration Menu Screens: .................................................................................................................... 31 Input Configuration Sub-Menu Screens..................................................................................................... 35 Control Configuration Sub-Menu Screens ................................................................................................ 36 Outputs Configuration Sub-Menu Screens................................................................................................ 42 Alarm Configuration Sub-Menu Screens.................................................................................................... 43 Communications Configuration Sub-Menu Screens.................................................................................. 44 Data Recorder Configuration Sub-Menu Screens...................................................................................... 44 Clock Configuration Sub-Menu Screens.................................................................................................... 46 Display Configuration Sub-Menu Screens ................................................................................................ 46 Lock Code Configuration Sub-Menu Screen............................................................................................. 47 Reset To Defaults Sub-Menu Screen.......................................................................................................... 47 The USB Menu ................................................................................................................................................ 47 Entry into the USB Menu............................................................................................................................ 47 USB Menu Screens............................................................................................................................... 48 Recorder Control Menu .................................................................................................................................. 49 Entry into the Recorder Control Menu........................................................................................................ 49 Recorder Menu Screens ....................................................................................................................... 49 Profiler Setup Menu ........................................................................................................................................ 50 Entry into the Profiler Setup Menu ............................................................................................................. 50 Profiler Setup Menu Screens ........................................................................................................... 50 Profiler Control Menu....................................................................................................................................... 51 Profiler Control Menu Screens.................................................................................................................... 53 iii Contents Page Number Service & Product Information Mode............................................................................................................... 54 Entry into Service & Product Information Mode ........................................................................................ 54 Service & Product Information Screens: .............................................................................................. 54 Automatic Tuning Menu................................................................................................................................... 55 Entry into the Automatic Tuning Menu ....................................................................................................... 55 Automatic Tuning Menu Screens ......................................................................................................... 55 Lost Lock Codes.............................................................................................................................................. 56 9 Input Calibration & Multi-point Scaling........................................................................................................ 57 User Calibration............................................................................................................................................... 57 Calibration Reminder ................................................................................................................................. 57 Single Point Calibration.............................................................................................................................. 57 Two Point Calibration ................................................................................................................................. 58 Multi-point Scaling...................................................................................................................................... 58 Base Calibration Adjustment........................................................................................................................... 58 Required Equipment .................................................................................................................................. 59 Performing a Calibration Check ................................................................................................................. 59 Recalibration Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 59 Input Calibration Phases ...................................................................................................................... 59 10 Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................................. 60 Digital Signal Type............................................................................................................................................ 60 Inverting Digital Inputs ............................................................................................................................... 60 Soft Digital Inputs............................................................................................................................................ 60 Digital Input Functions..................................................................................................................................... 60 11 Cascade Control............................................................................................................................................ 62 Normal Cascade Operation ............................................................................................................................ 62 Cascade-Open................................................................................................................................................. 62 Manual Mode .................................................................................................................................................. 62 Cascade Tuning............................................................................................................................................... 63 12 Ratio Control ................................................................................................................................................. 64 13 Redundant Input............................................................................................................................................ 64 14 Valve Motor Drive / 3-Point Stepping Control ............................................................................................ 66 Pro-EC44 2-Loop Graphical Profile Controller & Recorder............................................................................. 66 Special Wiring Considerations for Valve Motor Control .................................................................................. 66 Position Feedback........................................................................................................................................... 66 Valve Limiting.............................................................................................................................................. 66 15 Setpoint Sources............................................................................................................................................ 67 Loop 1 Setpoint Sources ................................................................................................................................ 67 Loop 1 Profile Setpoint .............................................................................................................................. 67 Loop 2 Setpoint Sources................................................................................................................................. 67 Loop 2 Profile Setpoint .............................................................................................................................. 67 16Profiler............................................................................................................................................................. 68 Profile Components ........................................................................................................................................ 68 Profile Header & Segment Information....................................................................................................... 68 Profile Starting & Standard Segments........................................................................................................ 68 Two Loop Profiles ...................................................................................................................................... 69 iv Contents Page Number Loop-back Segments ................................................................................................................................ 70 Profile Running / Holding vs. Hold Segments ................................................................................................ 70 The Auto-Hold Feature.................................................................................................................................... 70 Auto Hold Examples .................................................................................................................................. 70 Profile Cycles & Repeat Sequences ............................................................................................................... 71 Power/Signal Lost Recovery Actions.............................................................................................................. 72 Profile End Actions........................................................................................................................................... 73 Profile Abort Actions ....................................................................................................................................... 73 17 USB Interface................................................................................................................................................. 74 Using the USB Port ......................................................................................................................................... 74 USB Memory Stick Folders & Files ............................................................................................................ 74 18 Data Recorder................................................................................................................................................ 75 Recordable Values .......................................................................................................................................... 75 Recorder Control and Status...................................................................................................................... 75 Uploading Data........................................................................................................................................... 75 Additional Features & Benefits from the Recorder.......................................................................................... 75 19 Controller Tuning............................................................................................................................................ 76 PID Sets & Gain Scheduling............................................................................................................................ 76 Automatic Tuning............................................................................................................................................. 76 Manually Tuning............................................................................................................................................... 78 Tuning Control Loops - PID with Primary Output only................................................................................ 78 Tuning Control Loops - PID with Primary & Secondary Outputs................................................................ 78 Valve, Damper & Speed Controller Tuning.................................................................................................. 79 Fine Tuning ................................................................................................................................................. 81 20 Serial Communications................................................................................................................................. 83 Supported Protocols........................................................................................................................................ 83 RS485 Configuration.................................................................................................................................. 83 Ethernet Configuration................................................................................................................................ 83 Supported Modbus Functions......................................................................................................................... 84 Function Descriptions................................................................................................................................. 84 Exception Responses................................................................................................................................. 86 Modbus Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 86 Data Formats.............................................................................................................................................. 86 Parameter Register Address Listings.............................................................................................................. 87 Calibration Reminder Parameters............................................................................................................... 87 Universal Process Input 1 Parameters....................................................................................................... 88 Universal Process Input 2 Parameters....................................................................................................... 92 Digital Input Setup Parameters................................................................................................................... 97 Plug-in Module Slot A Parameters........................................................................................................... 112 Plug-in Module Slot 1 Parameters............................................................................................................ 114 Plug-in Module Slot 2 Parameters ........................................................................................................... 116 Plug-in Module Slot 3 Parameters ........................................................................................................... 119 Output 4 Parameters................................................................................................................................ 122 Output 5 Parameters................................................................................................................................ 124 Linear Output 6 Parameters...................................................................................................................... 126 Linear Output 7 Parameters...................................................................................................................... 127 Loop 1 Setpoint Parameters .................................................................................................................... 128 Loop 2 Setpoint Parameters..................................................................................................................... 129 Aux A Input Parameters............................................................................................................................ 130 v Contents Page Number Loop 1 Control Parameters...................................................................................................................... 131 Loop 2 Control Parameters...................................................................................................................... 137 Alarm Parameters..................................................................................................................................... 143 Recorder & Clock Parameters.................................................................................................................. 151 Display & Security..................................................................................................................................... 157 Instrument Data Parameters..................................................................................................................... 164 Profiler Control & Status Parameters........................................................................................................ 166 Profile Setup via Modbus.......................................................................................................................... 169 21Glossary........................................................................................................................................................ 186 22 PC Software.................................................................................................................................................. 208 Using the PC Software ................................................................................................................................. 208 Instrument Simulation.................................................................................................................................... 209 Configuring the Connection........................................................................................................................... 210 Instrument Configuration............................................................................................................................... 212 Main Parameter Adjustment..................................................................................................................... 212 Extending Functionality via Software........................................................................................................ 213 Profile Creation and Editing........................................................................................................................... 214 Data Recorder Trend Upload & Analysis........................................................................................................ 216 23Specifications .............................................................................................................................................. 217 Universal Process Inputs............................................................................................................................... 217 General Input 1 and 2 Specifications........................................................................................................ 217 Thermocouple Input.................................................................................................................................. 217 Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Input......................................................................................... 218 DC Linear Input......................................................................................................................................... 218 Input Functions......................................................................................................................................... 219 Auxiliary Input................................................................................................................................................ 219 Digital Inputs.................................................................................................................................................. 220 Output Specifications ................................................................................................................................... 221 Communications ........................................................................................................................................... 223 Control Loop(s).............................................................................................................................................. 224 Alarms............................................................................................................................................................ 225 Profiler Option................................................................................................................................................ 225 Data Recorder Option.................................................................................................................................... 226 Display........................................................................................................................................................... 226 Operating Conditions .................................................................................................................................... 226 Conformance Norms..................................................................................................................................... 226 Dimensions.................................................................................................................................................... 226 24 Chromalox 4801/4082 Product Coding...................................................................................................... 227 vi 1 Introduction This product is a 1/4 DIN size (96 x 96mm front) microprocessor based graphical process controller, featuring a 160 x 80 pixel, monochrome LCD with dual color (red/ green) backlight. It operates from 100-240V at 50/60 Hz or 24V-48V AC/DC, depending on the model purchased. It can measure and control up to two process variables from a variety of sources such as temperature, pressure, flow and level. Primary and secondary control outputs are possible for each loop. over time, increasing, decreasing or holding their values as required. When combined with the real-time clock (part of the Data Recorder option) the profiling capabilities are expanded to allow automatic program start at a defined time and day. Inputs are user configurable for thermocouple and RTD probes, as well as linear process signal types such as mVDC, VDC or mADC. Two-point calibration or multipoint scaling can compensate for errors or non-linear signals. Output options include single or dual relays, single or dual SSR drivers, triacs or linear mA/V DC. These can be used for process control, alarms/events or retransmission of the process variable or setpoint to external devices. Transmitter power supply options can provide an unregulated 24V DC (22mA) auxiliary output voltage, or a 0 to 10VDC stabilized excitation for external signal transmitters. Optional features include a second process input, USB interface, remote setpoint inputs RS485 or Ethernet communications, profile control and data recording. Control options include cascade, ratio and 3-point stepping valve control. Automatic tuning or 5 stage gain-scheduling are also available. The USB Interface option allows uploading or downloading instrument configuration settings to/from a USB memory stick, for easy configuration of multiple instruments or transfer to/from the PC configuration software. If the data recorder or profiler options are fitted, recordings and profile information can be transferred via the memory stick. Up to 7 alarms can be defined as process high or low, deviation (active above or below controller setpoint), band (active both above and below setpoint), rate of input change, control loop, PID power or signal break types. Alarm status can be indicated by lighting an LED, changing the display backlight color or viewing the active alarm status screen. These alarms can be linked to any suitable output. The data recorder option allows the user to make recordings of the processes over time. Recordings can be transferred to a memory stick using the USB interface or downloaded via one of the communications options. Configuration for basic applications is possible using the easy Setup Wizard run automatically at first powerup or manually later. Access to the full range of parameters is via a simple menu driven front panel interface, or the PC based configuration software. The Profiler option allows the user to predefine up 255 segments, shared amongst up to 64 Setpoint Profiles. These control the setpoint levels for the control loop(s) 2 Installation Installation ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. Read and understand all instructions before ine installation, servicing or operating controller. Failure to do so could result in personal injury or death and/or equipment or property damage. ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. Installation should be only performed by technically competent personnel. It is the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the configuration is safe. Local Regulations regarding electrical installation & safety must be observed (e.g. US National Electrical Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical Code). Failute to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death or equipment/property damage. Unpacking 1. Remove the product from its packing. Retain the packing for future use, in case it is necessary to transport the instrument to a different site or to return it to the supplier for servicing. 2. The instrument is supplied with a panel gasket and push-fit mounting clamp. A multi-page concise manual is supplied with the instrument, in one or more languages. Examine the delivered items for damage or defects. If any are found, contact your supplier immediately. 1 If panel sealing must be maintained, mount each instrument into an individual cut-out with 10mm or more clearance between the edges of the holes. Note: The mounting clamp tongues may engage the ratchets either on the sides or the top/bottom faces of the Instrument housing. When installing several Instruments side-by-side in one cut-out, use the ratchets on the top/bottom faces. Ensure the inside of the panel remains within the instrument operating temperature and that there is adequate airflow to prevent overheating. Note: For an effective IP66 seal against dust and moisture, ensure gasket is well compressed against the panel, with the 4 tongues located in the same ratchet slot. Do not remove the panel gasket, as this may result in inadequate clamping and sealing of the instrument to the panel. Once the instrument is installed in its mounting panel, it may be subsequently removed from its housing if necessary, as described in the Fitting and Removing Plugin Modules section. Figure 1. Main Dimensions Cleaning Clean the front panel by washing with warm soapy water and dry immediately. If the USB option is fitted, close the USB port cover before cleaning. Panel-Mounting The mounting panel must be rigid and may be up to 6.0mm (0.25 inches) thick. The cut-out size is: 92mm x 92mm (+0.5mm / -0.0mm). Instruments may be mounted side-by-side in a multiple installation, but instrument to panel moisture and dust sealing will be compromised. Allow a 20mm gap above, below and behind the instrument for ventilation. The cut-out width (for n instruments) is: (96n - 4) mm or (3.78n - 0.16) inches Gasket 1. Insert instrument into the panel cut-out. Mounting Panel 2. Hold front bezel firmly (without pressing on the display area), and re-fit mounting clamp. Push the clamp forward, using a tool if necessary, until gasket compresses and instrument is held firmly in position. Clamp Ratchets Instrument Housing Figure 2. Panel-Mounting 2 3 Field Upgrade Options Plug-Modules and Upgradeable Functions Plug-Modules can be either pre-installed at the time of manufacture, or retrofitted in the field to expand the capabilities of the controller. Contact your supplier to purchase these items. Part numbers and circuit board identification numbers for the plug-in modules and accessories are shown in below: Plastic pegs prevent fitting of older non-reinforced single relay modules (Board Identification Numbers 637/01 and 638/01). Fitting the older relay modules reduces the isolation rating to Basic 240V Isolation and is therefore not recommended. Remove this peg when fitting Dual Relay Modules. Table 1. Options and Accessories PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION BOARD IDENTIFICATION NUMBER OPTION SLOT (OUTPUT) 1 0149-50043 Single Relay Output for option slot (Output) 1 716/01 716/01 0149-50044 Single SSR Driver Output for option slot (Output) 1 716/02 716/02 0149-50077 Triac Output for option slot (Output) 1 716/03 0149-50047 Linear mA / Voltage Output module for option slot (Output) 1 639/01 OPTION SLOT (OUTPUT) 2 OR 3 0149-50050 Single Relay Output for option slot (Output) 2 or 3 717/01 0149-50049 Dual Relay Output for option slot (Output) 2 or 3 644/01 0149-50051 Single SSR Driver Output for option slot (Output) 2 or 3 717/02 0149-50052 Dual SSR Driver Output for option slot (Output) 2 or 3 644/02 0149-50070 Triac module Output for slot (Output) 2 or 3 647/01 0149-50053 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply for option slot (Output) 2 or 3 642/01 Digital Input for plug-in module slot A 641/02 OPTION SLOT A 0149-50056 0149-50057 Basic Auxiliary Input for plug-in module slot A 653/01 0149-50055 RS485 Serial Communications for plug-in module slot A 680/01 0149-50058 Ethernet Communications for plug-in module slot A 707/01 ACCESSORIES 0149-50063 Profiler Enable Key-code 0149-50092 ChromaloxPro Configuration Software Only (60 & 80 Series) 0149-50086 Univ S/W Converter & PC Cable 20/40/50/60/80 Series 0149-50088 Cable Only – 40/50/80 Series to Universal Adaptor 3 Board Positions Main Board Connectors Note: All dual relay modules have reinforced isolation. POWER SUPPLY BOARD Transformer Color Code 100-240V (Yellow) 24-48V(Blue) Board Mounting Struts (x4) Front Panel Removal Latch (x1) Display Board Connections Plug-in Module A 1st UNIVERSAL INPUT / BASE OPTION 1 BOARD Plug-in Module 3 Power Supply Board Module Slot 3 Connector PL4B Module Slot A Connectors PL5, & PL6 Module Slot 1 Connectors PL7 & PL8 PC Configurator Socket SK1 Module Slot 2 Connector PL4A 2nd Universal Input & Base Option 2 Board 1st Universal Input & Base Option 1 Board Figure 4. Main Board Connectors Plug-in Module 1 Plug-in Module 2 This product is designed to allow the user to reconfigure some hardware options in the field by changing the plug-in modules in slots 1, 2, 3, & A located on the power supply and 1st universal input boards. The main boards (display/CPU, power supply, inputs 1 & 2 and digital input/USB) are factory fitted, but may be removed while reconfiguring the plug-in modules. Take care when re-fitting these boards. Observe the power supply board transformer color, and case labelling to check the supply voltage, otherwise irreparable damage may occur. USB/Digital Input C Option Board Figure 3. Rear View (uncased) & Board Positions Preparing to Install or Remove Options Modules ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. Disconnect all power before installing or servicing controller. Failure to do so could result in personal injury or property damage. Replacement of boards must be carried out by a technically competent technician. If the Power Supply board does not match the labelling, users may apply incorrect voltage resulting in irreparable damage. 1. Grip the edges of the front panel (there is a finger grip on each edge) and pull it forwards approximately 10mm, until the Front Panel Removal Latch prevents further movement. The purpose of the latch is to prevent removal of the instrument without the use of a tool. Removing/Replacing Option Modules 1. To remove or replace Plug-in Modules 1, 2, 3 or A it is necessary to detach the power supply and input boards from the front panel by lifting first the upper and then lower mounting struts. 2. The Front Panel Removal Latch must be pushed down to allow removal of the instrument. Using a tool (e.g. screwdriver or pen tip), press down it down through the front central ventilation hole. This will release the instrument from the case. 2. Remove or fit the modules to the connectors on the power supply and input boards. The location of the connectors is shown below. Plastic pegs prevent fitting of older nonreinforced single relay modules – Remove the peg to fit dual relay modules 3. The internal boards can now be accessed. Take note of the orientation of the instrument and boards for subsequent replacement into the housing. The positions of the boards, their mountings and the Front Panel Removal Latch are shown above. 3. Assemble the Power Supply and Input boards together. Tongues on each option module locate into slots cut into the main boards, opposite each of the connectors. Hold the Power and Input boards together and relocate them back on their mounting struts. 4 Data Recorder Board 4. Push the boards forward to ensure correct connection to the front Display/CPU board and re-check the installation of the Option C and/or 2nd Input / Base Option 2 boards if present. If installed, the Data Recorder memory and Real Time Clock (RTC) components are located on a plug-in daughter board attached to the front Display/CPU board. Check for correct orientation of the modules and that all pins are located correctly. Servicing of the Data Recorder/RTC circuit and replacement of the lithium battery should only be carried out by a technically competent technician. Replacing the Instrument in its Housing Profiler Enabling ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. Disconnect all power before installing or servicing controller. Failure to do so could result in personal injury or property damage. If you purchased a controller with the Profiler option installed, these features will be enabled during manufacture. Controllers supplied without the Profiler option installed can be upgraded in the field by purchasing a licence code number from your supplier. A unique code must be purchased to enable profiling on each controller that requires it. With the required option modules correctly located into their respective positions the instrument can be replaced into its housing as follows: 1. Hold the Power Supply and Input boards together. 2. Align the boards with the guides in the housing. Entering the Profiler Enable Code 3. Slowly and firmly, push the instrument into position in its case. Hold down the “splash screen”. and keys during the power-up Using the or keys, enter the 16-character licence code in the displayed screen. Ensure that the instrument is correctly orientated. A mechanical stop will operate if an attempt is made to insert the instrument in the wrong orientation, this stop MUST NOT be over-ridden. Press to move on to the next character. Press move back to the previous character. Press to after entering the final character. To confirm if profiling is installed in your instrument, check the Controller Feature Information in Product & Service Information Mode. Auto Detection of Plug-in Modules The instrument automatically detects which plug-in modules have been fitted into each slot. The menus and screens change to reflect the options compatible with the hardware. The modules fitted can be viewed in the product information menu, as detailed in the Product & Service Information Mode section of this manual. 5 4 Electrical Installation tween them. If wires MUST cross each other, ensure they do so at 90 degrees to minimize interference. ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. Installation should be only performed by technically competent personnel. It is the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the configuration is safe. Local Regulations regarding electrical installation & safety must be observed (e.g. US National Electrical Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical Code). Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or death and/or equipment / property damage. Keep signal cables as short as possible. If an earthed thermocouple is used or if the sensor has a screened cable, it should be earthed at one point only, preferably at the sensor location or cabinet entry point, by means of a metal gland. Ideally all analogue and digital signals should be shielded like this, but for unscreened cables, large diameter ferrite sleeves at the cabinet entry point are an effective method of reducing RF interference. Looping cables through the ferrite sleeves a number of times improves the efficiency of the filtering. For mains input cables the fitting a suitable mains filter can provide good results. Avoiding EMC Problems This controller has passed EMC compliance tests to EN61326. There should be no difficulty achieving this level of compliance in use, but it should be borne in mind that the wiring of the installation can significantly reduce the efficiency of instrumentation immunity due to the ease with which high frequency RF can enter via unprotected cables. Noise Suppression at Source If possible, eliminate mechanical contact relays and replace with solid-state relays. Noise-generating devices such as Ignition transformers, arc welders, motor drives, relays and solenoids should be mounted in a separate enclosure. If this is not possible, separate them from the instrumentation, by the largest distance possible. The following general recommendations can reduce the possibility of EMC problems. Many manufacturers of relays, contactors etc supply ‘surge suppressors’ to reduce noise at its source. For those devices that do not have surge suppressors supplied, Resistance-Capacitance (RC) networks and/or Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) may be added. 1. If the instrument is being installed in existing equipment, wiring in the area should be checked to ensure that good wiring practices have been followed. 2.The controller should be mounted in a properly earthed metal cabinet. All round metal shielding is important, so the cabinet door may require a conductive sealing strip. Inductive coils: MOVs are recommended for transient suppression in inductive coils. Connect as close as possible, in parallel to the coil. Additional protection may be provided by adding an RC network across the MOV. 3. It is good practice to ensure that the AC neutral is at or near ground (earth) potential. A proper neutral will help ensure maximum performance from the instrument. 4. Consider using a separate isolation transformer to feed only the instrumentation. A transformer can protect instruments from noise found on the AC power supply. Cable Isolation & Protection Four voltage levels of input and output wiring may be used with the unit: Figure 5. Transient Suppression with Inductive Coils 1. Analog inputs or outputs (for example thermocouple, RTD, VDC, mVDC or mADC) 2. Relays & Triac outputs 4. AC power Contacts: Arcing may occur across contacts when they open and close. This results in electrical noise as well as damage to the contacts. Connecting a properly sized RC network can eliminate this arc. The only wires that should run together are those of the same category. For circuits up to 3 amps, a combination of a 47 ohm resistor and 0.1 microfarad capacitor (1000 volts) is recommended. For circuits from 3 to 5 amps, connect two of these in parallel. 3. Digital Inputs & SSR Driver outputs If any wires need to run parallel with any from another category, maintain a minimum space of 150mm be- 6 The placement of probes into pipe work some distance from the heating vessel leads to transport delay, which results in poor control. For a two wire RTD, a wire link should be used in place of the third wire (see the wiring section for details). Two wire RTDs should only be used with lead lengths less than 3 metres. Use of three wire RTDs is strongly recommended to reduce errors do to lead resistance. Thermocouple Wire Identification The different thermocouple types are identified by their wires color, and where possible, the outer insulation as well. There are several standards in use throughout the world, but most regions now use the International IEC584-3 standard. Figure 6. Contact Noise Suppression Sensor Placement (Thermocouple or RTD) The table below shows the wire and sheath colors used for most common thermocouple types. The format used in this table is: + Wire Sheath - Wire If a temperature probe is to be subjected to corrosive or abrasive conditions, it must be protected by an appropriate thermowell. Probes must be positioned to reflect the true process temperature: 1. In a liquid media - the most agitated area2. Table 2. In air - the best circulated area Type J Type J T T N C (W5) - White - White - White + Green + Brown -* White - White + Green -*B White K + Pink + Grey + Orange Note: USA ANSI MC 96.1 Blue Brown White Red Blue Red Pink White Yellow White Red Grey Orange Orange +Pink White +Grey - Red Black Yellow Green Grey +Green - Black Red Brown Pink + - British BS1843 White Yellow Table 2. Thermocouple Extension Wire Colors Black - USA ANSI MC 96.1 Black Black -C (W5) White R&S Black International + Brown IEC584-3 -R &White S B +* +* N K International IEC584-3 Thermocouple Extension Wire Colors Orange Red Grey Red Black Wire isOrange magneticRed - *= White + White - Red Blue Orange White BS1843 Blue Blue Yellow Red Yellow Grey Red Black Orange Red White Grey White Blue Orange Brown Blue Grey Orange Green Blue Yellow Red Black Brown Black Black British Yellow Red German DIN 43710 Black Blue Blue French NFC 42-324 French NFC Blue Yellow 42-324 Yellow Blue Black Yellow Yellow Purple Black Red Blue Blue Orange Blue Red Blue Orange Yellow Purple German Red DIN 43710 Blue Red Brown Blue Red Red Green Blue Yellow Brown Red Green White Orange Yellow Green Brown Green Red Grey Blue Red Green Green Grey Green Yellow Green Green White White Red Blue Green Grey White White Brown Blue Yellow Red Green Blue Blue Red White Grey White White *Wire is magnetic. a magnet can be used to assist with correctly identifying the type and polarity of the conductors 7 Pre-Wiring: Cautions, Warnings & Information Installation should be only performed by technically competent personnel. It is the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the configuration is safe. Local Regulations regarding electrical installation & safety must be observed (e.g. US National Electrical Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical Code). ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AC POWER WIRING MUST NOT BE CONNECTED TO THE SOURCE DISTRIBUTION PANEL UNTIL ALL WIRING PROCEDURES ARE COMPLETED. CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT VOLTAGE BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH AND/OR EQUIPMENT / PROPERTY DAMAGE. ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. THIS EQUIPMENT IS DESIGNED FOR INSTALLATION IN AN ENCLOSURE THAT PROVIDES ADEQUATE PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THE ISOLATION SWITCH SHOULD BE LOCATED IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO THE UNIT, IN EASY REACH OF THE OPERATOR AND APPROPRIATELY MARKED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH AND/OR EQUIPMENT / PROPERTY DAMAGE. This symbol means the equipment is protected throughout by double insulation. All external circuits connected must provide double insulation. Failure to comply with the installation instructions may impact the protection provided by the unit. 8 Connections and Wiring Central Terminal Connections ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT VOLTAGE BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH AND/OR EQUIPMENT / PROPERTY DAMAGE. Note: The wiring diagram below shows all possible combinations to the main connections (numbered 1 to 24) in the centre of the case rear. The actual connections required depends upon the features and modules fitted. OPTION OPTION OPTION OPTION Figure 7. Central Terminals 1 to 24 9 Outer Terminal Connections Note: The wiring diagram below shows the Central Terminals (numbered 25 to 42) at the sides of the case rear. Connections for the 2nd Input, Base Option 2 and Digital Input C are shown. The actual connections required depends upon the features and modules fitted. Figure 8. Outer Terminals 25 to 42 Power Connections Power Connections - Mains Powered Instruments ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. CHECK THE INFORMATION LABEL ON THE CASE TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT VOLTAGE BEFORE CONNECTING TO A LIVE SUPPLY. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH AND/OR EQUIPMENT / PROPERTY DAMAGE. Mains powered instruments operate from a 100 to 240V (±10%) 50/60Hz supply. Power consumption is 20VA. Connect the line and neutral as illustrated via a UL listed fuse type: 250V AC 1Amp anti-surge and a two-pole IEC60947-1 & IEC60947-3 compliant isolation switch / circuit breaker located within easy reach of the operator and appropriately marked. If relays switch mains voltage this should be separate from the instruments mains supply. ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. THIS EQUIPMENT IS DESIGNED FOR INSTALLATION IN AN ENCLOSURE THAT PROVIDES ADEQUATE PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTRIC SHOCK. THE ISOLATION SWITCH SHOULD BE LOCATED IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO THE UNIT, IN EASY REACH OF THE OPERATOR AND APPROPRIATELY MARKED. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH AND/OR EQUIPMENT / PROPERTY DAMAGE. Figure 9. Mains Power Connections 10 Power Connections - 24/48V AC/DC Powered Instruments Universal Input 1 Connections – PT100 / NI120 (RTD) input 24/48V AD/DC powered instruments will operate from a 20 to 48V AC or 22 to 55V DC supply. AC power consumption is 15VA max, DC power consumption is 12 watts max. Connection should be via a UL listed fuse type: 65v dc 350mAamp anti-surge and a two-pole IEC60947-1 & IEC60947-3 compliant isolation switch / circuit breaker located within easy reach of the operator and appropriately marked. The inputs supports two types of RTD. PT100 (platinum sensor, 100Ω at 0°C). For three wire RTDs, connect the resistive leg and the common legs of the RTD as illustrated. For a two wire RTD a wire link should be fitted across terminals 2 & 3 (in place of the third wire). Two wire RTDs should only be used when the leads are less than 3 metres long. Avoid cable joints. Figure 10. 24/48V AC/DC Power Connections Universal Input 1 Connections Figure 12. Input 1 - RTD Connections Universal Input 1 is present on all models. This input is normally used for the measured variable signal from a process to be controlled. It can be connected to thermocouples; resistance temperature detectors; analogue mA; mV or V DC signals. The input settings are in the Input 1 Configuration sub-menu. Connections for the various types are shown below. Ensure that the signal is correctly connected, paying particular attention to the polarity. Four wire RTDs can be used, provided that the fourth wire is left unconnected. This wire should be cut short or tied back so that it cannot contact any of the terminals on the rear of the instrument. Universal Input 1 Connections - Linear Volt, mV or mA input The input supports the following linear/analogue signals: 0 to 50mV; 10 to 50mV; 0 to 5V; 1 to 5V; 0 to 10V; 2 to 10V; 0 to 20mV; 4 to 20mA from any suitable source. Voltage & millivolt signals are connected to terminals 2 & 3, milliamp signals are connected to 1 & 3. Carefully observe the position & polarity of the connections. Universal Input 1 Connections Thermocouple (T/C) Supported thermocouple types & ranges are listed in the input specifications section on page 245. Only use the correct thermocouple wire or compensating cable from the sensor to the instrument terminals avoiding joints in the cable if possible. Where joints are made, special thermocouple connectors must be used. Failure to use the correct wire type and connectors will lead to inaccurate readings. Ensure correct polarity of the wires by cross-referencing the colors with the thermocouple reference table. Figure 13. Input 1 - DC Volt, mV & mA Connections Figure 11. Input 1 - Thermocouple Connections 11 Universal / Auxiliary Input 2 Connections An Auxiliary Input 2 option is fitted to some models. This can connect to a potentiometer; analogue mA; mV or V DC signal for a remote setpoint input signal, or for flow/valve position feedback information. Alternatively, a second Universal Input 2 option may be fitted. In addition to the remote setpoint input signal or feedback information possible with the auxiliary input, the 2nd Universal Input can be used as a second process control loop for two control loops, or used in conjunction with input one in more complex single control loops. Universal Input 2 can be connected to thermocouples; resistance temperature detectors; potentiometers; analogue mA; mV or V DC signals. Figure 15. Input 2 - RTD Connections Four wire RTDs can be used, provided that the fourth wire is left unconnected. This wire should be cut short or tied back so that it cannot contact any of the terminals on the rear of the instrument. Universal / Auxiliary Input 2 Connections Linear Volt, mV or mA input The settings are in the Input 2 Configuration sub-menu. Connections for the various types are shown below. Ensure that the signal is correctly connected, paying particular attention to the polarity. The optional auxiliary or 2nd universal input supports the following linear/analogue signals: 0 to 50mV; 10 to 50mV; 0 to 5V; 1 to 5V; 0 to 10V; 2 to 10V; 0 to 20mV; 4 to 20mA from any suitable source. Voltage & millivolt signals are connected to terminals 2 & 3, milliamp signals are connected to 1 & 3. Carefully observe the polarity of the connections. Universal Input 2 Connections Thermocouple (T/C) The optional 2nd universal input, supports various thermocouple types. Supported types & ranges are listed in the input specifications section on page 245. Only use the correct thermocouple wire or compensating cable from the sensor to the instrument terminals avoiding joints in the cable if possible. Where joints are made, special thermocouple connectors must be used. Failure to use the correct wire type and connectors will lead to inaccurate readings. Ensure correct polarity of the wires by cross-referencing the colors with a thermocouple reference table. Figure 16. Input 2 - DC Volt, mV & mA Connections Universal / Auxiliary Input 2 Connections – Potentiometer Figure 14. Input 2 - Thermocouple Connections The optional auxiliary or 2nd universal input, the terminals detailed below can be used to connect a feedback potentiometer. Minimum potentiometer resistance is ≥100Ω. Universal Input 2 Connections – PT100 / NI120 (RTD) Input The optional 2nd universal input, supports two types of RTD. PT100 (platinum sensor, 100Ω at 0°C). For three wire RTDs, connect the resistive leg and the common legs of the RTD as illustrated. For a two wire RTD a wire link should be fitted across terminals 35 & 36 (in place of the third wire). Two wire RTDs should only be used when the leads are less than 3 metres long. If possible, avoid cable joints. Figure 17. Input 2 - Potentiometer Connections 12 Base Option 1 Base Option 1 provides one or two factory fitted outputs. A relay designated as Output 4 is fitted on all models, and an optional linear mA/V DC designated as Output 6. Base options cannot be added after manufacture. The functions of outputs 4 & 6 are set in the Output Configuration sub-menu. Connect as illustrated below. Figure 20. Relay Output 5 Connections Base Option 2 Linear Output 7 Base Option 1 Relay Output 4 Part of base option 2, Output 7 is an optional linear mV/V DC analogue output. The type & range are selectable from 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 2 to 10V & 0 to 20 or 4 to 20mA. Present on all instruments, Output 4 is a SPST relay, rated at 2 amps at 240 VAC resistive. If it is used to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instrument supply and should be correctly switched and fused. Figure 21. Linear Output 7 Connections Figure 18. Relay Output 4 Connections Plug-in Module Slot 1 Connections A selection of plug-in modules are available for Module Slot 1. They can be fitted during manufacture, or purchased and fitted later by the user. Modules in slot 1 are designated Output 1. They are not interchangeable with those in slot 2 or 3. Their function is set in the Output Configuration sub-menu. Connect as illustrated below. Base Option 1 Linear Output 6 Part of base option 1, Output 6 is an optional linear mV/V DC analogue output. The type & range are selectable from 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 2 to 10V & 0 to 20 or 4 to 20mA. Plug-in Module Slot 1 – Single Relay Output Module If fitted with a single relay output module, connect as shown. The relay contacts are SPDT and rated at 2 amps resistive, 240 VAC. If it is used to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instrument supply and should be correctly switched and fused. Figure 19. Linear Output 6 Connections Base Option 2 Base Option 2 provides one or two factory fitted outputs. An optional relay designated as Output 5, and an optional linear mA/V DC designated as Output 7. Base options cannot be added after manufacture. The functions of outputs 5 & 7 are set in the Output Configuration sub-menu. Connect as illustrated below. Base Option 2 Relay Output 5 Figure 22. Plug-in Module Slot 1 – Single Relay Module Part of base option 2, Output 5 is a SPST relay, rated at 2 amps at 240 VAC resistive. If it is used to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instrument supply and should be correctly switched and fused. Plug-in Module Slot 1 – Single SSR Driver Output Module If fitted with a single SSR Driver output module, connect as shown. The 10V DC pulse signal (load resistance ≥500 ohms) is isolated from all inputs/outputs except other SSR drivers. 13 Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Single Relay Output Module If fitted with a single relay output module, connect as shown. The relay contacts are SPDT and rated at 2 amps resistive, 240 VAC. If it is used to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instrument supply and should be correctly switched and fused. Figure 23. Plug-in Module Slot 1 – Single SSR Driver Module Plug-in Module Slot 1 Triac Output Module If fitted with a triac output module, connect as shown. This output is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC 50/60Hz. Isolated from all other inputs and outputs. A snubber should be fitted across inductive loads to ensure reliable switch off of the Triac. Figure 26. Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Single Relay Module Plug-in Module Slot 2 - Dual Relay Output Module If fitted with a dual relay output module, connect as shown. This module has two independent SPST relays for outputs 2A and 2B, with a shared common terminal. The contacts are rated at 2 amp resistive 240 VAC. If used to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instruments mains supply and the contacts should be correctly switched and fused. Figure 24. Plug-in Module Slot 1 - Triac Module Plug-in Module Slot 1 - Linear Voltage or mADC Output module If fitted with a DC linear output module, connect as shown. Output type & range are selectable from 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 2 to 10V & 0 to 20 or 4 to 20mA. Isolated from all other inputs and outputs. Figure 27. Plug-in Module Slot 2 - Dual Relay Module Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Single SSR Driver Output Module Figure 25. Plug-in Module Slot 1 - Linear Voltage & mADC Module If fitted with a single SSR Driver output module, connect as shown. The 10V DC pulse signal (load resistance ≥500 ohms) is isolated from all inputs/outputs except other SSR drivers. Plug-In Module Slot 2 Connections A selection of plug-in modules are available for Module Slot 2. They are interchangeable with slot 3, but not slot 1.They can be fitted during manufacture, or purchased and fitted later by the user. Modules in slot 2 are designated Output 2, and for dual modules Output 2A and 2B. Their functions are set in the Output Configuration sub-menu. Connect as illustrated below. 14 Figure 31. Plug-in Module Slot 2 Transmitter Power Supply Module Figure 28. Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Single SSR Driver Module Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Dual SSR Driver Output Module Plug-in Slot 3 Connections A selection of plug-in modules are available for Module Slot 3. They are interchangeable with slot 2, but not slot 1.They can be fitted during manufacture, or purchased and fitted later by the user. Modules in slot 3 are designated Output 3, and for dual modules Output 3A and 3B. Their functions are set in the Output Configuration sub-menu. Connect as illustrated below. If fitted with a dual SSR Driver output module, the two solid-state relay driver outputs are designated as Output 2A and 2B. The outputs are 10V DC pulse signals, (load resistance ≥500 ohms). They are isolated from all inputs/output except other SSR driver outputs. Connect as shown making note of the shared positive common terminal. Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Single Relay Output Module If fitted with a single relay output module, connect as shown. The relay contacts are SPDT and rated at 2 amps resistive, 240 VAC. If it is used to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instrument supply and should be correctly switched and fused. Figure 29. Plug-in Module Slot 2 – Dual SSR Driver Module Plug-in Module Slot 2 Triac Output Module If fitted with a Triac output module, connect as shown. This output is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC 50/60Hz. Isolated from all other inputs and outputs. A snubber should be fitted across inductive loads to ensure reliable switch off of the Triac. Figure 32. Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Single Relay Module Plug-in Module Slot 3 - Dual Relay Output Module If fitted with a dual relay output module, connect as shown. This module has two independent SPST relays for outputs 3A and 3B, with a shared common terminal. The contacts are rated at 2 amp resistive 240 VAC. If used to switch mains voltages, the supply should be separate from the instruments mains supply and the contacts should be correctly switched and fused. Figure 30. Plug-in Module Slot 2 - Triac Module Plug-in Module Slot 2 Transmitter Power Supply Module If fitted with a transmitter power supply module (TxPSU), connect as shown. The output is a 24V nominal (unregulated, 19 to 28V DC), supply at 22mA max. Only one TxPSU is supported, do not fit in slot 2 if one is already fitted in slot 3. Figure 33 Plug-in Module Slot 3 - Dual Relay Module 15 Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Single SSR Driver Output Module Plug-in Module Slot 3 - Transmitter Power Supply Module If fitted with a single SSR Driver output module, connect as shown. The 10V DC pulse signal (load resistance ≥500 ohms) is isolated from all inputs/outputs except other SSR drivers. If fitted with a transmitter power supply module (TxPSU), connect as shown. The output is a 24V nominal (unregulated, 19 to 28V DC), supply at 22mA max. Only one TxPSU is supported, do not fit in slot 3 if one is already fitted in slot 2. Figure 34 Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Single SSR Driver Module Figure 37. Plug-in Module Slot 3 Transmitter Power Supply Module Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Dual SSR Driver Output Module Plug-in Slot A Connections If fitted with a dual SSR Driver output module, the two solid-state relay driver outputs are designated as Output 3A and 3B. The outputs are 10V DC pulse signals, (load resistance ≥500 ohms). They are isolated from all inputs/output except other SSR driver outputs. Connect as shown making note of the shared positive common terminal. A selection of plug-in modules are available for Module Slot A. They can be fitted during manufacture, or purchased and fitted later by the user. Depending on their functions, they are setup Input or Communications configuration sub-menus. Connect as illustrated below. Plug-in Module Slot A – Basic Auxiliary Input Module If fitted with a basic auxiliary mA/V DC analogue input module, connect as shown. Isolated from all inputs/ outputs. Consider using the 2nd auxiliary input (if available) instead, as this has additional features and leaves plug-in module slot A free for other modules. Figure 35. Plug-in Module Slot 3 – Dual SSR Driver Module Plug-in Module Slot 3 Triac Output Module Figure 38. Plug-in Module Slot A – Basic Auxiliary Input Module If fitted with a Triac output module, connect as shown. This output is rated at 0.01 to 1 amp @ 280V AC 50/60Hz. Isolated from all other inputs and outputs. A snubber should be fitted across inductive loads to ensure reliable switch off of the Triac. Plug-in Module Slot A Ethernet Communications Module If fitted with the Ethernet communication module, the communications protocol available is Modbus TCP. Isolated from all inputs/outputs. If necessary, cut out the removable panel to access the RJ45 connector through the top of the case. No rear connections are required. Figure 36. Plug-in Module Slot 3 - Triac Module 16 Plug-in Module Slot A RS485 Serial Communications Module Option C Connections – Multiple Digital Input Module If fitted with the RS485 serial communication module, the protocol used is Modbus RTU. Isolated from all inputs/outputs. Carefully observe the polarity of the A (Rx/Tx +ve) and B (Rx/Tx -ve) connections. If the Multiple Digital Input option is fitted, the connections are as illustrated. The 8 opto-isolated inputs each have a positive input terminal and share a common negative terminal. The inputs are held high with internal pull-up resistors, so may be connected to either voltage free contacts (e.g. from a switch), or TTL compatible signals: Logic High = Open contacts (>5000Ω) or 2 to 24VDC signal. Logic Low = Closed contacts (<50Ω) or -0.6 to +0.8VDC signal. Figure 39. Plug-in Module Slot A – RS485 Serial Communications Module External computing devices connected to the communications port should comply with the standard, UL 60950. Plug-in Module Slot A – Single Digital Input Module If a digital input module is fitted, it provides a fully isolated input that is held high via a pull-up resistor. The input can be connected to either to voltage free contacts (e.g. from a switch), or a TTL compatible signal. Logic High = Open contacts (>5000Ω) or 2 to 24VDC signal. Logic Low = Closed contacts (<50Ω) or -0.6 to +0.8VDC signal.. Connect as shown. Figure 14. Input 2 - Thermocouple Connections Special Wiring Considerations for Valve Motor Control Figure 40. Plug-in Module Slot A – Digital Input A Module Valve Motor Drive (VMD) controllers require two identical outputs to be assigned to position the valve. One to open and one to close the valve. These outputs can be two single relays, two triacs, two SSR drivers or one dual relay, but it is recommended to use two single relays (SPDT change-over contacts), and to interlock the relay wiring as shown. This prevents both motor windings from being driven at the same time, even under fault conditions. Option C Connections Option C offers a factory fitted multiple digital input option. The board also accommodates the USB port if that is option is fitted. The USB port does not have connections on the rear terminal, it is accessed via the front panel. Switching actuators directly connected to the valve motor must only be used up to half of their rated voltage (see CAUTION below). The internal relay and triac outputs are rated at 240VAC, so the maximum motor voltage when using them in this way is therefore 120V unless interposing relays are used. Interposing relays or other devices used to control the valve must themselves be rated for twice the motor supply voltage. 17 Open Valve Winding “OPEN” RELAY N/O 2 x 120V = 240V C 120V ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. The windings of a valve motor effectively form an autotransformer. This has a voltage doubling effect when power is applied to either the Open or Close terminal, causing twice the supplied voltage at the other terminal. For this reason, switching devices directly connected to the valve motor must only be used up to half of their rated voltage. The maximum motor voltage when using the internal relays/triacs is therefore 120V unless interposing relays are used. Interposing relays or other devices used to control the valve must themselves be rated for twice the motor supply voltage. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or equipment damage. Valve Common Close Valve Winding N/C N/O C N/C “CLOSE” RELAY 120VAC SUPPLY Figure 42. Interlocking of Valve Motor Drive Relays 5 Powering Up Ensure safe wiring practices have been followed. When powering up for the first time, disconnect the output connections. The instrument must be powered from a supply according to the wiring label on the side of the unit. The supply will be either 100 to 240V AC, or 24/48V AC/DC powered. Check carefully the supply voltage and connections before applying power Powering Up Procedure At power up, a self-test procedure is automatically started, during which a splash screen is displayed and the LED indicators are lit. At the first power up from new, a Setup Wizard runs to assist configuration of basic applications (refer to the Setup Wizard section on page 43). At all other times, the instrument returns to the normal operation mode once the self-test procedure is complete. Figure 43. A Typical Front Panel Front Panel Overview The illustration below shows an instrument fitted with the optional USB socket located to the right of the four keypad buttons. Clean the front panel by washing with warm soapy water and dry immediately. If the USB option is fitted, close the port cover before cleaning. Display The instrument has a 160 x 80 pixel monochrome graphical display with dual color (red/green) backlight. The main display typically shows the process variables, setpoints, power / deviation bar graphs or graphical trends during normal operation. There are recorder and profile status screen. The top line of the display has labels for the 4 LED indicators. If desired, the backlight color can be changed to indicate the presence of an active alarm or latched output. Refer to the Display Configuration section. 18 LED Functions Keypad Functions & Navigation There are four red LEDs that by default indicate the status of the primary & secondary outputs, automatic tuning and alarm status. The top line of the graphical display has four labels for LED indicators. The function of these LEDs and their display labels can be changed using the PC configuration software. The information in this manual assumes standard functions for these LEDs. Each instrument has four keypad switches, which are used to navigate through the user menus and adjust the parameter values. In configuration screens, a context sensitive scrolling help text is displayed that guides the user about the function of the keys. Button Function Moves backward to the previous parameter or screen in the current mode. Holding this key down for more than 1 second skips immediately to the previous screen accepting ALL values as shown. CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current (highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as this action will update the instrument to the value displayed. In menus and configuration choice screens, this key moves to the next item on the list. Editable values can be decreased by pressing this key. Holding the key down speeds up the change. In Trend views this key moves the Cursor Line back through the stored data points In menus and configuration choice screens, this key moves to the previous item on the list. Editable values can be increased by pressing this key. Holding the key down speeds up the change. In Trend views this key moves the Cursor Line forward through the stored data points Moves forward to the next parameter or screen in the current mode. Holding this key down for more than 1 second skips immediately to the next screen accepting ALL values as shown. CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current (highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as this action will update the instrument to the value displayed. Pressing the key while holding down the key causes the instrument to move up one menu level. From Operation Mode and in most menus, this will result in entry to the Main Menu. From sub-menus, it is necessary to carry out this sequence more than once to reach the main menu. CAUTION: If editing a parameter, ensure that the current (highlighted) parameter value is correct before pressing the key as this action will update the instrument to the value displayed. 19 6 Messages and Error Indicators Plug-in Module Problems Auxiliary Input Over-range or Under-range Indication If an invalid or unknown module is detected in one of the plug-in module slots during the power-up self-test, the message “Fault Found, Press , for details” is shown. This is followed by “Replace faulty module in Module Slot n, Press ,” (where n is the faulty slot location). The Service Contact information is displayed next showing details of who to contact if a fault persists If the auxiliary Remote Setpoint input is more than 5% above than the Auxiliary Input Upper Limit, its value is replaced by the word “HIGH” to indicate that it is out of range. If the auxiliary Remote Setpoint input is more than 5% below than the Auxiliary Input Lower Limit, its value is replace by the word “LOW” to indicate that it is out of range. Replace the module in slot “n”. If this does not solve the problem, return the instrument for investigation. Cascade-Open “Cascade Open” is shown on the main screen if the internal link has be severed between cascaded master and slave control loops. This mode should only be used for diagnostics and slave tuning. Close the cascade for proper operation. Refer to the Cascade Control section for more information. Do not continue using the product until the the error is resolved. Sensor Break Detection Whenever a problem is detected with a process variable or auxiliary input connection, the displayed value for that input is replaced with the word “OPEN”; except in Ratio control where an open input 1 or 2 is shown as “x1-Open” or “x2-Open”. See Redundant Input to protect critical processes from sensor faults. Profile Not Valid If the user attempts to run a profile that would take the setpoint beyond the current setpoint limits, the profile will not run and the message “Profile Not Valid” is displayed at the bottom of the profile status screen. This may be the result of a failed sensor, a broken connection or an input circuit fault. USB Data Transfer Failure message In this condition, the control outputs go to the pre-set power value (see Control Configuration.) If the instrument cannot successfully write to the USB memory stick, the message “Data Transfer Failure” will be displayed. Check that there is adequate disk space on the memory stick, then retry. Correct the signal/wiring problem to continue normal operation. If the instrument cannot successfully read data from the USB memory stick, the message “Data Transfer Failure” will also appear. Check that this operation would not cause the maximum number of profiles and/ or segments to be exceeded then retry. Un-Calibrated Input Detection The instrument is fully calibrated during manufacture. If a fault occurs and calibration data is lost, the process input displays are replaced with the word “ERROR” and error is shown instead of “Calibrated” for effected inputs in Service & Product Information mode. Getting Help First Level Support If the errors persist or other problems are encountered, refer your supplier for first level support. This includes help with configuration, tuning, servicing and replacement modules. In this condition, the control outputs go to the pre-set power value (see Control Configuration). Second Level Support If your supplier is unable to assist or cannot be contacted, check the Service & Product Information screen on the main menu for details of who to contact. Perform a full base calibration of the input before continuing normal operation. If the problem persists, return the instrument for servicing. PV Over-Range or Under-Range Indication Third Level Support If further assistance is required, contact the nearest company from those listed on the back page of this manual. If a measured process input value is more than 5% above than the Scaled Input Upper Limit, its value is replace by the word “HIGH” to indicate that it is out of range. Servicing If you need to return your instrument for servicing, contact your supplier or check the Service & Product Information screen on the main menu for instructions for its return. If a measured process input value is more than 5% below than the Scaled Input Lower Limit, its value is replaced by the word “LOW” to indicate that it is out of range. 20 7 Application Setup Before beginning configuration, consider how the controller will be used in your application. For instance, how many control loops are needed, is cascade or ratio control required, will the unit control a valve motor, do you need setpoint profiling etc. Consideration should also be given to the output types, alarms and tuning method. more complex applications where the wizard is not sufficient, consideration must be given to the following fundamental questions: If fitted, how will the 2nd input be used? • One loop only (if the 2nd input not fitted or not used in this application) • Two independent control loops • Valve feedback for loop 1 • A “redundant” backup for the 1st input • Cascaded with the first control loop • A reference input for ratio control This section is intended to help with this process, guiding you through the major configuration settings. Additional information can be found in the relevant sections of this manual, including the glossary, configuration menus, and dedicated sections for major features. These are listed in the table of contents. How will the instrument physically control the process? •Primary only or primary & secondary control outputs • Direct valve motor drive outputs Pre-Commissioning Considerations An easy Setup Wizard is available for basic applications where the most commonly required parameters are present for adjustment in turn. The wizard has a sub-set of the full configuration menu options. For The table below shows the main input and control configuration settings for these application types (see configuration menus). Loop 2 / Slave Loop 1 / Master Process Type* (only if 2nd input fitted) One Loop* Input 2 Configuration | Input 2 Usage = Not Used Two Loops* Control Configuration: Control Select Standard PID Control Select = Control Standard Control Configuration: Control Type Control Configuration: Control Select Control Configuration: Control Type Primary Only Control Type = Single Primary/Secondary Control Type = Dual Valve Motor Drive Control Select = VMD (TPSC) Control Standard PID Control Select = Control Standard Primary Only Standard PID Control Primary Only Control Control Type = Single Select = Control Type = Single Standard Primary/Secondary Input 2 ConfiguControl Type = Dual ration | Input 2 Usage = StanValve Motor Drive dard Control Select = VMD (TPSC) Control +Feedback* Valve Motor Drive Input 2 Configu- Control Select = VMD (TPSC) Control ration | Input 2 Usage = Feedback Redundant* Standard PID Control Select Input 2 Configu- = Control Standard ration | Input 2 Usage = FeedValve Motor Drive back Control Select = VMD Primary Only Control Type = Single Primary / Secondary Control Type = Dual (TPSC) Control 21 Primary / Secondary Control Type = Dual Valve Motor Drive Control Select = VMD (TPSC) Control Loop 2 / Slave Loop 1 / Master Process Type* (only if 2nd input fitted) Control Configuration: Control Select Control Configuration: Control Type Cascade* Control Configuration: Control Select Standard PID Control Select = Control Standard Input 2 Configuration | Input 2 Usage Control Configuration: Control Type Primary Only Control Type = Single Primary / Secondary Control Type = Dual Valve Motor Drive Control Select = VMD (TPSC) Control = Standard AND Loop 1 / Master Configuration | Control Mode = Cascade Ratio* Standard PID Control Select = Control Standard Input 2 Configu- Valve Motor Drive Control Select ration | Input 2 = VMD (TPSC) Control Usage = Standard AND Loop 1 / Master Configuration | Control Mode = Ratio Which outputs will be used for control, and are alarms or event outputs needed? • Output configuration • Alarms & Profile Events Once you have an understanding of your application and how the controller will be used, continue on to the configuration and use section below. What are the sources for the setpoints? • Local setpoint(s) only, or a remote setpoint input • Profile Control CAUTION: Configuration & commissioning must be completed before proceeding to Operation Mode. It is the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the configuration is safe. Is Input re-configuration required? • Analogue input calibration & scaling • Digital input functions Which other features are to be used? • Data Recorder. • Serial Communications. • USB Interface. 22 8 Operation and Configuration Menus This section contains information on all of the controller’s modes and the configuration menus. Set all Configuration parameters as required before starting normal operations. It is the responsibility of the installing engineer to ensure that the configuration is safe for the intended application. Operation Mode This is the mode used during normal operation of the instrument. It can be accessed from the Main Menu, and is the usual mode entered at power-up. The available displays are dependent upon the features/options fitted and the way in which it has been configured. Navigating and Adjusting Values in Operator Mode The Base screen is the usual screen displayed during operation. It provides “at a glance” information about the process. The Profile Status screen shows similar information when using profiles. Press to move forward or through the available screens. Subsequent screens allow the display and selection/ adjustment* of the setpoints. From display configuration, a selection of other parameter screens can be made available for operator selection/adjustment*. These include: profile control; cascade open/close; auto/manual control; setpoint ramp rate; setpoint source; control enable; clear latched outputs; data recording & status trend views. Optional operator mode screens are marked in the screen lists. Some screens will persist until the user navigates away, others will ‘time-out’ back to the base screen. to move backwards When a displayed value can be adjusted, use to change its value. or The next/previous screen follows the last parameter. If or no further changes are needed, hold down for >1sec to skip straight to the next/previous screen accepting ALL values shown. In Trend Views, pressing or moves the cursor line back and forward through the last 240 data points. * If required, all Operation Mode parameters can be made read only. Otherwise parameters such as setpoints can be adjusted within their configured limits. ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. DURING NORMAL USE, THE USER MUST NOT REMOVE THE CONTROLLER FROM ITS HOUSING OR HAVE UNRESTRICTED ACCESS TO THE REAR TERMINALS, AS THIS WOULD PROVIDE POTENTIAL CONTACT WITH HAZARDOUS LIVE PARTS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH AND/OR EQUIPMENT / PROPERTY DAMAGE. 23 OPERATION MODE SCREEN SEQUENCE All possible screens are listed below. The sequence shown depends on the configuration and status. E.g. settings for “Loop 2” only apply if 2nd input is fitted and configured for 2-loop control. *Some screens are only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration. After 2 minutes without key activity, the most screens revert to the Base Operating Screen. Screens marked do not revert automatically. They remain displayed until the user navigates away. Calibration Check Due Warning If a Calibration Reminder is set and the due date has passed this will be shown at every power up, and repeated once per day. Press to acknowledge and continue using the instrument temporarily without recalibration. Change the due date or disable the reminder to cancel the warning. This feature is only possible if the recorder is fitted. It is enabled in Input Configuration Single Control Loop: Normal Operation LED Indicators LED Function Labels Process Variable Value Effective Actual Setpoint Value Engineering Units Power Graph (0-100% primary, ±100% primary & secondary) Control Deviation Graph (scaled ±5% of input span) Two Control Loops: Normal Operation LED Indicators LED Function Labels Indicators for Alarm and Remote Setpoint active* Process Variable* & Actual Setpoint Values* Loop Description* Control Deviation (±5% of span) & Power Graphs* Engineering Units* 2-LOOP OPERATION * = in loop 1 & 2 screen area Default LED indicator functions are PRI, SEC, TUNE & ALARM - the functions and their labels can be altered only with the PC configuration software. In valve motor drive mode, the power bar-graph is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close unless the 2nd input is used for position feedback, where it shows 0 to 100% valve position. In manual mode the effective setpoint is replaced by the %Manual Power and the label “MAN”. In manual mode with valve motor drive the setpoint is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close. If control is disabled the effective setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”. Cascade Control: Normal Operation LED Indicators LED Function Labels Master Process Value Cascade Status Master Setpoint (Slave SP if Cascade Open) Slave Process Value Control Deviation (±5% of span) & Power Graphs 24 OPERATION MODE SCREEN SEQUENCE Default LED indicator functions are PRI, SEC, TUNE & ALARM - the functions and their labels can be altered only with the PC configuration software. Cascade Status shows “Cascade” when cascade is operating normally and “Cascade Open” when the master / slave link has been disconnected. Master & Slave Process Values. In valve motor drive mode, the power bar-graph is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close. In manual mode the slave setpoint is replaced by the %Manual Power and the label “MAN”. In manual mode with valve motor drive the slave setpoint is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close. If control is disabled the effective master setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”. Radio Control: Normal Operation LED Indicators LED Function Labels Relative Process Value Ratio & Setpoint Labels Relative Setpoint Control Deviation (±5% of span) & Power Graphs RATIO CONTROL Default LED indicator functions are PRI, SEC, TUNE & ALARM - the functions and their labels can be altered only with the PC configuration software. In manual mode the ratio setpoint value is replaced by the %Manual Power and the label “MAN”. If control is disabled the effective setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”. Operator Profile Control Allows the operator to control the defined profiles. If a profile is running, the choices are: Do Nothing; Abort Profile (end immediately); Jump to Next Segment; Hold Profile or Release Hold. If no profile is running, the choices are: Do Nothing; Run Profile; End Profile Control (returns to standard controller operation) or Select Profile. *only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration. Single Control Loop: Profiler Status LED Indicators LED Function Labels Process Value & Setpoint Engineering Units Profile Name & Progress Segment No, Type & Progress (or Delayed Start Time) 1-LOOP PROFILE STATUS Profile Status Indicator: Run, Held, ■ Stopped Default LED indicator functions are as shown in the initial base screen. In manual mode the effective setpoint is replaced by the %Manual Power and the label “MAN”. In manual mode with valve motor drive the setpoint is replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close. If control is disabled the effective setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”. Note: If power is lost when a profile is running and recovery is set to continue, the bar-graph re-starts from the beginning but the overall time remains correct. 25 OPERATION MODE SCREEN SEQUENCE Two Control Loops: Profiler Status LED Indicators LED Function Labels Engineering Units* Profile Status Indicators*: Run, Held, ■ Stopped Process Variable Values & Setpoints* Loop Descriptions* * = in loop 1 & 2 screen area 2-LOOP PROFILE STATUS Profile Name & Progress Segment No. Type & Progress (or Delayed Start Time) Default LED indicator functions are as shown in the initial base screen. In manual mode the effective setpoints are replaced by the %Manual Power and the label “MAN”. In manual mode with valve motor drive the setpoints are replaced by valve Open / Stop / Close. Note: If power is lost when a profile is running and recovery is set to continue, the bar-graph re-starts from the beginning but the overall time remains correct. Event Status Lists all configured profile events with their current status (Active or Inactive) – Shown only when the instrument is in profiler mode. Cascade Mode Allows the user to open the cascade, breaking the master-slave link for commissioning & tuning. CAUTION: Return to Cascade-CLOSE when finished! *only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration. Auto/Manual Control Se- Switches loop 1 (or the cascade slave loop) between automatic and manual lection – Loop 1 (or Cas- control modes. Switching between these modes uses “Bumpless Transfer”. *only cade Slave) shown if set to do so in Display Configuration. When using standard PID control, Manual mode replaces the Setpoint display with a -100 to 100% power output level value, labelled “Man”. The or keys are used to adjust the manual power value. When using VMD control, Manual mode replaces the Setpoint display with the valve movement status (Opening, Closing or Stopped), labelled “Man”. The key opens the valve and the key closes the valve. If Manual control is selected when in Cascade mode, the slave loops % power value shown. This is the power output fed directly to the control actuator (e.g. power to the heater elements). CAUTION: Manual mode overrides the automatic control loop. It also ignores any output power limits, valve open/close limits and the control enable/disable setting. The operator is responsible for maintaining the process within safe limits. Note: If power is lost when a profile is running and recovery is set to continue, the bar-graph re-starts from the beginning but the overall time remains correct. Setpoint Value Display & View and adjust the main and alternate setpoints for loop 1 (or the master loop in Adjustment – Loop 1 cascade mode). The setpoints can be set to any value within the setpoint limits set in Control Configuration. View and adjust local (internal) setpoints for the loop. The currently selected setpoint is marked as “active”. If the alternate setpoint is remote it cannot be adjusted from the keypad. 26 OPERATION MODE SCREEN SEQUENCE Setpoint Ramp Rate – Loop 1 The setpoint ramp rate adjustment for loop 1. Adjustable between 0.1 and 9999.0 display units per hour. When set to “OFF”, setpoint changes will step immediately to the new value - *only shown if set to do so in Display. Note: If power is lost when a profile is running and recovery is set to continue, the bar-graph re-starts from the beginning but the overall time remains correct. Select Active Setpoint – Loop 1 Select if the main or alternate setpoint is to be the “active” setpoint for loop 1 (or the master loop in cascade mode). *only shown if set to do so in Display. Control Enable – Loop 1 Enables or disables loop 1 control outputs. When disabled, the primary and secondary control outputs of loop 1 are set to zero 0% (unless manual mode has been selected) and the setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”. *only shown if set to do so in Display. CAUTION: The instrument cannot control the process when disabled. Auto/Manual Control Selection – Loop 2 Switches loop 2 between automatic and manual control modes. Switching between these modes uses “Bumpless Transfer”. *only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration. When using standard PID control, Manual mode replaces the Setpoint or display with a -100 to 100% power output level value, labelled “Man”. The keys are used to adjust the manual power value. When using VMD control, Manual mode replaces the Setpoint display with the valve key opens movement status (Opening, Closing or Stopped), labelled “Man”. The the valve and the key closes the valve. CAUTION: Manual mode overrides the automatic control loop. It also ignores any output power limits, valve open/close limits and the control enable/disable setting. The operator is responsible for maintaining the process within safe limits. In manual mode a running profile will hold if it is controlling the setpoint of loop 2, until automatic control is reselected. Setpoint Value Display & View and adjust the main and alternate setpoints for loop 2. The setpoints can be Adjustment – Loop 2 set to any value within the setpoint limits set in Control Configuration. View and adjust local (internal) setpoints for the loop. The currently selected setpoint is marked as “active”. If the alternate setpoint is remote it cannot be adjusted from the keypad. Setpoint Ramp Rate – Loop 2 The setpoint ramp rate adjustment for loop 2. Adjustable between 0.1 and 9999.0 display units per hour. When set to “OFF”, setpoint changes will step immediately to the new value - *only shown if set to do so in Display. If the setpoint ramp feature is used, it disables pre-tune completely, and if selftune is used, it will only calculate new terms after the ramp has completed and the setpoint is constant. Select Active Setpoint – Loop 2 Select if the main or alternate setpoint is to be the “active” setpoint for loop 2 (or the master loop in cascade mode). *only shown if set to do so in Display Control Enable – Loop 2 Enables or disables loop 2 control outputs. When disabled, the primary and secondary control outputs of loop 2 are set to zero 0% (unless manual mode has been selected) and the setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”. *only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration. CAUTION: The instrument cannot control the process when disabled. Alarm Status Lists the status of the alarms. Shown if any of the 7 alarms is active. The titles “Alarm n” can be replaced with the PC configuration software to a user defined 8 character name for each alarm. 27 OPERATION MODE SCREEN SEQUENCE Clear Latched Outputs Hold down or for 3 seconds to clear the selected latched output – An output will only reset if the condition that caused it to latch on is no-longer present. *only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration. Recorder Memory Full Warning Indicates that the Data Recorder memory is full and that recording has either stopped or is overwriting older data if in FIFO recording mode. Manual Recording Trigger Set the manual recording trigger on or off. *only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration. Note: Setting the manual trigger to off may not stop the recording. Data recording will still take place if another recording trigger is active. Recorder Status Information Shows the recording status (“Stopped” or “Recording”); icons for any active recording triggers; the recording mode (FIFO or Record Until Memory Is Used); the approximate recording time remaining* and a memory usage bar-graph. In FIFO mode, the time remaining is replaced with “FIFO” when full. *If the status of alarms is recorded, extra samples are taken when the alarms change state reducing the available recording time. Take this into account when determining if there is sufficient memory available. Icons for Active Recored Triggers Manual Record Digital Input Profile Record Alarm Record Trend Views: One per COntrol Loop Active Alarm(s) Trend Upper Scale Value Cursor Line Process Variable Trend PV Value At Cursor Line Setpoint Trend (dotted) Trend Lower Scale Value Loop No, & Time Markers (10 samples per marker) Sample Interval (or time at cursor line) TREND VIEW Trend views can be shown of each loop. They are auto-scaling graphs with alarm indication and other process information. The trend can be set to show the process variable only; the process variable & setpoint (dotted line), or the minimum and maximum value of the process variable measured since the last sample. Any active alarm(s) are indicated above the graph. Graph types and data sample intervals 1 sec to 30 mins) are set in Display Configuration. Trend scale values adjust automatically to visible data (between 2 to 100% of the input span). 120 data points are visible. Pressing or moves the cursor line back through the graph to examine up to 240 data points. The process variable value of that data point is shown to the right of the cursor line and the sample rate value is replaced by the time represented by the cursor position. *only shown if set to do so in Display Configuration. Note: Trend data is not retained at power down or if the sample interval is changed. 28 OPERATION MODE SCREEN SEQUENCE Custom Display Screens You can copy up to 50 configuration menu parameters into normal operation mode using the PC software. These extended operator mode screens appear at the end of the normal sequence. If the parameter is normally displayed on screen with another parameter, both parameters will appear. Note: In this mode screens are not pass-code protected, they can be freely adjust. It is possible to make operation mode “read only”, including any custom screens from Display Configuration. Main Menu Press This menu is used to access the various features and configuration settings. The available menus are dependent upon the features and options fitted and how it has been configured. Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation. to enter the chosen menu. Unlock Codes To prevent unauthorized entry, most menus require a pass-code (1 to 9999) to gain entry. These menus are indicated by the symbol . The codes can be viewed and changed from the Lock Code Configuration submenu of Configuration Mode. The factory default unlock code is 10 for all modes but for security, these should be changed to new values. If the Configuration Mode lock code is lost, refer to Lost Lock Codes. Entry into the Main Menu Holding down and pressing from Operation Mode and most other screens will cause the unit to enter the Main Menu. Each time this key press sequence is made, the instrument moves to the next menu level above. Sub-menu levels will require this sequence to be pressed more than once in order to reach the Main Menu. Navigating the Main Menu Once in the Main Menu, press required option or to select the OPERATION MODE SCREEN SEQUENCE Operation Mode Setup Wizard Supervisor Mode The normal operation screens, displaying the process and setpoint values; selection/adjustment of the setpoints; auto/manual control; alarm/event status; trend views; data recorder and profile information. An easy, step-by-step parameter setup for simple applications. If configured from the PC software, a sub-set of up to 50 Configuration screens can be accessed. Configuration Menu Automatic Tuning Selection Pre-tune, Self-tune and Auto Pre-tune for the control loops. of Uploading/downloading instrument configuration, profile information and data recordings. Manually starting, stopping and deleting recordings Selection profiles. Running, holding or aborting the selected profile of Selection profiles. Running, holding or aborting the selected profile of USB Menu Recorder Control Profile Setup Profile Control Service & Product Information Accesses the sub-menus for Inputs; Control Loops; Outputs; Alarms; Communications; Recorder; Clock; Display and Lock Codes. There is an option to Reset to Defaults wiping all user settings from the instrument. Contact information for service/support, followed by instrument information, including features and plug-in modules installed, serial number, firmware version etc. 29 Setup Wizard Hold down An easy Setup Wizard runs automatically at first ever power-up. Follow the Wizard to setup parameters required for basic applications. The parameters covered by the Setup Wizard are marked with a w in the following sections covering the configuration mode submenus. Once completed, the Setup Wizard exits to Operation Mode. Press or and press to enter the Main Menu. to select Setup Wizard. Note: With the exception of the first ever power-up, entry into this mode is security-protected by the Setup Wizard Lock Code. Refer to the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu. The Wizard can be run again at any time from the Main Menu. An option to reset all parameters to default (recommended) is offered when manually running the wizard. Press to enter the Setup Wizard. Navigating in the Setup Wizard Press to move forward, or through the screens. Resetting defaults all parameters, not just those covered by the quick setup wizard. For more complex applications the user may have to reconfigure other Configuration Menu settings before using the instrument. Press or to move backwards to change the value as required. or for more than 1 second skips Holding down immediately to the next/previous screen accepting ALL values as shown. Experts or users with more complex applications can select the parameters they wish to setup directly from the Configuration Menus bypassing the Wizard. Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation. Manual entry to the Setup Wizard To select the Setup Wizard from the Main Menu. SETUP WIZARD SCREENS Setup Wizard Unlocking w Enter correct code number to access Setup Wizard. Factory Default value is 10. Key Screens from Configuration Menu (those marked w) w to select each major configuration parameter in turn. Follow onPress screen prompts to alter the values. Setup Wizard Completed w Confirms completion of the Setup Wizard. Exits to Operation Mode. Supervisor Mode Entry into Supervisor Mode This mode is only available if it has been configured from the PC software. Its purpose is to allow selected operators access to a lock-code protected sub-set of the configuration parameters, without providing them with the higher level configuration menu unlock code. Adjustments to these parameters should only be performed by personnel competent and authorized to do so. The PC software can copy up to 50 parameters from configuration menus for inclusion in the supervisor mode screen sequence. If the parameter is normally displayed on screen with another parameter, both parameters will appear. It is not possible to configure supervisor mode screens without using the software. Supervisor Mode is entered from the Main Menu Hold down Press or and press to enter the Main Menu. to select Supervisor Mode Note: Entry into this mode is security-protected by the Supervisor Mode Lock Code. Refer to the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu. 30 Press The next/previous screen follows the last parameter. If to enter the Supervisor Mode. no further changes are required, hold down or >1sec to skip straight to next/previous screen accepting ALL values shown.. Navigating in the Supervisor Mode Press to move forward, or through the screens. Press or to move backwards Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation. to change the value as required. SUPERVISOR MODE SCREENS Supervisor Mode Unlocking If Supervisor Mode is configured, enter correct code number to continue. Factory Default value is 10. Supervisor Mode Screens Press to select each selected parameter in turn. Follow on-screen prompts to alter the values. Configuration Menu Configuration contains sub-menus to set-up the Inputs; Control; Outputs; Alarms; Communications; Recorder; Clock; Display and Lock Codes. This menu can be used as an alternative to the more limited Setup Wizard when the instrument is configured for the first time in more complex applications, or when further changes are required to the instruments settings. The configuration menu contains a number of sub-menus that allow access to all of the available parameters. The correct settings must be made before attempting to use the instrument in an application. Screens marked w are also shown in the Setup Wizard. There is also an option to reset the instrument to its factory default settings. The Input and Control sub-menus contain further submenus with configuration and calibration settings for each process input; control loops 1 & 2 and the digital inputs. Only parameters that are applicable to the hardware and options fitted will be displayed. Entry into the Configuration Menu From the Configuration Menu, press lect the required sub-menu. Adjustments to these parameters should only be performed by personnel competent and authorized to do so. Press If required, press or Hold down menu, then press to enter. Press or to enter the Main Menu. Hold down menu level. to select Configuration Menu and press to select the next level sub- to return to next higher Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation. Note: Entry into this mode is security-protected by the Configuration Menu Lock Code. Refer to the Unlock Code section for more details. Press to se- to enter the sub-menu. Configuration is entered from the Main Menu and press or to enter the Configuration Menu. Navigating the Configuration Menu Configuration Mode Unlocking Configuration Options CONFIGURATION MENU SCREENS Enter correct code number to access Configuration Mode. Factory Default value is 10. Select the required Configuration Sub-Menu Option from: Inputs; Control; Outputs; Alarm; Communications; Recorder; Clock; Display; Lock Code or Reset To Defaults. 31 CONFIGURATION MENU SCREENS Input 1 Setup - Sub-menu to setup Input 1. Press Input Type w + to return to Input Menu Select from various Thermocouple, RTD and Linear mA, mV or VDC inputs. see specifications section for available input types. Note: Recheck the units and decimal point settings if you change the input type. Engineering Units w Select display units from: °C; °F; °K; bar; %; %RH; pH; psi or none. Temperature sensor inputs are limited to °C; °F w Sets the maximum display resolution to 0; 1; 2 or 3 decimal places. Numbers >99.999 never display more than 2 dec places, >999.99 never display more than 1 dec place and >99999 always display without a decimal place. Temperature inputs are limited to 0 or 1 decimal place. Decimal Point Position Scaled Input Lower Limit For temperature inputs, upper & lower limits set the usable span. The minimum span = 100 units, maximum span = range limits for the sensor type selected. Scaled Input Upper Limit For DC linear inputs, the limits define the values shown (-9999 to 9999.9) when input is at minimum and maximum values. Min span = 100 units. Multi-Point Scaling Enable Enables or disables multi-point scaling. This allows up to 15 point input linearization for DC signals - not possible with temperature sensor inputs Scaling Point n If multi-point scaling is enabled, up to 15 breakpoints* can scale input vs. displayed values between the scaled input limits. Each breakpoint has a % value for the input signal, and the value to display when the input is at that value. *A Scaling Point set to 100% input ends the scaling sequence. Display Value n CJC Enable/Disable Enables/disables internal thermocouple Cold Junction Compensation. If disabled, external compensation will be required for thermocouples. The default value is Enabled. Input Filter Time Removes unwanted signal noise. Adjustable from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds or OFF (default = 2s). Use the smallest value that gives acceptable results. Caution: Large values slow the response to changes in the process. Input 1 Calibration - Sub-menu to calibrate Input 1. Press + to return to Input Menu Calibration Type Select the calibration type from base; single or 2-point calibration. Select single to apply a calibration offset across the entire measured range. Use 2-point to enter calibration offsets at both low and high points of the usable range – refer to User Calibration details. Caution: The default is Base Calibration. For single or 2-point calibration, the user must enter values to adjust the displayed value to match a known standard or accurate external reading. Calibration Offset The single point calibration offset. Limited by the input span, +Ve values add to, –Ve values subtract from, the measured input across entire range. Calibration Low Value The displayed value for the 1st (low) adjustment of 2-point calibration. Choose a value close to the lowest level used in the application. Calibration Low Offset The adjustment value for the 1st (low) point when using 2-point calibration. +Ve values add to, –Ve values subtract from measured input at this point. Calibration High Value The displayed value for the 2nd (high) adjustment of 2 point calibration. Choose a value close to the highest level used in the application. Calibration High Offset The adjustment value for the 2nd (high) point when using 2-point calibration. +Ve values add to, –Ve values subtract from measured input at this point. Input 2 Setup - Sub-menu to calibrate Input 2. Press + 32 to return to Input Menu CONFIGURATION MENU SCREENS Input 2 Usage w Input Type w Input 2 can be used as a standard process input for a second control loop (including its use as part of a cascade), a redundant input or a feedback signal input from a valve or flow meter. Redundant or Feedback disables the input as an independent control loop. If input 2 is selected as a standard process input, select from various Thermocouple, RTD and Linear mA, mV or VDC inputs. - see specifications section on page 245, for available input types. If input 2 is selected as feedback possible types are limited to Linear mA, mV, VDC or Potentiometer. Redundant inputs automatically assume the same input type as input 1. Note: Recheck the units and decimal point settings if you change the input type. Engineering Units w Select display units from: °C; °F; °K; bar; %; %RH; pH; psi or none. Temperature sensor inputs are limited to °C; °F w Sets the maximum display resolution to 0; 1; 2 or 3 decimal places. Numbers >99.999 never display more than 2 dec places, >999.99 never display more than 1 dec place and >99999 always display without a decimal place. Temperature inputs are limited to 0 or 1 decimal place. Decimal Point Position Scaled Input Lower Limit Scaled Input Upper Limit For temperature inputs, upper & lower limits set the usable span. The minimum span = 100 units, maximum span = range limits for the sensor type selected - see specs on page 245. For DC linear inputs, the limits define the values shown (-9999 to 9999.9) when input is at minimum and maximum values. Min span = 100 units. Multi-Point Scaling Enable Enables or disables multi-point scaling. This allows up to 15 point input linearization for DC signals - not possible with temperature sensor inputs Scaling Point n If multi-point scaling is enabled, up to 15 breakpoints* can scale input vs. displayed values between the scaled input limits. Each breakpoint has a % value for the input signal, and the value to display when the input is at that value. *A Scaling Point set to 100% input ends the scaling sequence. Display Value n CJC Enable/Disable Enables/disables internal thermocouple Cold Junction Compensation. If disabled, external compensation will be required for thermocouples. The default value is Enabled. Input Filter Time Removes unwanted signal noise. Adjustable from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds or OFF (default = 2s). Use the smallest value that gives acceptable results. Caution: Large values slow the response to changes in the process. Set Valve Lower Position If input 2 is selected as feedback indication, this stores the feedback value equal to the minimum valve travel. The procedure below moves the valve to the fully closed position to find the feedback value: Set Valve Upper Position Press and simultaneously to begin feedback limit adjustment. Press until the valve is closed to its limit of its travel. Press and simultaneously to store the feedback level. If input 2 is selected as feedback indication, this stores the feedback value equal to the maximum valve travel. The procedure below moves the valve to the fully open position to find the feedback value: Press and simultaneously to begin feedback limit adjustment. Press U until the valve is opened to its limit of its travel. Press and simultaneously to store the feedback level. Input 2 Calibration - Sub-menu to calibrate Input 2. Press 33 + to return to Input Menu CONFIGURATION MENU SCREENS Calibration Type If input 2 is selected as a standard process input, the user can select the calibration type from base; single or 2-point calibration. Select single to apply a calibration offset across the entire measured range. Use 2-point to enter calibration offsets at both low and high points of the usable range – refer to the User Calibration details. Caution: The default is Base Calibration. For single or 2-point calibration, the user must enter values to adjust the displayed value to match a known standard or accurate external reading. Calibration Offset The single point calibration offset. Limited by the input span, +Ve values add to, –Ve values subtract from measured input across the range. Calibration Low Value The displayed value for the 1st (low) adjustment of 2-point calibration. Choose a value close to the lowest level used in the application. Calibration Low Offset The adjustment value for the 1st (low) point when using 2-point calibration. +Ve values add to, –Ve values subtract from measured input at this point. Calibration High Value The displayed value for the 2nd (high) adjustment of 2 point calibration. Choose a value close to the highest level used in the application. Calibration High Offset The adjustment value for the 2nd (high) point when using 2-point calibration. +Ve values add to, –Ve values subtract from measured input at this point. Calibration Reminder - Calibration reminder Sub-menu. Press + to return to Input Menu Calibration Reminder Enable/Disable Enables/disables the Calibration Reminder shown at start-up (and daily thereafter), if the due date has passed - Recorder version only Calibration Reminder Date Sets the due date for Calibration Reminder - Recorder version only. Auxiliary Input A Setup - Sub-menu to setup auxiliary A input. Press + to return to Input Menu Auxiliary Input A Type Enables/disables the Calibration Reminder shown at start-up (and daily thereafter), if the due date has passed - Recorder version only Aux A Input Lower Limit These scale values relate to when auxiliary input A is at the range minimum & maximum values. They are adjustable between ±0.001 & ±10000. When auxiliary input A provides a remote setpoint, the scaled input becomes the effective setpoint (although always constrained within setpoint limits). Caution: Take care to scale correctly especially if being used as the remote setpoint source for both loops. Aux A Input Upper Limit Auxiliary Input A Offset An offset applied to the scaled auxiliary input A value. Adjustable, from +/0.001 to 20000 units or OFF, with. +Ve values add, –Ve values subtracted. Useful in multi-zone setpoint slave applications. Default = OFF. 34 CONFIGURATION MENU SCREENS Digital Input Setup - Sub-menu to setup the Digital Inputs. Press + to return to Input Menu Digital Input Status A diagnostic status (c = OFF, R = ON, Ø = not available) for digital inputs A; C1 to C8 and “Soft “digital inputs S1 to S4. If used for profile selection, it also shows bit pattern type (binary or BCD) and selected profile number Tick Digital Inputs To Invert Select digitals input with R to invert their operation (making them appear OFF when their actual state is ON). Inputs shown as Ø are not available. Profile Selection Type Select the bit pattern to be used for profile selection. Binary or BCD (Binary Coded Decimal). Select None if profile selection not is required. Choose Profile Selection For profiler versions, the Multi-Digital Input option can be used to select the profile to run with a standard binary bit pattern or binary coded decimal from BCD switches. C1 is the least significant bit (LSB) of the bit pattern. Profiles are numbered from 0 to 63. Use the table to choose inputs C1 to Cn for the number of profiles to select: C1 C1 to C2 C1 to C3 C1 to C4 C1 to C5 C1 to C6 C1 to C7 Binary 0 to 1 0 to 3 0 to 7 0 to 15 0 to 31 0 to 63 BCD 0 to 1 0 to 3 0 to 7 0 to 9 0 to 19 0 to 39 0 to 63 Any inputs chosen for profile selection are not available for other uses. – refer to Digital Inputs Configure Digital Inputs Select any available digital input or soft digital input to be configured for use. The current status of each is shown as Assigned or Unused. Soft Digital Input n Digital Input Logic Set up a “Soft” digital input n that is the result of the Boolean AND selections of physical inputs, globally OR’d with the OR selections. or to select R / deselect Press not available – refer to Digital Inputs Soft Digital Input n Alarm-Event the options. Inputs shown as Ø are Further set up of “Soft” digital input n that adds the Boolean OR of Alarms & Events to the physical digital inputs already selected. or to select R / deselect Press not available – refer to Digital Inputs Digital Input n Function c c the options. Inputs shown as Ø are Select the function to be operated from digital input n. – The possible functions are: Loop 1 or 2 Setpoint Select; Loop 1 or 2 Auto/Manual Select; Loop 1 or 2 Control Select; Loop 1 or 2 Pre-Tune Select; Loop 1 or 2 Self-Tune Select Clear All Latched Outputs; Output n Clear Latch; Output n Forcing On or Off; Profile Run/Hold; Profile Hold Segment Release; Profile Abort; Data Recorder or ). Trigger or Key n Mimic (replicating pressing 35 CONTROL CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS Control Loop 1 - Sub-menu to setup Control Loop 1. Press + to return to Input Menu These settings apply to the master loop if the controller has been setup for cascade control. Control Mode Select the fundamental application type, from: Standard; Cascade or Ratio. Refer to the Application Setup section. Note: Choosing Cascade or Ratio disables the use of the 2nd input as a fully independent control loop. Cascade Mode Opens or closes the cascade link. Cascade-Open breaks the master-slave connection. This allows slave loop to be tuned & adjusted independently. Caution: Return to Cascade when finished! Profile Selection Type Select the bit pattern to be used for profile selection. Binary or BCD (Binary Coded Decimal). Select None if profile selection not is required. Control Select Select from Control Standard or Control VMD (TPSC). Use Control VMD to directly drive the windings of a motorized valve. This uses a 3-point stepping algorithm giving “open” and “close” outputs. Use Standard for all other applications (including solenoid valves or modulating valves with positioning circuitry requiring mA or VDC signals). Control Enable/Disable Used to temporarily disable the control outputs. Select control Enabled (normal) or Disabled – when disabled, control output(s) for this loop are turned off (unless manual mode has been selected), and the setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”. Caution: The instrument is not able to control the process when control is disabled and the Output Power Limits are ignored. Auto/Manual Control Selection Switches the control loop between Automatic and Manual Control. The operator monitors and alters power to correctly control the process (0 to 100% or -100 to +100% for dual control). Caution: Manual mode overrides the automatic control loop. It also ignores any output power limits, valve open/close limits and the control enable/disable setting. The operator is responsible for maintaining the process within safe limits. Control Type Select Single Control for primary control only (e.g. heating only or cooling only) or Dual for primary and secondary control outputs (e.g. heating and cooling) Dual is not possible with Ratio or VMD Control. Primary Control Action Set the primary control output for Reverse or Direct Action. Reverse action applies additional primary power as the process falls further below setpoint (e.g. heating applications). Direct action applies additional primary power as the process rises higher above setpoint (e.g. cooling applications). In dual control, secondary output action is opposite to primary action. Control Status A “read-only” diagnostic status display of the current loop 1 process variable and effective setpoint values to assist with manual tuning. Power Output Levels A “read-only” diagnostic status display of the current loop 1 primary and secondary % output power levels to assist with manual tuning – Not shown with VMD Control. Does not apply if control is disabled or in manual mode. Gain Schedule PID Set in Use A “read-only” diagnostic status display showing the PID set in use. The set used may vary based on the current setpoint or process variable value. – Only shown if Gain Scheduling is in use. 36 CONTROL CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS PID Set Selection Choose to use one of five PID Sets; or choose Gain Schedule on SP or PV. – This selects a fixed PID set to be “Active”; or automatically switch sets based changes in SP or PV values. Set n – Primary Pb The primary proportional band for PID Set n (n = up to 5). Set as On-Off control, or a proportional band from 1 to 9999 display units – Only the set(s) in use are shown. Set n – Secondary Pb The secondary proportional band for PID Set n (n = up to 5) if dual control is used. Set as On-Off control, or a proportional band from 1 to 9999 display units – Only the set(s) in use are shown. Set n – Integral The integral time value (Automatic Reset) for PID Set n (n = up to 5). Adjustable from 1s to 99min 59s or OFF – Only the set(s) in use shown. Set n – Derivative The derivative time value (Rate) for PID Set n (n = up to 5). Adjustable from 1s to 99 min 59s or OFF – Only the set(s) in use are shown. Set n – Overlap The overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary proportional bands for PID Set n (n = up to 5). In display units - limited to 20% of the combined primary & secondary prop band width. Set n – On/Off Diff The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set n (n = up to 5). Adjustable from 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint – Only the set(s) in use are shown. Set n - Breakpoint The SP or PV value where the PID Set n (n = up to 5) if gain scheduling is used. Set 1 is used from Scaled Input Lower Limit to the Set 2 Breakpoint, then Set 2 used to the Set 3 Breakpoint etc. If a breakpoint is set to OFF subsequent PID sets are not used. The final PID set runs to the Scaled Input Upper Limit. Manual Reset (Bias) The Manual Reset value to bias the control working point within the proportional band(s). Adjustable from 0 to 100% for single control or 100 to +100% for dual control. Typically set to 80% of typical power needed for setpoint, but lower values can help inhibit start-up overshoot. Anti Wind-Up Limit Adjusts the value at which the “reset wind-up inhibit” is applied. Above this power level further integral action is suspended. Adjustable from 10 to 100% of PID power. Lower values inhibit overshoot. Caution: If set too low control deviation can occur (the process settles, but is offset above or below the setpoint). It this is observed, increase the value until the deviation error is removed. Ratio SFAC The nominal ratio scaling factor used for Stoichiometric Ratio Control in burner fuel/air control applications. Adjustable from 0.010 to 99.999. – refer to the Ratio Control section. Ratio NO A constant between 0.0 & 9999.0, added to the x1 (input 1) value in Stoichiometric Ratio Control mode to allow for atomizing air when calculating the process value. The total air flow is therefore x1 + NO Primary Cycle Time The primary power cycle time. Adjustable from 0.5 to 512 seconds. Applied for time proportioned primary relay, SSR driver or triac control outputs – Not used for VMD Control modes. Secondary Cycle Time The secondary power cycle time when dual control is used. Adjustable from 0.5 to 512 seconds. Applied for time proportioned primary relay, SSR driver or triac control outputs – Not used for VMD Control modes. 37 CONTROL CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS Primary Power Lower Limit The minimum primary output power limit. The control algorithm will not allow the power output fall below this level. Adjustable from 0 to 90% but is always at least 10% below the primary power upper limit. Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process correctly if the lower limit is above the level required to maintain setpoint. Primary Power Upper Limit The maximum primary output power limit. The control algorithm will not allow the power output rise above this level. Adjustable from 10 to 100% but is always at least 10% above the primary power lower limit. Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process correctly if the upper limit is below the level required to maintain setpoint. Secondary Power Lower Limit The minimum secondary output power limit. The control algorithm will not allow the power output fall below this level. Adjustable from 0 to 90% but is always at least 10% below the secondary power upper limit. Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process correctly if the lower limit is above the level required to maintain setpoint. Secondary Power Upper Limit The maximum secondary output power limit. The control algorithm will not allow the power output rise above this level. Adjustable from 10 to 100% but is always at least 10% above the secondary power lower limit. Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process correctly if the upper limit is below the level required to maintain setpoint. Sensor Break Pre-set Power Output Set the power level to be applied if the process input signal or an active remote setpoint input is lost. Adjustable from 0 to 100% for single control or -100 to +100% for dual control. The default value is OFF (0% power). Does not apply if control is disabled or in manual mode. Caution: Ensure the value set will maintain safe process conditions. Motor Travel Time The motor travel time (valve movement time from fully open to fully closed in mm:ss). Adjustable from 5s to 5 mins - In VMD Control Mode only. Minimum Motor On Time The minimum drive effort (in seconds) to begin moving the motorized valve in VMD Control Mode. Adjustable from 0.02 to 1/10 of the Motor Travel Time Valve Open Limit The maximum position the controller will attempt to drive the valve to in VMD Control Mode. Adjustable from the valve close limit+1% to 100.0% (fully open) - Only possible if the 2nd input is used for valve feedback. Valve Close Limit The minimum position the controller will attempt to drive the valve to in VMD Control Mode. Adjustable from 0.0% (fully closed) to the valve open limit-1% - Only possible if the 2nd input is used for valve feedback. Valve Sensor Break Action The direction to drive the valve if the process input signal or an active remote setpoint input is lost. The default action is to drive the valve closed. – Applies to VMD Control Mode only. Does not apply if control is disabled or in manual mode. Caution: Set to safe values for the process! 38 CONTROL CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS Setpoint Lower Limit The minimum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the scaled input limits, but cannot be above the setpoint upper limit. Applies to local, remote and profile setpoints. Caution: Set to safe values for the process. Operators can adjust local setpoints to any value between the limits set. Setpoint Upper Limit The maximum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the scaled input limits, but cannot be below the setpoint lower limit. Applies to local, remote and profile setpoints. Caution: Set to safe values for the process. Operators can adjust local setpoints to any value between the limits set. Setpoint Ramp Rate Setpoint Ramp Rate value, adjustable from 1 to 9999 display units per hour, or OFF. The ramp is applied at power-up (from current PV to SP) and whenever the setpoint value or source is changed. If set to OFF, the setpoint steps immediately to the new setpoint value. Main Setpoint Source Select the source of the main setpoint. This can only be a “Local” setpoint set from the keypad, or Not used. Alternate Setpoint Source Select the source of the alternate setpoint. This can be a “Local” setpoint, not used, or an analogue remote setpoint (RSP) signal applied to input 2 or auxiliary input A – depending on available hardware. Main Setpoint Value Sets the current value of the main setpoint between the setpoint upper and lower limits. Alternate Setpoint Value Sets the current value of the alternate setpoint between the setpoint upper and lower limits – is read-only if alternate setpoint source is RSP. Select Active Setpoint Select if the main or alternate setpoint is to be the current “active” setpoint for this loop. Main Setpoint Offset An offset that can be added to the main setpoint (+ve values) or subtracted from it (-ve values) when the instrument is a comms slave in a multi-zone application. This changes the effective setpoint used for control. Caution: It should be set to zero if an offset is not required. Alternate Setpoint Offset An offset that can be added to the alternate setpoint (+ve values) or subtracted from it (-ve values) when the instrument is a comms slave in a multi-zone application. This changes the effective setpoint used for control. Caution: It should be set to zero if an offset is not required. Control Loop 2 - Sub-menu to setup Control Loop 1. Press + to return to Input Menu These settings apply to the slave loop if the controller has been setup for cascade control. Control Select Select from Control Standard or Control VMD (TPSC). Use Control VMD to directly drive the windings of a motorized valve. This uses a 3-point stepping algorithm giving “open” and “close” outputs. Use Standard for all other applications (including solenoid valves or modulating valves with positioning circuitry requiring mA or VDC signals). Control Enable/Disable Used to temporarily disable the control outputs. Select control Enabled (normal) or Disabled – when disabled, control output(s) for this loop are turned off (unless manual mode has been selected) and the setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”. Caution: The instrument is not able to control the process when control is disabled and the Output Power Limits are ignored. 39 Auto/Manual Control Selection Switches the control loop between Automatic and Manual Control. Control Type Select Single Control for primary control only (e.g. heating only or cooling only) or Dual for primary and secondary control outputs (e.g. heating and cooling) - Dual is not possible with Ratio or VMD Control. Primary Control Action Set the primary control output for Reverse or Direct Action. Reverse action applies additional primary power as the process falls further below setpoint (e.g. heating applications). Direct action applies additional primary power as the process rises higher above setpoint (e.g. cooling applications). In dual control, secondary output action is opposite to primary action. Control Status A “read-only” diagnostic status display of the current loop 2 process variable and effective setpoint values to assist with manual tuning. Power Output Levels A “read-only” diagnostic status display of the current loop 2 primary and secondary % output power levels to assist with manual tuning – Not shown with VMD Control. Does not apply if control is disabled or in manual mode. Gain Schedule PID Set in use A “read-only” diagnostic status display showing the PID set in use. The set use may vary based on the current setpoint or process variable value. – Only shown if Gain Scheduling is in use. PID Set Selection Choose to use one of five PID Sets; or choose Gain Schedule on SP or PV. – This selects a fixed PID set to be “Active”; or automatically switch sets based changes in SP or PV values. Set n – Primary Pb The primary proportional band for PID Set n (n = up to 5). Set as On-Off control, or a proportional band from 1 to 9999 display units – Only the set(s) in use are shown. Set n – Secondary Pb The secondary proportional band for PID Set n (n = up to 5) if dual control is used. Set as On-Off control, or a proportional band from 1 to 9999 display units – Only the set(s) in use are shown. Set n – Integral The integral time value (Automatic Reset) for PID Set n (n = up to 5). Adjustable from 1s to 99min 59s or OFF – Only the set(s) in use are shown. Set n – Derivative The derivative time value (Rate) for PID Set n (n = up to 5). Adjustable from 1s to 99 min 59s or OFF – Only the set(s) in use are shown. Set n – Overlap The overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary proportional bands for PID Set n (n = up to 5). In display units - limited to 20% of the combined primary & secondary prop band width. Set n - Breakpoint The SP or PV value where the PID Set n (n = up to 5) if gain scheduling is used. Set 1 is used from Scaled Input Lower Limit to the Set 2 Breakpoint, then Set 2 used to the Set 3 Breakpoint etc. If a breakpoint is set to OFF subsequent PID sets are not used. The final PID set runs to the Scaled Input Upper Limit. Manual Reset (Bias) The Manual Reset value to bias the control working point within the proportional band(s). Adjustable from 0 to 100% for single control or 100 to +100% for dual control. Typically set to 80% of typical power needed for setpoint, but lower values can help inhibit start-up overshoot. Anti Wind-Up Limit Adjusts the value at which the “reset wind-up inhibit” is applied. Above this power level further integral action is suspended. Adjustable from 10 to 100% of PID power. Lower values inhibit overshoot. Caution: Manual mode overrides the automatic control loop. It also ignores any output power limits, valve open/close limits and the control enable/disable setting. The operator is responsible for maintaining the process within safe limits. Caution: If set too low control deviation can occur (the process settles, but is offset above or below the setpoint). It this is observed, increase the value until the deviation error is removed. 40 Primary Cycle Time The primary power cycle time. Adjustable from 0.5 to 512 seconds. Applied for time proportioned primary relay, SSR driver or triac control outputs – Not used for VMD Control modes. Secondary Cycle Time The secondary power cycle time when dual control is used. Adjustable from 0.5 to 512 seconds. Applied for time proportioned primary relay, SSR driver or triac control outputs – Not used for VMD Control modes. Primary Power Lower Limit The minimum primary output power limit. The control algorithm will not allow the power output fall below this level. Adjustable from 0 to 90% but is always at least 10% below the primary power upper limit. Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process correctly if the lower limit is above the level required to maintain setpoint. Primary Power Upper Limit The maximum primary output power limit. The control algorithm will not allow the power output rise above this level. Adjustable from 10 to 100% but is always at least 10% above the primary power lower limit. Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process correctly if the upper limit is above the level required to maintain setpoint. Secondary Power Lower Limit The minimum secondary output power limit. The control algorithm will not allow the power output fall below this level. Adjustable from 0 to 90% but is always at least 10% below the primary power upper limit. Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process correctly if the lower limit is above the level required to maintain setpoint. Secondary Power Upper Limit The maximum secondary output power limit. The control algorithm will not allow the power output rise above this level. Adjustable from 10 to 100% but is always at least 10% above the primary power lower limit. Caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process correctly if the upper limit is above the level required to maintain setpoint. Sensor Break Pre-set Power Output Set the power level to be applied if the process input signal or an active remote setpoint input is lost. Adjustable from 0 to 100% for single control or -100 to +100% for dual control. The default value is OFF (0% power). Does not apply if control is disabled or in manual mode. Caution: Ensure the value set will maintain safe process conditions. Motor Travel Time The motor travel time (valve movement time from fully open to fully closed in mm:ss). Adjustable from 5s to 5 mins - In VMD Control Mode only. Minimum Motor On Time The minimum drive effort (in seconds) to begin moving the motorized valve in VMD Control Mode. Adjustable from 0.02 to 1/10 of the Motor Travel Time. Slave SP Scale Min The effective cascade slave setpoint value equating to 0% power demand from the master controller - Limited by the slave input scaling. Caution: Set to safe values for the process! Slave SP Scale Max The effective cascade slave setpoint value equating to 100% power demand from the master controller - Limited by the slave input scaling. Caution: Set to safe values for the process! Valve Sensor Break Action The direction to drive the valve if the process input signal or an active remote setpoint input is lost. The default action is to drive the valve closed. – Applies to VMD Control Mode only. Does not apply if control is disabled or in manual mode. Caution: Set to safe values for the process! 41 Setpoint Lower Limit The minimum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the scaled input limits, but cannot be above the setpoint upper limit. Applies to local, remote and profile setpoints. Caution: Set to safe values for the process. Operators can adjust local setpoints to any value between the limits set. Setpoint Upper Limit The maximum allowable setpoint value. Adjustable within the scaled input limits, but cannot be below the setpoint lower limit. Applies to local, remote and profile setpoints. Caution: Set to safe values for the process. Operators can adjust local setpoints to any value between the limits set. Setpoint Ramp Rate Setpoint Ramp Rate value, adjustable from 1 to 9999 display units per hour, or OFF. The ramp is applied at power-up (from current PV to SP) and whenever the setpoint value or source is changed. If set to OFF, the setpoint steps immediately to the new setpoint value. Main Setpoint Source Select the source of the main setpoint. This can only be a “Local” setpoint set from the keypad, or Not used. Alternate Setpoint Source Select the source of the alternate setpoint. This can be a “Local” setpoint, not used, or an analogue remote setpoint signal applied to input 2 or auxiliary input A – depending on available hardware. Main Setpoint Value Sets the current value of the main setpoint between the setpoint upper and lower limits. Alternate Setpoint Value Sets the current value of the alternate setpoint between the setpoint upper and lower limits. Select Active Setpoint Select if the main or alternate setpoint is to be the “active” setpoint for this loop. Main Setpoint Offset An offset that can be added to the main setpoint (+ve values) or subtracted from it (-ve values) when the instrument is a comms slave in a multi-zone application. This changes the effective setpoint used for control. Caution: It should be set to zero if an offset is not required. Alternate Setpoint Offset An offset that can be added to the alternate setpoint (+ve values) or subtracted from it (-ve values) when the instrument is a comms slave in a multizone application. This changes the effective setpoint used for control. Caution: It should be set to zero if an offset is not required. OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS Output n Configuration - Up to 9 outputs listed. Any already used show as “Assigned” but can be changed. If “Digital” is shown, the output is driven directly via a digital input (see input configuration). Relevant screen sequences repeat for outputs fitted. Press Linear Output n Type Adjustable 0-10V Transmitter PSU n + to return to Configuration Menu w Set the desired type for any linear outputs fitted. From: 0-5, 0-10, 1-5, 2-10V & 0-20, 4-20mA or 0-10VDC adjustable transmitter PSU. w Sets the voltage required if linear output n type is 0-10VDC adjustable transmitter PSU. w Sets the use for the output. From: Loop 1 or 2 Primary / Secondary Power; Logical OR or AND of Alarms & Profile Events (direct or reverse acting); Retransmission (of loop 1 or 2 effective setpoint, Input 1 or 2 process values). Choices offered are appropriate for the output type fitted (e.g. only linear outputs can retransmit). w When an output usage is set for logical OR alarms & profile events, this selects or to select R or deselect c the alarms or events to be OR’d. Press Alarms 1 to 7; Events 1 to 5; PR (Profile running); PE (Profile Ended). Direct outputs turn on, & reverse outputs turn off according to the selected logical OR combination. Output n Usage OPn OR Selection 42 OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS OPn AND Selection w Output n Latch Enable w When an output usage is set for logical AND alarms & profile events, this seor to select R or deselect lects the alarms or events to be AND’d. Press c Alarms 1 to 7; Events 1 to 5; PR (Profile running); PE (Profile Ended). Direct outputs turn on, & reverse outputs turn off according to the selected logical AND combination. If enabled, an output will remain latched ON even if the condition that caused it to be on is no-longer present, and remains latched even if the instrument is powered off-on. The output latch must be reset to turn it off. Note: An output cannot reset if the condition that caused it to turn on is still present. Output n Lower Retransmit Limit Output n Upper Retransmit Limit w The displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its minimum level (e.g the display value when a 4 to 20mA retransmission output is at 4mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9. The output is at its minimum below this value. Above this value, it rises linearly in line with the displayed value to reach its maximum at the Upper Retransmit Limit display value. The displayed value at which a retransmission output will be at its maximum level (e.g. the display value when a 4 to 20mA retransmission output is at 20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9. The output is at its maximum above this display value. Below this value, it falls linearly in line with the displayed value to reach its minimum at the Lower Retransmit Limit display value. ALARM CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS Alarm n Configuration - 7 alarms listed with any already used shown as “Assigned”. Relevant screen sequences repeat for each alarm (n = 1 to 7). Press Alarm n Type + to return to Configuration Menu w Sets the function of alarm n from: Unused; Process High; Process Low; PV-SP Deviation; Band; Control Loop; Rate Of Signal Change per minute; Input Signal Break; % of Recorder Memory Used, Control Power High, Control Power Low. w The signal source of Alarm n from: Input 1, Input 2 & Auxiliary Input A; Control Loop 1; Control Loop 2; Loop 1 Primary or Secondary Power; Loop 2 Primary or Secondary Power – auxiliary input A is only possible if fitted and the alarm type can only be input signal break. Alarm n Source Alarm n Value w The Alarm n activation point – The value is limited by the scaled input limits for Process High; Process Low; PV-SP Deviation (+ve above, -ve below setpoint), Band (above or below setpoint) type alarms. Rate of Signal Change is a rate of 0.0 to 99999 (rate in units per minute). Memory used, Control Power High, Control Power Low are 0.0 to 100.0% – not required for Control Loop or Input Signal Break alarm types. Alarm n Hysteresis The deadband on the “safe” side of alarm n, through which signal must pass before alarm deactivates - not for Rate of Change, Control Loop, Input Break or Percentage of Memory used alarms. Alarm n Minimum Duration The minimum time that alarm n must be passed its threshold before activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter). Adjustable from 0.0 to 9999.0 secs. – not used for signal break, memory or loop alarms. w Caution: If the duration is less than the time set, the alarm will not become active. Alarm n Inhibit w If the inhibit is enabled, it prevents the initial alarm activation if the alarm condition is true at power up. Activation only occurs once the alarm condition has passed and then reoccurred 43 ALARM CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS Control n Loop Alarm Type Control n Loop Alarm Time w Sets the loop alarm time source, from: Manual Loop Alarm Time (as set in the loop alarm n time screen) or Automatic (twice the integral time constant setting). If configured, a Loop Alarm activates if no response is seen in loop n after this time following the saturation of its power output. – Only seen if an alarm is set for control loop type. w The time (max 99:59 mm:ss) for loop n to begin responding after PID power output reaches saturation, if a manual loop alarm type is configured. COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS No Communications Warning If Communications Configuration menu is entered without a communications module fitted. Modbus Parity The setting for Modbus comms parity bit checking, from: Odd; Even or None. Set the same parity for all devices on the network – Only seen if RS485 or Ethernet communications option is fitted. Modbus Data Rate The setting for the Modbus comms data speed. From: 4800; 9600; 19200; 38400; 57600 or 115200 bps. Set the same speed for all devices on the network – Only seen if RS485 or Ethernet communications option is fitted. Master Mode, or Slave Address Slave address (1 to 255), or multi-zone Setpoint Master Mode – Only seen if RS485 or Ethernet communications option is fitted, but Master mode is not available over Ethernet. Target Register In Slave Target memory register for the setpoint value in attached slave controllers. All slaves must have the same setpoint register address as set here - Appears only if unit is in Master mode. Master Mode Format The data format required by the attached setpoint slaves. From: Integer; integer with 1 decimal place or float - Appears only if unit is in Master mode. Serial Communications Write Enable Enables/disables writing via RS485 or Ethernet communications. When disabled, parameters can be read, but attempts to change their values over comms are blocked. DATA RECORDER CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS: No Recorder Warning If the Recorder Configuration menu is entered on an instrument without this option fitted. Recording In Progress Warning A warning if recording when attempting to enter recorder configuration. Access to the configuration is denied unless the recording is paused. Pause (Override Trigger) Select No to continue recording or Yes to enter recorder configuration. Note: Recording is paused until recorder configuration is completed. It restarts automatically on exit from this menu. Recorder Status Information Current information about the data recorder feature, including if a recording is in progress (Recording or Stopped); the recording mode (FIFO or Record Until Memory Is Used); a % memory use bar-graph and the estimated available time remaining based on the data selected and memory left. If the alarm status is recorded and is likely to change often, take this into account when determining if there is sufficient memory available. Icons are displayed for active recording triggers. If any trigger is active, the selected data will be recorded. Manual Record Digital Input 44 Profile Record Alarm Record DATA RECORDER CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS: Recorder Mode Choose Record Until Memory Used (stops recording when full) or Continuous FIFO (First In - First Out). Caution: A FIFO recording will overwrite previous recordings in memory, starting with the oldest data first. Download the previous data before selecting this option. Recording Sample Interval Recording of the selected data will happen once every sample interval. From every: 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Seconds, or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Minutes. - The recording interval does not affect Trend View sample rates. Note: Shorter intervals reduce the possible recording duration. Recorder Auto Trigger Automatic recording triggers. From: None; On Alarm; During Profile and Alarm or Profile. Data is recorded if any trigger is active (including a digital input or manual recording start). Trigger on Alarms Any combination of alarms 1 to 7 can be set to trigger a recording (TRG) or not (OFF). If any alarm set to TRG becomes active, the alarm recording trigger activates. Note: 10 samples at 1s intervals are stored and added to the recording prior to and after the data that is stored at the normal sample rate while the alarm is on. Loop 1 Values to Record Any combination of loop 1 values can be recorded from: Process Variable; Maximum or Minimum PV (since the previous sample was taken); Setpoint; Primary Power, Secondary Power. Set to Record (REC) or not (OFF). Note: Recording more parameters reduces the possible recording duration. Loop 2 Values to Record Any combination of loop 2 values can be recorded from: Process Variable; Maximum or Minimum PV (since the previous sample was taken); Setpoint; Primary Power, Secondary Power. Set to Record (REC) or not (OFF). Note: Recording more parameters reduces the possible recording duration. Other Values to Record If required, select to record the value of auxiliary input A. Activities to Record Multiple process events can be recorded from: Alarm n Status (n = 1 to 7) or Unit turned Off/On. Note: If an alarm changes state an extra sample is recorded using extra memory. The remaining recording time is reduced accordingly. Profiler Events to Record The Profiler Event n Status can be recorded (n = 1 to 5). Note: If a profile event changes state an extra sample is recorded using extra memory. The remaining recording time is reduced accordingly. 45 CLOCK CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS Date Format Set Date Set Time w The format used for all displayed dates: dd/mm/yyyy (Day / Month / Year) or mm/dd/yyyy (Month / Day / Year). – Recorder versions only. w Set the internal clock Date – Entered in the format defined by Date Format screen. – Recorder versions only. w Set the internal clock Time. - In hh:mm:ss (Hours : Minutes : Seconds) format. – Recorder versions only. Note: Clock settings cannot be changed when the data recorder is active. DISPLAY CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREENS Language Select English or the alternate local language. The alternate language is selected at time of order, but can be changed later using the PC software. Enable Custom Display Mode Enables/disables the Custom Operation Mode, if configured. The screens seen in this mode are configured using the PC configuration software. Read Only Operation Mode? Allows Operation Mode to be Read/Write or Read-Only where screens can be seen but the values cannot be changed. Display Color From: Red only; Green only; Red to Green on Alarm or Green to Red on Alarm; Red to Green if Output Latched or Green to Red if Output Latched. Invert Display Standard or Inverted display image. Display Contrast Screen contrast (10 and 100) to improve clarity. 100 = maximum contrast. Loop 1 Trend Sample Interval The Interval between the displayed values on the loop 1 trend graph. From: Every 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Seconds, or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Minutes. Independent from the loop 2 trend graph and data recorder sample rates. Loop 1 Trend View Mode The data to display on the loop 1 trend graph. From: Process Value only, PV (solid) & SP (dotted) at sample time, or the Max & Min PV between samples (candle-stick graph). Alarm active indication is always shown at the top of graph. Loop 2 Trend Sample Interval The Interval between the displayed values on the loop 2 trend graph. From: Every 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Seconds, or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 Minutes. - Independent from the loop 1 trend graph and data recorder sample rates. Loop 2 Trend View Mode The data to display on the loop 1 trend graph. From: Process Value only, PV (solid) & SP (dotted) at sample time, or the Max & Min PV between samples (candle-stick graph). Alarm active indication is always shown at the top of graph. Operator Visibility Extra parameters can be made visible/adjustable in Operation Mode from: Profile Control; Recorder Start/Stop; Recorder Status; Loop 1 & 2 Setpoint Select; Loop 1 & 2 Auto/Manual Select; Loop 1 & 2 Control Select; Loop 1 & 2 Trend View; Loop 1 & 2 Setpoint Ramp Rate. See Operator Mode lists. 46 LOCK CODE CONFIGURATION SUB-MENU SCREEN Lock Code Configuration Set Lock Codes (passwords) for the following configuration and control menus: Setup Wizard; Configuration Mode; Tuning Menu; Supervisor Mode; USB Menu; Recorder Menu, Profiler Setup and Profiler Menu. Independently adjustable from 1-9999 or OFF. Note: The factory default value is 10 for all lock codes. For security, users are recommended to change these codes. RESET TO DEFAULTS SUB-MENU SCREEN Reset To Defaults The user can set all parameters back to their factory default values before preparing the instrument for installation in a new application. Caution: The user must reconfigure all of the required settings before using the instrument. The USB Menu Navigating the USB Menu A notification is shown if a USB memory stick is inserted or removed from the USB port. The USB Menu will automatically be offered after insertion. The USB menu can also be accessed from the Main Menu.Entry into the Configuration Menu. Press to move forward, or through the screens. Press or no further changes are required, hold down >1sec to skip straight to next/previous screen accepting ALL values shown. Hold down Do not remove the memory stick from the USB port whilst a Data Transfer to or from the USB stick is in progress. Data loss or corruption may result. Press or to enter the Main Menu. to select USB Menu to return to the Main Menu Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation. Note: Entry into this mode is security-protected by the USB Menu Lock Code. Refer to the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu. Press and press Note: During Data Transfer, normal operation carries on in the background, but operator access to other screens is not possible. The transfer of a full memory can take up to 20 minutes. Only begin a transfer when you are certain that access (e.g. setpoint changes) will not be required. The USB Menu is entered from the Main Menu and press to change the value as required. The next/previous screen follows the last parameter. If Entry into the USB Menu Hold down or to move backwards to enter the Configuration Menu. 47 USB Mode Unlocking Read/Write To USB Device USB MENU SCREENS Enter correct code number to access the USB Menu. Factory Default value is 10. Select the required action from: Read Configuration File; Write Configuration File; Write Recorder Log File. Read Profile Files; Write Profile Files. Write Note: “Writing” is downloading from the Instrument to the USB stick. “Reading” is uploading from the USB stick to the Instrument. Select Profile To Write If writing a profile to the USB memory stick, choose a profile to write from the list provided. Enter A File Name Enter an 8-character file name if writing configurations or profiles. A file extension is automatically added to the end of file name (bct for configurations or pfl for profiles). Caution: Existing files with the same name will be over-written. Enter A Folder Name Recorder logs can contain multiple files. The user enters an 8-character folder name for these logs. See the Data Recorder section Note: To prevent existing recordings being over-written, an error message is shown if the folder name entered already exists. Writing Profile, Configuration or Log An animated screen is shown the files are being written. Caution: Do not disconnect USB device until completed! Data loss or corruption may result. Transfer Successful Confirmation that the data transfer to the USB stick completed correctly. Read Press to continue Transfer Failure For write failures, check for adequate disk space on the USB stick. Select File Select the Configuration or Profile file to transfer from the USB stick. Caution: Configuration reads overwrite ALL of the instruments existing settings with new values. Reading Profile or Configuration File An animated screen is shown while files are being read. Caution: Do not remove the memory stick whist this operation is in progress. Data corruption may result. Transfer Successful Confirmation that the data transfer from the USB stick completed correctly. Press Transfer Failure to continue. For read failures, check the maximum number of profiles and/or segments is not being exceeded. 48 Recorder Control Menu Navigating the Recorder Control Menu This menu allows the user to manually start a recording or to delete previous recordings. Refer to the Recorder Configuration sub-menu in Configuration Mode for information about how to setup the data to be recorded and the recording interval and the Data Recorder Option section on page 97 for general information about the recorder feature. Press to move forward, or through parameters & screens. or for more than 1 second skips Holding down immediately to the next/previous screen accepting ALL values as shown. Press quired. Entry into the Recorder Control Menu Press or and press to select or change the value as re- no further changes are required, hold down or >1sec to skip straight to next/previous screen accepting ALL values shown. to enter the Main Menu. Hold down to select Recorder Control Menu and press to return to the Main Menu Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation. Note: Entry into this mode is security-protected by the Recorder Control Menu Lock Code. Refer to the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu. Press or The next/previous screen follows the last parameter. If The Recorder Control Menu is entered from the Main Menu Hold down to move backwards to enter the Recorder Control Menu. Recorder Mode Unlocking RECORDER MENU SCREENS: Enter correct code number to access the Data Recorder Menu. Factory Default value is 10. Recording in Progress Warning Shown if a recording is in progress when the recorder control menu is entered. Start/Stop Data Recording Turn on or off the manual recording trigger. Note: Recording continues if another record trigger is active (e.g. on alarm/profile or via a digital input). Access is restricted to this screen only until recording stops (remove all active triggers). Recorder Status Information Current information about the data recorder feature, including if a recording is in progress (Recording or Stopped); the recording mode (FIFO or Record Until Memory Is Used); a % memory use bar-graph and the estimated available time remaining based on the data selected and memory left. If the alarm status is recorded and is likely to change often, take this into account when determining if there is sufficient memory available. Icons are displayed for active recording triggers. If any are active, the selected data will be recorded. Manual Record Clear Recordings Digital Input Profile Record Alarm Record Clears the recorder memory. Download any recorded data before use. Caution: This permanently deletes All recorded data. 49 Profiler Setup Menu not time-out Screens markedwill automatically. They Navigating the Profiler Setup Menu Press to move forward, or through parameters & screens. must be completed for a valid profile to be created. Refer to the Profiler section on page 87 for more details about the profiler. Press quired. Entry into the Profiler Setup Menu The Profiler Setup Menu is entered from the Main Menu Hold down Press or or and press to enter the Main Menu. to select the Profiler Setup Menu Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation. to enter the Profiler Setup Menu. Profiler Setup Menu Unlocking Profile Setup Options General Profile Configuration General to select or change the value as re- or for more than 1 second skips Holding down immediately to the next/previous screen accepting ALL values as shown. Note: Entry into this mode is security-protected by the profiler setup menu lock code. Refer to the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu. Press to move backwards PROFILER SETUP MENU SCREENS Enter correct code number to access Profiler Setup Menu. Factory Default value is 10. Select the required profile setup sub-menu option from: General Configuration; Create a Profile; Edit a Profile Header; Edit a Profile Segment; Insert a Segment; Delete a Segment; Delete a Profile or Delete ALL Profiles. Sub-menu with global settings affecting all profiles. Press Press return to Profile Setup Menu & to Enable Edit While Running Enables or disables the ability to edit profiles whist a profile is running. Caution: Edits made to the current or next segment of the running profile will take effect until after the profile is restarted. Timer Start Function Enable or disable automatic starting of profiles. When enabled, delayed starts are possible, or if the selected profile has a day & time trigger it waits until the time set before starting. Note: If the Timer Start Function is disabled, profiles can only be manually started, and with immediate effect even if they have a delay or day & time trigger defined. Create A Profile Sub-menu to create a new profile. A header is created first, followed by the segments – see below. Caution: It is not possible to exit from this sub-menu until profile creation is fully complete. Do not turn off the power during profile creation or editing. When the profile creation/editing is complete the instrument returns automatically to the profile setup main menu. Note: A warning is displayed if the maximum number of 64 profiles or 255 segments is exceeded. 50 PROFILER SETUP MENU SCREENS Profile Header: Settings that apply to the chosen profile as a whole. Enter Profile Name Give each profile a unique descriptive name of up to 16 characters. The name is shown in the profile status screen and in profile selection lists. Set the Number of Loops Select if a profile controls the setpoint of first loop only or both control loops. This screen is “read only” when editing a profile. The number cannot be changed once the profile has been created. Profile Header Details Note: the segment type and time settings are common to both loops. Some segment types are not available with 2-loop profiling Profile Starting Point The setpoint value used at the beginning of the first segment. From: Current Setpoint or Current Process Variable. The setpoint starts from the measured PV(s) or effective setpoint(s) of the process as it begins running. Profile Start Trigger From: None (profile start is not delayed); After Delay or Day and Time. - Day and Time possible on the recorder version only. Note: If the Timer Start Function is disabled, profiles can only be manually started, and with immediate effect even if they have a delay or day & time trigger defined. Profile Start Time If Day and Time is the Profile Start Trigger, this is the time (hh:mm:ss) when the profile will begin if it is selected to run. Profile Start Day(s) If Day and Time is the Profile Start Trigger, this is the Day(s) when the profile should run. From: Mon; Tue; Wed; Thu; Fri; Sat; Sun; Mon-Fri; Mon-Sat; SatSun or All. Profile Start Delay Time If After Delay is the Profile Start Trigger, this is the delay time of up to 99:59 (hh:mm) before a profile begins after a start request has been given. Profile Recovery Method The power-on action if profile was running at power-down (e.g. after a power cut), or following correction of a signal break. From: Control outputs off; Restart profile from the beginning; Maintain last profile setpoint; Use controller setpoint; Continue profile from where it was when power failed.. Profile Recovery Time The Recovery Method is ignored (the profile continues from where power failed), if power off for less than this time. Max 99:59 (hh:mm). - Recorder version only. Profile Abort Action The action taken after profile has been forced to stop early. From: Control outputs off; Maintain last profile setpoint or Use controller setpoint. Profile Cycles The number of times the program should run each time it is started. From 1 to 9999 or Infinite. Profile Segment Details Profile Segments: Settings that apply to individual profile segments Segment Number Shows the number of the profile segment being created. The maximum number of profiles across all profiles is 255. Segment Type Set the segment type from: Ramp Time (time to reach target SP); Ramp Rate (rate of change towards target SP – Single loop profiles only); Step (jump to target SP), Dwell (keep current SP); Hold (hold profile until released); Loop (back to previous segment); Join (to another profile); End or Repeat Sequence Then End (repeat a sequence of joined profiles). Note: Segment Ramp Rate is not available if the profile controls two loops. A Join, End or Repeat Sequence Then End isthe last segment in the profile. Repeat Sequence Then End is always the last profile in a sequence. 51 Profile Segment Details Loop 1 Target Setpoint. PROFILER SETUP MENU SCREENS The setpoint value to be reached control loop 1 by the end of this segment, if the type is Ramp Time, Ramp Rate or Step. Loop 2 Target Setpoint. If the profile is controlling 2 loops, this is the setpoint value to be reached control loop 2 by the end of the segment, if the type is Ramp Time or Step. Segment Ramp Time The time (hh:mm:ss) to reach the segment target setpoint if the segment type is Ramp Time. Segment Ramp Rate The rate of change towards the Segment Target Setpoint if segment type is Ramp Rate. The rate can be from 0.001 to 9999.9 display units per hour. Segment Dwell Time The time (hh:mm:ss) to maintain the current setpoint if the segment type is Dwell. Number of Loops If the segment type is Loop, enter the number of times to repeat the loop back, before continuing forward to the next segment. Back to Segment Number If the segment type is Loop, enter the segment to loop back to. Loop 1 Auto-Hold Type The auto-hold type for this segment to ensure loop 1 tracks the setpoint. From: None (no auto-hold); Above Setpoint (hold if too high only); Below Setpoint (hold if too low only) or Band (hold if too high or low). Loop 1 Auto-Hold Band Value The distance loop 1 can be from setpoint. Beyond this the profile is held for the selected Auto-Hold Type. Note: Two Loop-backs cannot be set to cross each other. Note: For Two-Loop Profiles, either loop can cause the profile to hold. The profile continues only when both loops are within their Auto-Hold Bands. Loop 2 Auto-Hold Type The auto-hold type for this segment to ensure loop 2 tracks the setpoint. From: None (no auto-hold); Above Setpoint (hold if too high only); Below Setpoint (hold if too low only) or Band (hold if too high or low). Loop 2 Auto-Hold Band Value The distance loop 2 can be from setpoint. Beyond this the profile is held for the selected Auto-Hold Type. Note: For Two-Loop Profiles, either loop can cause the profile to hold. The profile continues only when both loops are within their Auto-Hold Bands. Segment Hold Release Type A hold segment can either be released by an Operator/Digital input or be set to wait until a specified Time of Day - Recorder version only. Hold Release Time The time of day (hh:mm:ss) when a Hold Segment will release if the Release Type is Time Of Day. The profile is held by the hold segment and only released at the next occurrence of the time of day set. Times To Repeat Sequence The number of times the entire sequence of profiles should run. – if the last segment is Repeat Sequence Then End. Segment End Type The action taken after the profile ends normally. From: Control Outputs Off; Maintain Last Profile Setpoint or Use Controller Setpoint. Select Profile to Join Choose a profile to join to from the list provided – if the final segment type is Join. The selected profile will start immediately the current profile ends. 52 Profile Segment Details PROFILER SETUP MENU SCREENS Event n Select the events to be active during this segment. n = 1 to 5. Note: For end segments, the events selected to be active stay on until the instrument exits from profiler mode or a new profile runs. Note: For end segments, the events selected to be active stay on until the instrument exits from profiler mode or a new profile runs. Edit A Profile Header Choose the profile to be edited from the list of names provided, then alter any values as required – The profile header details are as shown in “Create A Profile” above. Edit A Profile Segment Choose the profile, then the segment to be edited from the lists provided. Alter any values as required – The profile segment details are as shown in “Create A Profile” above. Note: The last segment type can only be set to Join, End or Repeat Sequence Then End. Use Insert or Delete to change the end position. Insert A Segment Choose the profile, then the new segment’s position from the lists provided – Enter the new segment values as required – The profile segment details are as shown in “Create A Profile” above. Note: The new segment type cannot be set to Join, End or Repeat Sequence Then End. Use Delete to change the end position. Delete A Segment Choose the profile, then the segment to be deleted from the lists provided. End, Join or Repeat segments cannot be deleted. Delete A Profile Choose the profile to be deleted from the list of names is provided. The user is prompted confirm the deletion. Delete All Profiles If selected, the user is prompted to confirm that the profiles should be deleted. Caution: This deletes all profiles from memory! Profiler Control Menu PROFILER CONTROL MENU SCREENS Profiler Control Menu Unlocking Enter correct code number to access Profiler Control Menu. Factory Default value is 10. Profile Control If a profile is running, from: Do Nothing; Abort Profile (end immediately); or Jump to Next Profile Segment; Hold Profile or Release Hold. If profile not running, from: Do Nothing; Run Profile; End Profile Control (return to normal controller operation) or Select Profile. Select Profile Selects a profile. If Run Profile was chosen in the previous screen, the profile starts (after a delay if one is enabled). Otherwise the profile is selected, but waits for a run instruction (e.g. via digital input or timer). Note: Selection is “read only” if profile selection is via a digital input. Otherwise choose from the list of profile names provided. 53 Service & Product Information Mode Navigating Product Information Mode This is read only information about the instrument, its modules and enabled features. It has contact information to tell the user where they can obtain service, sales or technical support for the product. Normally this is the manufacturer or suppliers’ details. Using the PC software, the user can enter their own contact information. There are 7 lines of text - each up to 25 characters in length. Press to move forward or to move backwards through the displayed information. Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation. Entry into Service & Product Information Mode The Service & Product Information Mode is entered from the Main Menu Hold down and press Press or mation Mode. Press Mode. to enter the Main Menu. to select the Service & Product Infor- to enter the Service & Product Information SERVICE & PRODUCT INFORMATION SCREENS: Plug-in Module Information Lists the type plug-in modules types in Slots 1, 2, 3 or A Base Options Lists factory fitted base options, from: 2nd Universal/Aux input; Output 4 & 5 Relay; Output 6 & 7 Linear mA/V DC. Optional Features Lists which other optional features are fitted/enabled, from: Profiler; USB Port; Data Recorder and 8 Digital Inputs. Firmware Information The type and version of firmware installed in the instrument. Product Revision Level Software and Hardware update status. Serial Number The instrument serial number. Date of Manufacture The instrument Date of Manufacture (date format is dd/mm/yyyy). Input 1 Calibration Status The base calibration status for each signal type on input 1. Caution: Re-calibrate input 1 for mVDC, VDC, mADC, RTD or Thermocouple CJC if they do not say “Calibrated” Input 2 Calibration Status The base calibration status for each signal type on optional input 2. Caution: Re-calibrate input 2 for mVDC, VDC, mADC, RTD or Thermocouple CJC if they do not say “Calibrated” Calibration Check Due Date The date re-calibration is due. – only shown if the Calibration Reminder is enabled in the Input Configuration menu. For Service Contact Contact information for service, sales or technical support. 54 Automatic Tuning Menu Navigating the Automatic Tuning Menu The automatic tune menu is used to engage pre-tune and/or self-tune to assist setting up proportional bands and the integral and derivative time values used by the control loops. Press to move forward or through the selections. to move backwards Press or to change values or engage and disengage the tuning as required. Pre-tune can be used to set PID parameters approximately. Self-tune may then be used to optimize the tuning if required. See the Tuning section on page 99 for more information. Pre-tune can be set to run automatically after every power-up by enabling Auto Pre-Tune. Hold down and press to return to the Main Menu Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation. Entry into the Automatic Tuning Menu The Automatic Tuning Menu is entered from the Main Menu Hold down Press or and press to enter the Main Menu. to select the Automatic Tuning Menu. Press R to enter the Automatic Tuning Menu. AUTOMATIC TUNING MENU SCREENS Automatic Tuning Mode Unlocking Enter correct code number to access the Automatic Tuning Menu. Factory Default value is 10. Control loop 1 or 2 Select which control loop you want to tune –if unit has 2 control loops. Cascade Mode To pre-tune a cascade slave, select open-cascade. Note: When slave tuning is completed, repeat choosing open-cascade to tune the master. Pre-Tune Method From: Pre-Tune Standard or Pre-Tune at Value. Standard Pre-Tune tests the process response half-way from the activation point to the setpoint. Pre-Tune at Valve allows the user to specify where the test occurs. Pre-Tune Value Sets the value at which the process is tested for Pre-Tune at Valve. Caution: Consider possible over-shoot! Pre-Tune Save Location Store the pre-tune result to one of 5 PID sets. The new PID terms can be stored to any set, without changing the “active set” from control configuration. Run Pre-Tune on Set n Now? w Turns pre-tune on/off for the chosen PID Set. If configured, the TUNE LED indicator flashes whilst pre-tune is operating - *see below. Note: Pre-tune is disabled in on-off control mode; if the PV is less than 5% of span from setpoint; during Profiles; if the setpoint is ramping or if the selected control loop has been disabled. Pre-Tune Status Shows the current pre-tune status: Running or Stopped. If an attempt to run pre-tune failed, the reason is shown. Engage Self-Tune Turns self-tune on/off for the active PID Set. If configured, the TUNE LED indicator is continuously on whilst self-tune is operating Note: Self-Tune disabled if control is On-Off or disabled. If engaged during setpoint ramping, profile ramps or pre-tuning it is suspended until the ramp or pre-tune is completed. Self-Tune Status Shows current self-tune status: Running or Stopped. If an attempt to run selftune failed, the reason is shown. 55 AUTOMATIC TUNING MENU SCREENS Auto Pre-Tune At Power Up Enables/disables automatic pre-tune. When enabled, this attempts to tune the active PID set at every power-up (see Run Pre-Tune Now above). Note: Auto Pre-tune applies standard pre-tune engagement rules at power-up. It is disabled in on-off control mode; if the PV is less than 5% of span from setpoint; during Profiles; if the setpoint is ramping or if the selected control loop has been disabled. *TUNE indication is the default function of LED 3 but the user may have altered the LED functions or the labels using the PC Configuration Software. If LED 3 is used as a TUNE indicator, it flashes while pre-tune is operating, and is continuously on whilst self-tune is operating. If both pre-tune and self-tune are engaged the TUNE indicator will flash until pre-tune is finished, and is then continuously on. Forcing Lock Code Configuration Note: Pre-tune will flash the LED instead of turning it on, but flashing will be obscured if the LED had been configured to be used in conjunction with other functions and one of these is on. Power down the instrument. and for more Re-apply the power and hold down than 5 seconds as the start-up splash screen appears. The Lock Code Configuration menu is displayed. Lost Lock Codes Press to move forward or through the screen elements. All menu lock codes can be viewed or changed from configuration mode. In the event that the configuration mode lock code is forgotten, the instrument can be forced into Lock Code Configuration from power-up, where the codes can be checked or set to new values. Make note of the codes or press their values if required. Hold down and press to move backwards or to change to return to the Main Menu Scrolling “Help Text” is shown at the bottom of the screens to aid navigation. 56 9 Input Calibration & Multi-point Scaling User Calibration Single Point Calibration The process inputs can be adjusted to remove sensor errors or to match the characteristics of the attached process. For each loop, independent use of base (unadjusted), single point offset or two point calibration strategies are possible, as is the use of multi-point scaling for the displayed values of linear inputs. These parameters are in the Input 1 & 2 calibration sub-menus of Input Configuration Sub-Menu Screens. This is a ‘zero offset’ applied to the process variable across the entire span. Positive values are added to the reading, negative values are subtracted. It can be used if the error is constant across the range, or the user is only interested in a single critical value. To use, select Single Point Calibration from the input calibration menu, and simply enter a value equal, but opposite to the observed error to correct the reading. Single Point ‘Offset Calibration’ value Incorrect use of Calibration & Scaling can make the displayed value very different from the actual process variable. There is no front panel indication of when these parameters are in use. New Displayed Value Note: These methods do not alter the internal instrument calibration. Simply choose Base Calibration to restore normal measured values. Re-calibration of the internal base values is possible, but should only be attempted by qualified personnel as it overwrites the factory calibration – see Base Calibration Adjustment below if you think this may be required. Original Displayed Value Re-calibration of the internal base values is possible, but should only be attempted by qualified personnel as it overwrites the factory calibration – see Base Calibration Adjustment below if you think this may be required. Figure 44. Single Point Calibration This example shows a positive offset value. For example: If the process displays 27.8 when it should read 30, The error is -2.2 so an applied offset of +2.2 would change the displayed value to 30. Calibration Reminder If the Data Recorder feature is fitted, a calibration reminder can be set for a future date. From this date a daily reminder is shown (and shown at every start-up), until a new date has been set. This is useful in applications that require a regular check of the measured accuracy – see Input Configuration Sub-Menu Screens. The same offset is applied to all values, so at 100.0 the new displayed value would be 102.2. 57 Two Point Calibration Multi-point Scaling This method is used where an error is not constant across the range. Separate offsets are applied at two points in the range to eliminate both “zero” and “span” errors. To use: If an input is connected to a linear input signal (mA, mV or VDC), multi-point scaling can be enabled. This allows the linearization of a non-linear signal. – see Input Configuration Sub-Menu Screens. 1. Measure and record the error at a low point in the process. The Scale Input Upper & Lower Limits define the values shown when the input is at its minimum and maximum values. Up to 15 breakpoints can scale the input vs. displayed value between these limits. It is advisable to concentrate the break points in the area of the range with the most non-linearity, or an area of particular importance to the application. 2. Measure and record the error at a high point in the process. 3. Go to the first two point input calibration screen. a. Enter the desired low point value as the Calibration Low PV value. b. Enter an equal, but opposite value to the observed error as the Calibration Low Offset to correct the error at the low point. To Scale Upper Limit 4. Go to the second two point input calibration screen. a.Enter the desired high point as the Calibration High PV value. b. Enter an equal, but opposite value to the observed error as the Calibration High Offset to correct the error at the high point. New Linearized Displayed Values Scale Lower Limit Calibration High Offset Original Displayed Value Scaling Point 1 New Displayed Value Scaling Points 2, 3 & 4 Figure 46. Multi-point Scaling Calibration Low Offset Calibration Low Process Value Non-linear signal Set the scale limits, and then enter the 1st scaling point (this is a % of the scaled input span, and the desired display value to be shown at that input value. Next set the 2nd point and display value, followed by the 3rd etc. Continue unit all breakpoints are used or you have reached 100% of the input span. A breakpoint set at 100% ends the sequence. Calibration High Process Value Figure 45. Two Point Calibration This example shows a positive Low Offset and a negative High Offset. For example: If the process displays a low end error where +0.5 displays as 0.0, an offset of +0.5 corrects the value to +0.5 Base Calibration Adjustment Calibration of each input type is carried out during manufacture. This can be verified in the Service and Product Info screens. A high end value of 100.0 with a -1.7 offset would read 98.3. Re-calibration of the internal base values is possible, but should only be attempted by qualified personnel as it overwrites the factory calibration. For most applications, base re-calibration is not required during the lifetime of the instrument. There is a linear relationship between these two calibration points. Choose values as near as possible to the bottom and top of your usable span to achieve maximum calibration accuracy. The effect of any error can grow at values beyond the chosen calibration points. ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. BASE CALIBRATION SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED IF ERRORS HAVE BEEN ENCOUNTERED. REFER TO CALIBRATION CHECK BELOW. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH AND/OR EQUIPMENT / PROPERTY DAMAGE. 58 3.RTD inputs: decade resistance box with connections for three-wire input. ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. Any calibration adjustment must only be performed by personnel who are technically competent and authorized to do so. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or equipment damage. Performing a Calibration Check 1. Setup input 1 for the input signal type to be checked. 2. Power up the instrument and correctly connect the signal source. Leave powered up for at least five minutes for RTD and DC linear inputs, and at least 30 minutes for thermocouple inputs. The equipment used must be in a known good state of calibration. 3. After the appropriate delay for stabilisation, check the calibration at a number of cardinal points by applying the appropriate input signal. The observed readings should be within the tolerances stated in the specifications. Required Equipment To verify the accuracy of the instrument or to carry out recalibration, a suitable calibration signal source is required for each input type as listed below. Accuracy must be better than ±0.05% of reading: 4. Test the other signal types as above if required. 5. Repeat the process for input 2 if fitted. 1. DC linear inputs: 0 to 50mV, 0 to 10VDC and 0 to 20mADC. 2. Thermocouple inputs - complete with 0ºC reference facility, appropriate thermocouple functions and compensating lead wire. Recalibration Procedure Note: The 50 mV calibration phase MUST always be calibrated before calibration of the thermocouple input. For each process input, recalibration is carried out in six phases as shown in the table below; each phase corresponds to a basic input type. INPUT CALIBRATION PHASES Input 1 Terminals Type Millivolt Voltage Milliamps (pt 1) Milliamps (pt 2) RTD Thermocouple Signal (<0.05% error) 50 mVDC 10 VDC 0 mADC 20 mADC 200 ohm 0ºC K type source Cable Type Copper Wire Copper Wire Copper Wire Copper Wire Copper 3-Wires K Thermocouple Wire 1. For optimum accuracy, leave the instrument power-up for >30 minutes to warm up before beginning the calibration, and then toggle the power off/on to restart the instrument. 2. During the power-up “splash screen”, press - + - 2 2 3 3 1 2 3 3 1 1 2&3 3 6 6 7 7 5 6 7 7 5 5 6&7 7 7.Press to select the next calibration phase. 8. Repeat this process for each input type until all the phases are calibrated. For each phase, ensure that the correct input is applied, using the appropriate connections. 9. If the instrument has 2 process inputs, when the first input sequence completes, the Input 2 Calibration Status screen is displayed. Repeat the procedure from 3 above for this input. 10.Once calibration is complete, recorder versions will ask for a Calibration Reminder Date. If required, this can be changed to the date of your next calibration check. Ensure that Calibration Reminders are enabled in Input Configuration to receive a reminder. and together until the Input 1 Calibration Status screen is displayed. 3. Correctly connect the 1st phase signal (50mV), then press Input 2 Terminals + to select the first phase 4.Press + to initiate the calibration. 5. During calibration the message “50mV DC Input Calibrating” will display for a few seconds. This should be followed by the “Calibration Successful” confirmation. 6. If the input is misconnected or an incorrect signal is applied, the calibration will be aborted and the values will not be altered. The display will show “Failed: Signal Too Small!” or “Failed: Signal Too Large!”. Correct the problem and repeat that phase before continuing. 11.Press + to exit to the main menu. Note: The Calibration Mode automatically exits if there is no button activity for two minutes. 59 10 Digital Inputs Digital inputs are driven to one of two states (active or inactive) by an applied voltage signal or a contact opening/closing. highlighted input and to un-invert o. Hold down to skip to next screen accepting the values shown. A total of 9 physical digital inputs are possible on this instrument. A multiple digital input can be installed at time of purchase, and a single plug-in module can be fitted in option slot A. Digital Signal Type The digital inputs can be connected to volt-free contacts, or to a voltage signal (compatible with TTL). They can often be used in parallel with equivalent menu selections, where either can change function status. Highlighted Input Some inputs are level sensitive, while others are edge sensitive requiring a High to Low or Low to High transition to change functions status. Pre-Tune is always off at power-up (except if auto pre-tune is enabled), but other edge sensitive functions retain their power off status at power on. See the tables below for details. Soft Digital Inputs In addition to the physical digital inputs, four “soft” digital inputs are available. They are used to select functions in the same way as the physical inputs. Open contacts (>5000Ώ) or 2 to 24VDC signal = Logic High (logic low if inverted). Closed contacts (<50Ώ) or -0.6 to +0.8VDC signal = Logic Low (logic high if inverted). The response time is ≥0.25 seconds. Signals applied for less than this time may not register and the function might not change state. A diagnostic screen assists commissioning and fault finding by showing the current signal state for all digital inputs. The four soft digital inputs can be configured by combining physical inputs, alarms & events using Boolean logic. Input AND selections are then globally OR’d with the input OR selections, the alarms & the events. By using the invert inputs function, NAND & NOR equivalents can be created. Slot A, C1 to C8 & Soft digital input status ( = Active, Ø = Unavailable) Digital Input Functions Profile select bit format (BCD or Binary) Some or all of inputs C1 to C7 can be used for profile selection. If used in this way they cannot be used for any other functions. Soft inputs and any physical digital inputs not allocated for profile selection can be used to change the instrument status. Each input can only perform a single function. The possible functions are listed in the next table. Profile selected (example shown: C1-C3 = 011 = 6) Inverting Digital Inputs Digital inputs can be inverted to reverse their action making an “on” input behave as off. Step thorough each input using the key. Press to invert R the 60 Single Functions Digital inputs can often work in parallel with equivalent menus, where either can change function status. In the table below, = Level Sensitive: Where a High or low signal sets the function status. = Edge Sensitive: High-Low or Low-High transition changes the function status. Pre-Tune is always off at power on (except if auto pre-tune is in use), and profile recovery is as configured, but others functions retain their power off status when the power returns. Sensitivity / Functions’ Function Logic High* Logic Low* Power On State / Retained Loop 1 Control Select Enabled Disabled Loop 2 Control Select Enabled Disabled / Retained Loop 1 Auto/Manual Select Loop 2 Auto/Manual Select Automatic Automatic Manual Manual / Retained / Retained Loop 1 Setpoint Select Loop 2 Setpoint Select Loop 1 Pre-Tune Select Loop 2 Pre-Tune Select Loop 1 Self-Tune Select Loop 2 Self-Tune Select Profile Run/Hold Profile Hold Segment Release Profile Abort Main SP Main SP Stop Stop Stop Stop Hold No Action No Action Alternate SP Alternate SP Run Run Run Run Run Release Abort / Retained / Retained / OFF / OFF / Retained / Retained / As configured / Retained / As Digital Input Data Recorder Trigger Not Active Active / As Digital Input Output n Forcing Off/Open On/Closed / As Digital Input Clear All Latched Outputs No Action Reset / As Digital Input Output n Clear Latch No Action Reset / As Digital Input Key n Mimic (for L D U R) No Action Key Pressed / As Digital Input Profile Selection via Digital Inputs For instruments with the profiler option, the multi-digital input option can be used to select the profile to run using either a standard binary bit pattern, or binary coded decimal from BCD switches. Profile selection inputs are all level sensitive ( ), with a high/open signal equating to a binary 1 (assuming non-inverted), and a low/closed signal equating to a binary 0 (assuming non-inverted). Profiles are numbered 0 to 63. Select inputs C1 to Cn for the required number of profiles, from the table: C1 to C2 C1 to C3 C1 to C4 C1 to C5 C1 to C6 C1 to C7 0 to 3 0 to 7 0 to 15 0 to 31 0 to 63 0 to 3 0 to 7 0 to 9 0 to 19 0 to 39 0 to 63 Using Binary to Select Profile Numbers Selection of profiles is via a simple binary bit pattern. C1 is the least significant bit (LSB). C6 to C1 C5 to C1 C4 to C1 C3 to C1 C2 to C1 C1 000000 to 111111 00000 to 11111 0000 to 1111 000 to 111 00 to 11 0 to 1 (0 to 63) (0 to 31) (0 to 15) (0 to 7) (0 to 3) (0 to 1) Using BCD to Select Profile Numbers A single BCD switch can be used to select profiles 0 to 9 using C1 to C4, with a bit pattern identical to standard binary. For larger numbers, a double BCD switch arrangement is needed. A separate binary pattern is applied to C5 to C7 for the “tens” digit (10 = 001, 20 = 010, 30 = 011 etc). Any number combination higher than 63 is invalid. Multiples of Ten (0x to 6x) Multiples of One (x0 to x9) C7 to C1 C6 to C1 C5 to C1 C4 to C1 C3 to C1 C2 to C1 C1 000 to 110 00 to 11 0 to 1 0000 to 1001 000 to 111 00 to 11 0 to 1 (0x to 6x) (0x to 3x) (0x to 1x) (x0 to x9) (x0 to x7) (x0 to x3) (x0 to x1) Binary BCD C1 0 to 1 0 to 1 61 11 Cascade Control Applications with long time lags (e.g. with two or more capacities such as heated jackets) can be difficult to control with a single control loop. The solution is to split the process into two or more cascaded loops consisting of a Master and Slave(s) acting on a common actuator. Ideally, the slave loop’s natural response time should be at least 5 times faster than the master. As the oil temperature rises towards the slave setpoint, its output falls. Gradually, the product temperature will also begin rising, at a rate dependant on the transfer rate/lag between the oil jacket and the product. Eventually this causes the master’s PID output to decrease, reducing the slave setpoint. The oil temperature is reduced towards the new slave setpoint. This continues until the system becomes balanced. The result is quicker, smoother control with the ability to cope with changes in the load. Overshoot is minimized and the jacket temperature is kept within acceptable tolerances. The master controller measures the process temperature and compares it to the desired product setpoint. Its correcting variable (0 to 100% PID output) becomes the slave’s effective setpoint (scaled to suit the process). This setpoint is compared to the slave’s process input, and the controlling actuator is adjusted accordingly. Normal Cascade Operation During operation, the master and slave are coupled together and. “Cascade” is displayed. The master process value and setpoint are most relevant to the user. The master setpoint is directly adjustable. The process value of the slave controller is displayed for information only. Note: Cascade control is only available on models fitted with the 2nd control loop. The master loop uses input 1; and the slave loop uses input 2. Example Cascade Application Cascade-Open In this example the controlling actuator is a heater, indirectly heating the product via an oil jacket. The maximum input to the slave represents 300ºC, thus restricting the jacket temperature. At start-up the master compares the product temperature (ambient) to its setpoint (250ºC) and gives 100%. This sets the maximum slave setpoint (300ºC), which is compared to the oil temperature (ambient) and the slave requests maximum heater output. The cascade can be disconnected (via digital inputs or menu selection), switching from normal operation to direct control of the slave. “Cascade-Open” is displayed. Opening the cascade is “Bumpless”. The current cascade value is used as the initial slave setpoint (displayed as “SlaveSP”). The process is then controlled and adjusted solely by the slave controller using this setpoint. Switching back to Cascade is also bumpless. 250°C Master Setpoint MASTER SP OP IP1 0-100% Output 0-300°C Slave SP ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. The master process value is not under control when the cascade is open, but will be affected by the slave process. The operator is responsible for maintaining safe conditions. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or equipment damage. SLAVE SP OP IP2 Manual Mode OIL JACKET MASTER SENSOR The controller can be put into manual mode (via digital inputs or menu selection), switching from normal operation to direct control of the slave loop’s correcting variable. Manual power is adjusted from 0% or -100 to 100%. “MAN” is displayed. PRODUCT SLAVE SENSOR ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. Manual mode disables the cascade loop. It also ignores any output power limits, valve open/close limits and the control enable/disable setting. The operator is responsible for maintaining the process within safe limits. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or equipment damage. HEATER Figure 47. Cascade Example 62 Cascade Tuning To manually tune a cascade: The user can tune the slave and master loops manually, or use the pre-tune feature (see Controller Tuning). 1.Select Cascade-Open from the Cascade Control menu, breaking the link between the master and slave loops. In either case the slave control loop must first be optimized on its own, followed by the master loop in combination with the previously tuned slave. 2. Set the slave controller setpoint manually to the appropriate value for your application. 3. Tune the slave for relatively fast control (‘proportional only’ is often sufficient). To automatically pre-tune a cascade: 1. Go to the Automatic Tuning menu 4. Select Cascade-Closed from the Cascade Control menu to link the master and slave loops, then tune the master/slave combination. 2. Select “Cascade-Open” from the pre-tune menu to tune the PID set(s) on the slave. 3. After the slave has successfully tuned, pre-tune the master/slave combination by selecting “CascadeClosed” from the pre-tune menu. Note: The cascade remains open until you pre-tune the master or manually select Cascade-Closed. 63 12 Ratio Control A ratio control loop is used where the quantity of one of the material is to be controlled in proportion to the measured quantity of a second material. The controller mixes the materials at the desired ratio by adjusting the flow of input 1. The flow of input 2 may be controlled separately, but is not controlled by the ratio control loop itself. fected by this control loop. Atomizing air is fed in with the fuel oil at a constant rate ‘NO’. This must be considered when calculating the correct fuel/air mix. Total airflow is x1 + NO. The stoichiometric factor, SFac is entered to match the desired ratio. E.g for 10 parts total airflow to one part fuel, SFac would be 10. The setpoint (entered as a relative value such as 1.00) is multiplied by SFac when calculating the control deviation. E.g. with a setpoint of 1.00 and SFac of 10 the controller attempts to make the physical ratio 10. With a setpoint of 1.03 it would attempt to make the ratio 10.3 for 3% excess air. The process value used by the controller is therefore determined by the ratio of the two inputs rather than a single measured variable. Note: Ratio control is available on models with the 2nd Auxiliary Input, or two loop models. The feature and information displayed is optimized for control of burner fuel/air, but can be used in other flow ratio applications. The instantaneous (controlled) process value is calculated from the physical ratio, divided by SFac. Like the setpoint, this is displayed as relative value. E.g. if SFac is 10, with 59.5m3/h airflow measured at x1, 0.5m3/h atomising air applied at NO and 6m3/h fuel is measured at x2, the instantaneous process value would be: Stoichiometric Combustion Below is an example of stoichiometric combustion ratio control. For optimum combustion the fuel-air ratio is set so that there are no flammable residues in the waste gas. x1 + NO x2 * SFac = 59.5 + 0.5 6 * 10 = 1.00 If fuel flow remained at 6m3/h and the setpoint was adjusted to 1.05 (5% excess air), the controller would increase the x1 air flow to 62.5m3/h. Burner x1 + NO Air x2 * SFac Air Valve = 62.5 + 0.5 6 * 10 = 1.05 Fuel Atomization Air NO Figure 48. Ratio Control Example It is normal in this application to display the process value and setpoint as relative values rather than the physical ratio or absolute values. A scaling factor is set such that the displayed value will be 1.00 at the correct stoichiometric ratio for the application. Typical Ration display with Setpoint at 1.05 Inputs 1 and 2 are configured and scaled to match the attached flow meters. In this example a 4 to 20mA signal at x1 represents 0 to 1000m3/h of airflow controlled by a valve. The second 4 to 20mA signal at x2 represents 0 to 100m3/h of fuel oil. The fuel flow is not af- 64 13 Redundant Input Note: The user may not even be aware of a sensor fault, so it is strongly recommended that signal break alarms are configured for both inputs to provide a notification if problems occur. If the 2nd universal input is fitted, the second input can be configured as a redundant input for the main process input. This increases process security by protecting against the possible loss of valuable product resulting from sensor failure. The redundant sensor must be of the same type, and be correctly located in the application ready to take over if needed. If the redundant input option is selected, the 2nd input cannot be used for other functions. A second sensor is connected to input 2 so that if the main sensor fails, the instrument automatically switches to this backup or “redundant” sensor. In this condition, if input 1 has a signal break alarm configured it will activate, but any other process input or control status alarms seamlessly switch to the 2nd input. The 2nd input continues to be used until the signal to input 1 is restored. Note: If both signals are lost at the same time, the PV value display is replaced with “OPEN” and the normal sensor break actions occur. 65 14 Valve Motor Drive / 3-Point Stepping Control imum motor voltage when using the internal relays/triacs is therefore 120 V unless interposing relays are used. Interposing relays or other devices used to control the valve must themselves be rated for twice the motor supply voltage. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or equipment damage. When directly controlling the motor of a modulating valve or damper, set the Control Mode to VMD in configuration mode to enable the 3-point stepping Valve Motor Drive control algorithm. The term “3-point stepping” is used because there are 3 output states, open valve, close valve or stopped (no action). Switched outputs move the valve further open, or further closed when a control deviation error is detected. If the error is reduced to zero, no further output is required until the load conditions change. Switching actuators directly connected to the valve motor must only be used up to half of their rated voltage. The internal relay and triac outputs in this instrument are rated at 240VAC Therefore, the maximum motor voltage when using them is therefore 120V unless interposing relays are used. Interposing relays or other devices used to control the valve must themselves be rated for twice the motor supply voltage. VMD mode doesn’t allow on-off control (the minimum proportional band equates to 0.5% of the scaled input span) and usually requires PI control, where the derivative parameter is set to OFF. Note: Some modulating valves have positioning circuitry to adjust the valve position. These require a DC linear mA or voltage output and use the standard control algorithm (Set Control Mode to Standard). Position Feedback In VMD mode this instrument uses a boundless (openloop) 3-point stepping algorithm. It does not require any kind of position feedback in order to correctly control the process and can therefore avoids problems associated with faulty feedback signals. Special Wiring Considerations for Valve Motor Control Valve motor drive mode must have two identical outputs assigned to position the valve. One to open and one to close the valve. These outputs can be two single relays, two triacs, two SSR drivers or one dual relay, but it is recommended to use two single relays (SPDT change-over contacts), and to interlock the wiring as shown. This prevents both motor windings from being driven at the same time, even under fault conditions. However, where valve feedback is available it can still be displayed in a bar-graph as a percentage open (0 to 100%). Position feedback is usually provided by means of a potentiometer mechanically linked to the valve. The output of a related flow meter can also be used to indicate the relative valve position. Flow meters typically have linear 0-20/4-20mA or 0-5/0-10V signals. To display the position/flow signal the 2nd input is must be configured for this purpose. Open Valve Winding “OPEN” RELAY N/O 2 x 120V = 240V C 120V The input is adjusted and scaled to show 0 to 100% representing valve fully closed to fully open, or a flow rate equating to fully closed to fully open. The valve position scaling parameters are set in the Input Configuration sub menus. Valve Common Close Valve Winding N/C Valve Limiting N/O C When valve position/flow indication is in use, the signal can be used by the controller to limit the valve movement. Upper and/or lower limits can be set beyond which it will not attempt to drive the valve. The valve open and close limits are set in the Control Configuration sub menu. N/C “CLOSE” RELAY 120VAC SUPPLY ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. The windings of a valve motor effectively form an autotransformer. This has a voltage doubling effect when power is applied to either the Open or Close terminal, causing twice the supplied voltage at the other terminal. For this reason, switching devices directly connected to the valve motor must only be used up to half of their rated voltage. The max- These limits must be used with care. They are effectively control power limits. Do not set values that prevent proper control of the process! 66 15 Setpoint Sources Loop 2 Setpoint Sources The setpoint is the target value at which the instrument attempts to maintain the process variable. Each loop can have a Main “local” setpoint set from the keypad and an Alternate setpoint. Loop 2 can have a Main “local” setpoint set from the keypad and an Alternate setpoint. The alternate setpoint source can be either another local Setpoint” or a remote setpoint (RSP), set by a mA or V DC signal applied to auxiliary input A. The control loop can only use one setpoint source at a time for each loop. This is called the “Active Setpoint”. If the profiler option is fitted this provides the setpoint, replacing both main an alternate setpoints, when 2-loop profiling is in use. Loop 1 Setpoint Sources Loop 1 can have a Main “local” setpoint set from the keypad and an Alternate setpoint. The alternate setpoint source can be either another local Setpoint or a remote setpoint (RSP), set by a mA or V DC signal applied to the 2nd input or to auxiliary input A. The control loop can only use one setpoint source at a time for each loop. This is called the “Active Setpoint”. If the profiler option is fitted this provides the setpoint when the profiler is in use, replacing both main an alternate setpoints. Main/alternate setpoint selection can be made via a digital input; from the Control Configuration menu or if enabled in the Display Configuration sub-menu, an operator screen can be used to select the setpoint. The chosen setpoint selection method can be used to permanently select one of the setpoints, or allow switching between them. Main/alternate setpoint selection can be made via a digital input; from the Control Configuration menu or if enabled in the Display Configuration sub-menu, an operator screen can be used to select the setpoint. The chosen setpoint selection method can be used to permanently select one of the setpoints, or allow switching between them. Refer to the Control Configuration Sub-Menu Screens for setpoint settings. Loop 2 Profile Setpoint If the selected profile was configured to control the setpoint of both loops, it will provide the active setpoint source. Once profile control mode is exited, the selected main or alternate setpoint for loop 2 becomes active again. Refer to the Control Configuration Sub-Menu Screens on page 50 for setpoint settings. Loop 1 Profile Setpoint When in profile control mode, the selected profile always provides the active setpoint source for loop 1. Once profile control mode is exited, the selected main or alternate setpoint for loop 1 becomes active again. 67 16 Profiler Introduction more segments. The header information is unique for each profile, it contains the profile’s name; if it controls just one or both loops; how it should start & stop; the abort & power-loss recovery actions; and how many times it should be repeated. The Profiler feature allows the user to store up to 255 profile segments, shared between a maximum of 64 Profiles. Each profile controls the value of the setpoint over time; increasing, decreasing or holding their values as required. The profile can control both setpoints if the 2nd control loop is fitted. Note: Profile Header information is only stored to memory as the Segment creation sequence begins. No profile is created if you exit before this point. Segment information is stored as each segment is created, but the profile remains invalid until an end or join segment is defined. Profiler options and screens are added to the Main Menu and Operation Mode. Segment information is stored as each segment is created, but the profile remains invalid until an end or join segment is defined. This section covers the Profiler (or setpoint programmer) option. To confirm if profiling is enabled on your controller, refer to the Service & Product Info menu. Profiler Enabling Segments can be ramps, dwells, steps or special segments such as holds, ends, joins or loop-backs. Controllers supplied without the Profiler option installed can be upgraded by purchasing a licence code number. Refer to the Field Upgrade information. If the instrument also has the data recorder option, its real time clock (RTC) expands the profiling capabilities by adding Day & Time profile start options, releasing of hold segments at a specific time of day and changing the power fail recovery option to one based on the length of time the power has been off. These features are explained below and in the Profiler Setup and Profile Control menus. To obtain the correct code you must tell your supplier the instrument serial number – this can be found in the Service & Product Info menu. To enter the licence code, hold down the + keys during the power-up splash screen. Enter the 16-character licence code in the displayed screen and press Profile Starting & Standard Segments . The example profile below explains the standard segment types required to make a simple profile or profile sequence. A Start Trigger is the instruction to begin the selected profile. This can be from the profile control menu, a digital input signal, via a serial communications command or if enabled in the display configuration, the profile can be controlled from an operator screen. Profile Components General profile configuration settings apply to all profiles. They enable or disable “profile editing while running”, and automatic starting of the selected profile if it has been configured with a delay or day & time start trigger. If delay or day & time start triggers are disabled, profiles can only be manually started, and this is with immediate effect even if they have a delay or day & time trigger defined. If delay or day & time start triggers are enabled, delayed starts are possible, and if the selected profile has a day & time trigger it will wait until the time set and before starting. Following a Start Trigger, profiles can start immediately, after a delay, or using the Day & Time start timer (Day & Time start available on with the Recorder option only). Following the start trigger, the remaining delay time or the start day & time are shown in the profile status bar-graph until the profile begins running. Note: Profiles outside current setpoint limits will not run, A “profile not valid” error shows if you attempt to run a profile under these circumstances. Note: Even if profile editing is enabled, changes to the current and next segment or a running profile will not take effect until the profile is next run. Changes to other segments will take effect immediately. Profile Header & Segment Information Each profile has its own header information plus 1 or 68 PROFILE 1 PROFILE 9 Seg. 1 Target SP Step Ramp (Time/Rate) Starting Setpoint End Start Trigger Timer or Delay Join (Profile 1 to Profile 9) Dwell Figure 49. Profile Starting and Standard Segment Types Ramps and Step Segments have target setpoint that they will reach as they finish. If a segment is a RampTime type, the slope needed to reach the target setpoint in the defined time will change depending on the starting setpoint value. For a Ramp-Rate segment, the slope is defined by the segments Ramp Rate, so the time to reach the target setpoint will change instead. This is of particular significance for the first segment, since the starting value of the process may not be known in advance. The example below shows how two loop profiling works in practice. Auto-Hold settings and target setpoints are independent for each loop, but the segment types and time settings are the same. Note: When using the instrument as a two loop profiler Ramp-Rate type segments are not available. Calculate the time from the starting value to the target setpoint and use Ramp-Time instead. A Dwell (often called a “soak”) holds the previous setpoint value for the specified dwell time. Step segments jump straight to the new target setpoint value. An End segment ends the profile or profile sequence. If the last segment is a Join, the “join target” profile will begin running. Seg. u & v shows a ramp and a dwell with the shared time base The ramp direction can be different (Seg. w), and although one loop cannot ramp while the other dwells, a “dwell” is achieved by a ramp with its final setpoint value at the same value as the previous segment (Seg. x). Similarly, if only one loop is to Step to a new value, make the other “step” to its existing setpoint value. If you later change the previous setpoint, you may have to change both segments. Note: If the join target has been deleted the profile sequence will abort and the last profiles abort action will apply. Two Loop Profiles If the instrument is configured to control two control loops, the setpoint of both loops can be maintained when profiling. Both setpoints are synchronized to a common segment time-base, but have independent target setpoints for each of the segments. The Loop-back feature takes both loops back to the same defined earlier segment. Note: When using the instrument as a two loop profiler Ramp-Rate type segments are not available. Calculate the time from the starting value to the target setpoint and use Ramp-Time instead. Note: Auto-Hold settings are independent for each loop. Either loop can cause the profile to auto-hold, holding both loops at the current setpoint value. The profile continues only when both loops are back within their hold bands. 69 Loop-Back Segments A Hold Segment is a pre-planned hold programmed into the profile. It maintains the value of the previous segment and the profile does not continue until a Continue Trigger occurs. This can be via a key-press, serial communications, a digital input signal or after waiting until a pre-set time of day (time of day is available with the recorder option only). A Loop-back segment goes back to a specified segment in the current profile. This action is repeated for the required number of times (1 to 9999) before the profile continues onwards. More than one Loop Segment can be used in a profile, but they cannot cross. Loop-back target segment The Auto-Hold Feature There are independent auto-hold settings for each segment of each loop controlled by the profile. When utilized, auto-hold ensures that the profile and the actual processes remain synchronized. If the process does not closely match the setpoints (within the defined Hold Bands), the profile will be held until it returns within bounds. When Auto-Hold becomes active, the profile status is shown as “Held”. x 500 Loop Segment End Note: The segment time is increased by the time that the process is out of bounds, extending the total profile run time. Example: Runs segments 1 to 5, then repeats segments 3 to 5 again 500 times, before continuing on to segments 7 Auto-hold can be configured to hold the profile if the process goes beyond the hold band Above the Setpoint only, Below the Setpoint only or it can be set to Band (either side of the setpoint). Figure 50. Loop-back Segments Note: For two-loop profiles, either loop can cause the profile to hold. The entire profile (i.e. both loops) will be held if either process is outside of its autohold band. It continues only when both loops are back within their auto-hold bands. Profile Running / Holding vs. Hold Segments Continue Triggers Auto Hold Examples Held if Auto-Hold set to Above Setpoint or Band Hold Start Hold Band End Hold Stop Run Hold Segments Dwell Segment Setpoint Figure 51. Run/Hold & Hold Segments Process Variable Held if Auto-Hold set to Below Setpoint or Band A Hold condition during a segment maintains the current profile setpoint value(s). Once the hold condition is stopped the Ramp or Dwell continues. The user can request that the profile holds, or it can be instigated automatically. Figure 52. Auto-Hold on a Dwell Segment During a Dwell, the dwell time is increased by the time that the process is outside of the hold band in the selected direction(s). This ensures the process was at the desired level for the required amount of time. Note: A running segment will hold if the operator or a digital input instructs it to. It can also hold due to “auto-hold”, if one of the profile control loops is disabled, if a cascade is set to “open” or if manual control is selected. 70 Auto Hold on Ramps During a Ramp segment, the ramp is held at the current setpoint value while the process is outside of the hold band in the selected direction(s). The time taken to complete the ramp is increased by the time taken by the Auto-Hold. Held if Auto-Hold set to Above Setpoint or Band Profile Cycles & Repeat Sequences Process Variable Ramp Setpoint (without Auto-Hold) A profile can be configured to run itself from 1 to 9999 times or continuously using the Profile Cycles setting. A profile ending with Repeat then End will run the entire sequence of profiles again from 1 to 9999 times before ending. Hold Band Ramp Setpoint (with Auto-Hold) Held if Auto-Hold set to Below Setpoint or Band Figure 53. Auto-Hold On A Ramp Segment PROFILE 4 PROFILE 31 PROFILE 7 Profile 4 Profile 7 Profile 31 Cycles = 1 Cycles = 1 Cycles = 3 Repeat Sequence = 10 Join (Profile 4 to Profile 31) Repeat Then End (times to repeat = 10) Join (Profile 31 to Profile 7) Example: Runs profile 4 once, profile 31 three times & profile 7 once. This sequence is repeated ten times. Figure 54. Profile Cycles & Repeats 71 Power/Signal Lost Recovery Actions Note: Recorder versions always use option E (Continue profile) if the “off time” is less than the Profile Recovery Time setting. If the “off time” is longer, the defined Profile Recovery Method is used. If the power is cut or the input signal is lost while a profile is running, the instrument will use the defined Profile Recovery Method once the signal / power returns. The profile recovery method is set in the profile header. Note: With option E, after the power returns profile bar graph resets and shows the remaining/elapsed time for the profile only since re-starting. The possible profile recovery options are explained below. Power / input returns Power off or input lost Run (Start-on SP) Off Time Planned Profile = Control Off Controller SP See note above A B C D E Possible Recovery Methods: End the profile and maintain the setpoint value(s) from the time the power failed. End the profile and use Controller Setpoint value (s). End the profile with the Control outputs off - setpoint value replaced by “OFF”. Restart the profile again from the beginning. Continue profile from the point it had reached when the power failed Figure 55. End, Abort and Recovery Actions 72 Profile End Actions Profile Abort Actions Once a running profile ends, that profiles’ Segment End Type defines the action taken by the instrument. If a sequence of profiles are joined together, the End Segment Type of the last profile in the sequence will be carried out when it completes. The end segment type is set in the final profile segment data. If a running profile is forced to end early, the Profile Abort Action defines action taken by the instrument. The profile abort action is set in the profile header. If a profile sequence is forced to end early, the profile abort action of the current segment will be used. The possible abort options are explained below. The possible profile end actions are explained below. Run (Start-on SP) Run (Start-on SP) Profile Aborted Normal Profile End Controller SP Controller SP Last Profile SP Last Profile SP Controller SP = Control Off Controller SP Possible Profile End Actions: A At profile end, maintain the Final Setpoint value(s) of the last segment. B At profile end, exit Profiler Mode and use the Controller Setpoint value(s). = Control Off C At profile end, remain in Profiler Mode with the Control outputs off. Possible Profile Abort Actions: Figure 56. Profile End Action A Abort the profile and maintain the value of the setpoint at the time of the abort. Note: When using two loop profiles, the end-action applies to both loops, but each ends with its own individual setpoint in line with the method chosen. B Abort the profile and exit Profiler Mode using the Controller Setpoint value. C Abort the profile and remain in Profiler Mode with the Control outputs off. Figure 57. Profile Abort Action Note: When using two loop profiles, the abort-action applies to both loops, but each ends with its own individual setpoint in line with the method chosen. 73 17 USB Interface Note: To speed up the disk operation, keep the number of files in these folders to a minimum. The features in this section are available on models fitted with the optional USB Interface. Using the USB Port The first recorder log file is named 001-0001.csv. A new file is created with the first 3 digits incremented (e.g. 002-0001.csv; 003-0001.csv etc) each time the data being recorded is changed. The last 4 digits increment (e.g. 001-0002.csv; 001-0003.csv etc) if the file size reaches 65535 lines, if a recording is stopped then re-started or if there is a period of >10s without an alarm when recording from an alarm trigger. The USB Interface can be used to upload or download instrument settings to or from a USB memory stick (FAT32 formatted). Easy configuration of multiple instruments is achieved by copying from one instrument to another, or by transferring data from the PC configuration software. If the Data Recorder or Profiler options are fitted, recordings and profile information can also be transferred via USB memory stick. Refer also to the USB menu. USB Memory Stick Folders & Files Do not remove the memory stick during data transfer. Data corruption may result. When a USB stick is inserted, the instrument looks for, and if necessary creates the DEVICE, CONFIG, PROFILE and RECORDER folders. Files must be located in these folders in order to be used by the instrument. When preparing to upload files from your PC, ensure that you save them to the correct folder on the memory stick. During data transfer, normal operations carry on in the background, but operator access is denied. Transfer of full memory can take up to 20 minutes. Only begin a transfer when access to the instrument (e.g. setpoint changes) will not be required. If the file name already exists, data will be overwritten. DEVICE – This folder must be located in the Root of the USB memory stick CONFIG – Configuration files (*.bct) PROFILE – Profile program files (*.pfl) RECORDER – Recorder log folders/files The user is asked for a new recorder sub-folder name before transferring recorder data to USB. The instrument stores the log files (*.csv) in this folder. 74 18 Data Recorder The optional Data Recorder allows the recording of process conditions to memory over time. It operates independently from the Trend Views. The recorder includes 1Mb of flash memory to store data when powered down and a real time clock (RTC) with a battery backup. Recorder status and manual record trigger control can optionally be added to Operation Mode. This is enabled or disabled in the Display Configuration sub-menu. Note: The recorder control screens allow the manual trigger to be started or stopped, but recording will continue as long as any trigger that has been configured is active. Servicing of the Data Recorder/RTC circuit and replacement of the internal lithium battery should be carried out by only a trained technician. Uploading Data Recordings can be transferred to a memory stick using the USB Port. They can also be uploaded directly to the PC software via the configuration port or RS485/Ethernet communications if fitted. Recordable Values A selection of values can be recorded for each control loop, from: Process Variable; Maximum or Minimum Process Values (since the previous sample); Setpoints; Primary Power, Secondary Power or Auxiliary Input values. Additionally the status of Alarms and Profiler Events can be recorded, as can when the unit is turned On/Off. See the Recorder Configuration sub-menu. The data is stored in Comma Separated format (.csv) which can be opened and analysed with the optional PC software or opened directly into a spreadsheet. Many third party software programs can also import data in the .csv format. Sampling rates between 1 second and 30 minutes are possible, with the data either recorded until all memory is used, or with a continuous “First In/First Out” buffer overwriting the oldest data when full. The file contains a header identifying the source instruments serial number, the date of the file upload and descriptions of the data columns. The data columns seen depends on the data selected to record, but will always include the date and time of each sample. The date format follows the instrument date format selection. Date(en) is dd/mm/yyyy, and Date (us) is mm/dd/yyyy. The recording capacity is dependent on sample rate and number of values recorded. For example: Two analogue values will recorded for 21 days at 30s intervals. More values or faster sample rates reduce the duration proportionally. Note: Analysis with the PC software is limited to 8 analogue channels, so only the first 8 will be displayed. The number of recorded alarms & events is not limited. Note: If recorded, each alarm/event change forces an extra sample to be recorded, reducing the remaining recording time available. If these are likely to change often, take this into account when determining if there is sufficient memory available. Additional Features & Benefits from the Recorder Recorder Control and Status The real time clock (RTC) included with the data recorder also expands the profiling capabilities (see Profiler) and allows a “calibration due” reminder to be shown at a specified date (see the Input Configuration sub-menu). Options for starting/stopping recordings include Manually (from the recorder menu or a screen added to operation mode); a Digital Input; during a Running Profile; or Record on Alarm. See the Recorder Configuration sub-menu. The recorder control menu allows the manual trigger to be started or stopped, as well as deleting recorded data from memory. A status screen is shown with current information about the recorder, including if a recording is in progress (Recording or Stopped); the recording mode (FIFO or Record Until Memory Is Used); a % memory use bar-graph and the estimated available time remaining based on the data selected and memory used. Manual Record Digital Input Profile Record Alarm Record These icons are displayed for each active recording trigger. 75 19 Controller Tuning PID Sets & Gain Scheduling Up to 5 sets of PID tuning terms can be entered for each control loop, allowing the instrument to be pre-set for differing conditions. Each set has individual values for the following parameters: Primary Proportional Band; Secondary Proportional Band; On-Off Differential; Integral Time; Derivative time; Overlap/Deadband. The parameter values can be entered in the control configuration sub menu (page 50), but also see Automatic Tuning below for automatic tuning of the PID sets. Note: ON/OFF control is possible with the individual PID sets but cannot be used with gain scheduling. On/ off control is replaced with the default proportional band if gain scheduling is turned on. The PID sets might be configured for different applications, or to allow for differing process or load conditions that might occur in a single application. In this case one set at a time would be selected as the “Active PID” set for that loop. Automatic Tuning If the a change to the scale lower or upper limits forces any of the breakpoints out of bounds, all breakpoints will be turned off and the instruments uses the default PID set 1. To automatically optimize the controllers tuning terms for the process, you can use Pre-Tune, Self-Tune or Auto Pre-Tune independently for each control loop. Note: Automatic tuning will not engage if either proportional band is set to On/Off control. Also, pre-tune (including an auto pre-tune attempt) will not engage if the setpoint is ramping, if a profile is running, or if the Process Variable is <5% of span from setpoint. Alternatively, if the process conditions change significantly during use (e.g. if it is partially exothermic as the temperature rises) Gain Scheduling can be employed. Gain scheduling ‘bumplessly’ switches PID sets automatically at successively higher setpoint or process values, giving optimal control across a wide range of process conditions. This is explained in the diagram below. Pre-Tune Pre-tune performs a single disturbance of the normal start-up pattern so that a good approximation of the ideal PID values can be made prior reaching setpoint. It automatically stops running when the test is complete. The user chooses which PID set the new tuning terms will be applied to, but this selection does not change the selected “active PID set”. This allows tuning of any PID set for future use before return to control with the current PID set.In VMD mode, derivative is not applied by pre-tune, and the controller is optimized for PI control. In standard control mode, PI & D are all calculated, which may not suit all processes. Scale Upper Limit PID Set 4 PV or SP PID Set 3 PID Set 2 Breakpoints PID Set 5 There are two pre-tune modes with different process test points. The first is “Standard Pre-Tune” which tests the process response half-way from the activation point (the process value when pre-tune began running) to the current setpoint. The second type is “Pre-Tune at Value” which allows the user to specify the exact point at which the process test will occur. PID Set 1 Scale Lower Limit PID set 1 is used from the scaled input lower limit until the “breakpoint” for set 2 is passed and that set becomes active. Set 2 is then used until the breakpoint for Set 3 is reached etc. ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. Consider possible process over-shoot when selecting the value to tune at. If there is a risk of damage to the product or equipment select a safe value. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or equipment damage. If any breakpoint is set to OFF, the subsequent PID sets are not used. The final set continues from the last breakpoint to the scaled input upper limit. Gain Scheduling breakpoints can be selected to switch PID sets with a change in the current setpoint value, or the current process value. 76 During pre-tune, the controller outputs full primary power until the process reaches the specified test point. Power is then removed (full secondary power applied for dual control), causing an oscillation which the pre-tune algorithm uses to calculate the proportional band(s), integral and derivative time. The pre-tune process is shown below. Setpoint (SP) Process Variable (PV) Oscillation Peak Pre-Tune Value set or Test Point specified,for or Std Pre-Tune = SP – Initial PV for “standard” pre2 tune Initial PV Pre-Tune engaged here +100% Power (HEAT output) Control Power -100% Power (Cool output) Figure 58. Pre-Tune Operation Self-Tune Pre-tune is selected from the automatic tuning menu. It will not engage if either primary or secondary outputs on a controller are set for On-Off control, during setpoint/profile ramping or if the process variable is less than 5% of the input span from the setpoint. If engaged, self-tune uses a pattern recognition algorithm to continuously monitor and adjust for control deviation. It optimizes the tuning by applying new PID terms to the current Active PID set while the controller is operating. In VMD control mode, derivative is not applied by self-tune, and the controller is optimized for PI control. Note: To pre-tune a cascade, first select “CascadeOpen” to tune the PID set(s) on the slave. After the slave has successfully tuned, remember to pre-tune the master/slave combination (this time select “Cascade-Closed”). The cascade remains open until you do this. Setpoint 2 Temperature Auto Pre-Tune As a single-shot operation, pre-tune will automatically disengage once complete, but can be configured to run at every power up using the auto pre-tune function. If auto pre-tune is selected, a Standard Pre-tune will attempt to run at every power up, applying new tuning terms to the current Active PID set. Auto pre-tune will not be able to test the process if at the time the controller is powered up, either primary or secondary outputs are set for On-Off control, during setpoint/profile ramping or if the process variable is less than 5% of the input span from the setpoint. Auto pre-tune is not possible with cascade control mode. Load Disturbance Setpoint 1 Start-up Setpoint Change Time Figure 59. Self-Tune Operation 77 Process Variable The diagram shows a typical application involving a process start up, setpoint change and load disturbance. In each case, self-tune observes one complete oscillation before calculating new terms. Successive deviations cause the values to be recalculated converging towards optimal control. When the controller is switched off, these terms are stored and used as starting values at switch on. The stored values may not always be ideal, if for instance the controller is new or the application has changed. In this case the user can use pre-tune to establish new initial values for self-tune to fine-tune. Time Use of continuous self-tuning is not always appropriate. For example frequent artificial load disturbances, such as where an oven door is often left open for extended periods, might lead to calculation errors. In standard control mode, PI & D are all calculated, which may not suit all processes. Self-Tune cannot be engaged if the instrument is set for on-off control or with cascade control mode. P = Peak-to-Peak variation of first cycle T = Time period of oscillation (minutes) Primary Proportional Band = P Integral Time = T (minutes) Dervitive Time = T/6 Figure 60. Manually Tuning PID with Primary Output Manually Tuning Tuning Control Loops - PID with Primary & Secondary Outputs Tuning Control Loops - PID with Primary Output only This tuning technique balances the need to reach setpoint quickly, with the desire to limit setpoint overshoot at start-up and during process changes. It determines values for the primary & secondary proportional bands, and the integral and derivative time constants that allow the controller to give acceptable results in most applications using dual control (e.g. Heat & Cool). This technique balances the need to reach setpoint quickly, with the desire to limit setpoint overshoot at start-up or during process changes. It determines values for the primary proportional band and the integral and derivative time constants that allow the controller to give acceptable results in most applications that use a single control device. These techniques are suitable only for processes that are not harmed by large fluctuations in the process variable. This technique is suitable only for processes that are not harmed by large fluctuations in the process variable. Method 1 – For Simple Processes 1. Check that the scaled input limits and the setpoint limits are set to safe and appropriate levels for your process. Adjust if required. Use this method if the process is simple/easily controlled and the relative power available from the primary and secondary actuators is approximately symmetrical (e.g. if the maximum heating and cooling power is equal) 2. Set the setpoint to the normal operating value for the process (or to a lower value if an overshoot beyond this value might cause damage). 1. Tune the controller using only the Primary Control output as described in steps 1 to 5 of Manually Tuning - PID with Primary Output, above. 3. Select On-Off control (i.e. set the primary proportional band to zero). 2. Set the Secondary Proportional Band to the same value as the Primary Proportional Band and monitor the operation of the controller in dual control mode. 4. Switch on the process. The process variable will rise above and then oscillate about the setpoint. Record the peak-to-peak variation (P) of the first cycle (i.e. the difference between the highest value of the first overshoot and the lowest value of the first undershoot), and the time period of the oscillation (T) in minutes. See the diagram below. 3. If there is a tendency to oscillate as the control passes into the Secondary Proportional Band, increase its value. If the process appears to be over-damped (slow to respond) in the region of the secondary proportional band, decrease its value. 5. Calculate the PID control parameters (primary proportional band, integral time and derivative time) using the formulas shown. 6. Repeat steps 1-5 for the second control loop if required. 78 4. When the PID tuning values have been determined, if there is a disturbance to the process variable as control passes from one proportional band to the other, set the Overlap/Deadband parameter to a positive value to introduce some overlap. Adjust this value by trial and error until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. If symmetrical oscillation occurs, increase the proportional bands together, maintaining the same ratio. If the asymmetrical oscillation occurs, adjust the ratio between the bands until it becomes symmetrical, then increase the bands together, maintaining the new ratio. 7. When the PID tuning values have been determined, if there is a disturbance to the process variable as control passes from one proportional band to the other, set the Overlap/Deadband parameter to a small positive value to introduce some overlap. Adjust this value by trial and error to find the minimum value that gives satisfactory results. Method 2 – For Asymmetrical Processes Use this method if the relative power available from the primary and secondary actuators is not symmetrical (e.g. if the maximum cooling power is less than the maximum heating power) 1. Check that the scaled input limits and the setpoint limits of the loop in question are set to safe and appropriate levels for your process. Adjust if required. Valve, Damper & Speed Controller Tuning This tuning method is used when controlling devices such as dampers, modulating valves or motor speed controllers. It applies equally to modulating valves with their own valve positioning circuitry, or in VMD mode where the instrument directly controls the valve motor– see Valve Motor Drive / 3-Point Stepping Control. It determines values for the primary proportional band, and integral time constant. The derivative time is normally set to OFF. This type of PI Control minimizes valve/motor wear whilst giving optimal process control. 2. Set the setpoint to the normal operating value for the process (or to a lower value if overshoots beyond this value might cause damage). 3. Select On-Off control by setting the primary proportional band to zero (the secondary proportional band will automatically be set on-off control when you do this). 4. Switch on the process. The process variable will oscillate about the setpoint. Record the peak-to-peak variation (V) of the oscillation (i.e. the difference between the on-going overshoot and undershoot), the time period of the oscillation (T) in minutes and the maximum rate of rise (dP) and fall (dS) as the oscillation continues. In VMD modem the Motor Travel Time and Minimum On Time must be correctly set to match the valve specifications before attempting to tune the controller. This technique is suitable only for processes that are not harmed by large fluctuations in the process variable. Process Variable 1. Set the setpoint to the normal operating process value (or to a lower value if overshoot beyond this value is likely to cause damage). 2. Set the Primary Proportional Band a value approximately equal to 0.5% of the input span for the loop to be tuned. (Span is the difference between the scaled input limits). 3. Set the Integral & Derivative time constants both to OFF. Time V = On-going Peak-to-Peak variation T = Time period of oscillation (minutes) dS = Maximum rate of rise dP = Maximum rate of fall R = Ratio dS/dP Primary Proportional Band = Pb.P = V/R Secondary proportional band = R x Pb.P Integral Time = T minutes Derivative Time = T/6 4. Switch on the process. The process variable should oscillate about the setpoint. 5.Follow the instructions in the diagram below. At each stage, allow sufficient settling time before moving on to the next stage. P.Pb is the Primary Proportional Band, Int.T is the Integral Time Constant. 5. Calculate and enter the PID control parameters (primary proportional band, integral time and derivative time) using the formulas shown, and observe the process. 79 Process Variable START Apply power to the load Does the PV continuously oscillate? Time Tb Yes No Note the time interval T a Are the Oscillations decaying to zero? Multiply P.Pb setting by 1.5 & Set Int.T = Ta Yes No Note the period of the decaying oscillations (T b) Multiply P.Pb setting by 1.5 Process Variable Multiply P.Pb setting by 1.5 & Tb Set Int.T = 2 END The controller is now tuned. Fine-tuning may be required to optimize the controllers’ response Ta Time This method can also be used to tune PID loops. Set Derivative to approx. Ta / 4 Figure 61. Manually Tuning – PI Control 80 Fine Tuning Proportional Bands Small adjustments can be made to correct minor control problems. These examples assume reverse acting control (e.g. heating). Adjust accordingly for direct action. If they do not help solve the problem, re-tune the controller as detailed on the preceding sections. Increase the width of the proportional bands if the process overshoots or oscillates excessively. Decrease the width of the proportional band if the process responds slowly or fails to reach setpoint. Note: When fine tuning the settings, only adjust one parameter at a time, and allow enough time for the process to settle into its new state each time you change a value. Proportional Bands Cycle Times A separate cycle time adjustment parameter is provided for the Primary and Secondary control when using time-proportioning control outputs. Too Narrow: Process Oscillates If the process oscillates at the same frequency as the cycle time, it indicates it may be too long for the process. Decrease the cycle time and re-check the period of oscillation, if it has changed to match the new cycle time this confirms that the time is too long. If the control actuators will accept it, continue reducing the cycle time until the process stabilizes, or no further improvement is seem. Recommended times. Relays ≥10 seconds. SSR Driver 1 second. Too Wide: Slow warm up and response Proportional Cycle Times Integral Time Constant To find the optimum integral time, decrease its value until the process becomes unstable, then increase it a little at a time, until stability has is restored. Induce a load disturbance or make a setpoint change to verify that the process stabilizes. If not increase the value some more and re-test. If the response is too slow, decrease the integral time, but avoid instability. Ideal: Stable Process Integral Time Too Short: Overshoots and oscillates Too Long: Oscillation period = cycle time. Note: Adjusting the cycle time affects the controllers operation; a shorter cycle time gives more accurate control, but mechanical control actuators such as relays will have a reduced life span. Too Long: Slow warm up and response 81 Derivative Time Constant Anti Wind -up Initially set the derivative to between 1/4th and 1/10th of the Integral time value. Increase the derivative time if the process overshoots/undershoots. Increase it a little at a time, but if the process becomes unstable, decrease it until the oscillation stops. Induce a load disturbance or make a setpoint change to verify that the process stabilizes. If not decrease the value some more and re-test. Too Small: Overshoots setpoint before settling Derivative Time Process Disturbance Too Long: Oscillates and over corrects when process disturbed Too Short: Slow to setpoint or offset above/below setpoint Manual Reset For proportional only control, after making all other adjustments, if a positive control deviation error exists (process is offset above the setpoint) reduce the manual reset until the error is eliminated. If there is a negative error (process is offset below the setpoint) increase manual reset until the error is eliminated. Process Disturbance Too Short: Slow warm up and disturbance response under-corrects For PID or PI control, typically set manual reset to approximately 80% of power needed to maintain setpoint, but lower values can be used to inhibit start-up overshoot if required. Note: When controlling a modulating valve, it is usually recommended that derivative is set to OFF to avoid excessive valve activity. Derivative can cause process instability in these processes. Manual Reset Anti Wind-up If after fully optimising the tuning, there is an overshoot of the setpoint at start-up or in response to large setpoint changes, the reset wind-up inhibit point can be reduced to suspend integral action until the process is closer to setpoint. If set too low control deviation can occur (the process settles, but is offset above or below the setpoint). It this is observed, increase the value until the deviation error is removed. Too High: Overshoots setpoint at start-up Too Low: Slow to setpoint 82 20 Serial Communications Supported Protocols Ethernet Configuration Communication with a Modbus RTU or Modbus TCP master device is possible if the appropriate communications module is fitted in option slot A. An RS485 Module is required for Modbus RTU. An Ethernet Module is required for Modbus TCP. The instrument can also act as “setpoint master” over RS485 for multi-zone applications. In this mode the unit continuously sends its setpoint value using Modbus broadcast messages. Master mode is not available with Ethernet module. For Modbus TCP communications (Modbus over Ethernet), the Ethernet IP address can either be assigned by a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), BootP or AutoIP server on the network, or manually assigned using the IP address allocation software tool. Refer to the PC Software section of this manual on page 235 for more information about setting the IP address. The supported data rates 10/100BASE-T (10 or 100 Mbps) are automatically detected. To protect the EEPROM from excessive write operations, the 6 most recent parameter write requests are held in standard RAM. All data is written to EEPROM at power-down or if another parameter is changed. Avoid continuously changing more than 6 parameters. Link Layer A query (data request or command) is transmitted from the Modbus Master to the Modbus Slave. The slave instrument assembles the reply to the master. This instrument is normally a slave device. It can only act as a master when being use as setpoint master controller to broadcast its setpoint to other controllers in a multizone application. All models also have a configuration socket for bench setup via the PC configuration software prior to installation. An RS232 to TTL lead (available from your supplier) is required in order to use this socket. A front mounted USB port is available on some models; this can also be used to configure the instrument or to transfer recorder or profile files via a USB memory stick. MODBUS MASTER RS485 Configuration SLAVE INSTRUMENT QUERY The RS485 address, bit rate and character format are configured via the front panel from the Comms Configuration sub-menu or by using the PC Configurator software. Data rate: 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps RESPONSE Parity: None (default), Even, Odd Character format: Always 8 bits per character. Device Address: See below. Figure 62. Modbus Link Layer RS485 Device Addressing The instrument must be assigned a unique device address in the range 1 to 255. This address is used to recognize Modbus queries intended for this instrument. With the exception of globally addressed broadcast messages, the instrument ignores Modbus queries that do not match the address that has been assigned to it. A message for either a QUERY or RESPONSE is made up of an inter-message gap followed by a sequence of data characters. The inter-message gap is at least 3.5 data character times - the transmitter must not start transmission until 3 character times have elapsed since reception of the last character in a message, and must release the transmission line within 3 character times of the last character in a message. The instrument will accept broadcast messages (global queries) using device address 0 no matter what device address is assigned to it. No response messages are returned for globally addressed queries. Note:Three character times is approximately 0.25ms at 115200 bps, 0.51ms at 57600 bps, 0.75ms at 38400 bps, 1.5ms at 19200 bps, 3ms at 9600 bps and 6ms at 4800bps. 83 Supported Modbus Functions Data is encoded for each character as binary data, transmitted LSB first. The following Modbus function types are supported by this instrument: For a QUERY the address field contains the address of the slave destination. The slave address is given together with the Function and Data fields by the Application layer. The CRC is generated from the address, function and data characters. Function Code 03 / 04 For a RESPONSE the address field contains the address of the responding slave. The Function and Data fields are generated by the slave application. The CRC is generated from the address, function and data characters. The standard MODBUS RTU CRC-16 calculation employing the polynomial 216+215+22+1 is used. Intermessage Gap Address 1 Character Function 1 Character CRC Data n Check 2 Characters Characters Modbus Meaning Description Read Read current binary Holding/Input value of specified numregisters ber of parameters at given address. Up to 64 parameters can be accessed with one query. 06 Write Single Register Writes two bytes to a specified word address. 08 Diagnostics Used for loopback test only. 16 Write (0x10 hex) Multiple Registers Writes up to 253 bytes of data to the specified address range. 23 (0x17 hex) Read/Write Multiple Registers Reads and Writes 253 bytes of data to the specified address ranges. Function Descriptions The following is interpreted from the Modbus protocol description obtainable from www.modbus.org. Refer to that document if clarification is required. In the function descriptions below, the preceding device address value is assumed, as is the correctly formed two-byte CRC value at the end of the QUERY and RESPONSE frames. Function 03 / 04 - Read Holding/Input Registers Reads current binary value of data at the specified word addresses. QUERY: Function 03 / 04 - Read Holding/Input Registers Func Code 03/04 Address of First Word LO LO Number of Words HI LO QUERY: Function 03 / 04 - Read Holding/Input Registers Func Code Bty Code 03/04 XX 1st Word HI LO Etc. g Last Word HI LO Note: In the response the “Number of Bytes” indicates the number of data bytes read from the instrument. E.g. if 5 words are read, the count will be 10 (0xA hex). The maximum number of words that can be read is 64. If a parameter does not exist at one of the addresses read, a value of 0000h is returned for that word. 84 Function 06 - Write Single Register Reads current binary value of data at the specified word addresses. QUERY: Function 06 - Write Single Register Func Code 06 Address of Word HI LO Value to Write HI LO QUERY: Function 06 - Write Single Register Func Code 06 Address of Word HI LO Value Written HI LO Note: The Response normally returns the same data as the query. Function 08 - Loopback Diagnostic Test QUERY: Function 08 - Loopback Diagnostic Test Func Code 08 Diagnostic Code 00 00 Value HI LO QUERY: Function 08 - Loopback Diagnostic Test Func Code 08 Sub Function 00 00 Value HI LO Note: The Response normally returns the same data as the loopback query. Other diagnostic codes are not supported. Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers (0x10 Hex) QUERY: Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers (0x10 Hex) Func Code 10 1st Write Address HI LO Number of Words HI LO Byte Count XX 1st Word HI LO etc g Last Word HI LO QUERY: Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers (0x10 Hex) Func Code 10 1st Word Last Word HI HI LO LO Note: The maximum number of data bytes that can be written in one message is 253 bytes. 85 Function 23 Hex - Read / Write Multiple Registers (0x17 hex) Reads and writes the requested number of consecutive words (two-bytes) starting at the specified addresses. QUERY: Function 23 Hex - Read / Write Multiple Registers (0x17 hex) Func Code 17 1st Read Address HI Number of Words LO HI 1st Write Address LO HI Number of Byte Write Words Count LO HI LO XX Values to Write 1st Word HI LO etc g Last Word HI LO QUERY: Function 23 Hex - Read / Write Multiple Registers (0x17 hex) Func Code Byte Count 17 XX 1st Word HI LO etc g Last Word HI LO Note: The maximum number of data bytes that can be read and written in one message is 253 bytes. Exception Responses If a QUERY is sent without a communication error, but the instrument cannot interpret it, an Exception RESPONSE is returned. The exception response consists of a modified version of the original function code and an exception code that explains what was wrong with the message. Possible exception responses and their reasons are: Function Code The original function code with its most significant bit (MSB) set. This offsets it by 0x80, so for example 0x06 becomes 0x86. Exception Code 00 Modbus Meaning Unused Description None 01 Illegal Function Function number is out of range. 02 Illegal Data Address Write functions: Parameter number is out of range or not supported. (for write functions only). Read Functions: Start parameter does not exist or the end parameter greater than 65536. 03 Illegal Data Value Attempt to write invalid data / required action not executed. Note: In the case of multiple exception codes for a single query, the Exception code returned is the one corresponding to the first parameter in error. Modbus Parameters ed) or an IEEE / Motorola (big endian) Floating Point Number. Where possible use floating point numbers especially if the values have more than one decimal place. The register addresses for the Modbus parameters are detailed in the tables below. The Access column indicates if a parameter is read only (RO) or if it can also be written to (R/W). Communications writes will not be implemented if the Writing Via Serial Comms parameter in the Communications Configuration sub-menu is set to Disabled. Note: Read only parameters will return an exception if an attempt is made to write values to them. Some parameters that do not apply for a particular configuration will still accept read / writes (e.g. attempting to scale a linear output which has not been fitted). Data Formats Data can be accessed in three formats: Integer Only (decimal places are not included), Integer with 1 Decimal Place (only the first decimal place value is includ- 86 Parameter Register Address Listings Calculating Parameter Register Addresses Register Address Calculation Address Example: (For Loop 1 Process Variable) Data Value Returned: If actual Value = 23.9 decimal Integer Only Integer +1 Floating Point (hex) Address Address + 0x4000 Address x 2 + 0x8000 (dec) Address Address + 16384 Address x 2 + 32768 (hex) 0x0407 0x4407 0x880E (dec) 1031 17415 34830 (hex) 0x00, 0x17 0x00, 0xEF 0x41, 0xBF, 0x33, 0x33 (dec) 23 239 23.9 as floating decimal The register address offset calculations are shown above. Analog parameter values and their limits are expressed as decimals. For your convenience, the parameter tables on the following pages show each parameter’s Modbus register address as a decimal and hexadecimal number for all three formats. The tables also show if the parameter has read-only (RO) or read-write (RW) access. Bit parameters list the bit positions and their meaning (bit 0 = LSB). Only bits that have a function are listed, unused bits are omitted. Calibration Reminder Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Calibration Reminder Enable Dec 1048 17432 34864 Hex 0418 4418 8830 RW Calibration Reminder Date Dec n/a n/a 34866 Hex n/a n/a 8832 Values & Description Value Calibration Reminder Status 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Value RW Calibration Reminder Status This can be entered only as a floating point number. When converted to binary the least significant 19 bits represents the date in this format: www DDDDD MMMM YYYYYYY YYYYYYY = YEAR MMMM = MONTH DDDDD = DAY OF MONTH (1-31 but must be valid) www = Day of the week The day of week portion is calculated from the date (Read Only). Example with date set to 31/07/2012 Day (31) = 11111 Month (7) = 0111 Year (12) = 0001100 Bits 17 and higher are ignored when writing so 11111 0111 0001100 (64396 decimal) is just one of many possible numbers to write as 31/07/2012, and when reading the date back, the number returned is 10 11111 0111 0001100 (195468 decimal) because bits 17-19 are 010 (to represent “Tuesday”). 87 Universal Process Input 1 Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Universal Process Input 1 Type Dec 1024 17408 34816 Hex 0400 4400 8800 RW Input 1 Engineering Units Dec 1025 17409 34818 Hex 0401 4401 8802 RW Input 1 Maximum Display Decimal Places Dec 1026 17410 34820 Hex 0402 4402 8804 RW Input 1 Scaled Input Lower Limit Dec 1027 17411 34822 Hex 0403 4403 8806 1028 17412 34824 Hex 0404 4404 8808 RW 1029 17413 34826 Hex 0405 4405 880A Value Calibration Reminder Status 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 B Type Thermocouple C Type Thermocouple D Type Thermocouple E Type Thermocouple J Type Thermocouple K Type Thermocouple L Type Thermocouple N Type Thermocouple R Type Thermocouple S Type Thermocouple T Type Thermocouple PtRh 20%: 40% Thermocouple PT100 RTD NI120 RTD 0 to 20mA DC 4 to 20mA DC 0 to 50mV DC 10 to 50mV DC 0 to 5V DC 1 to 5V DC 0 to 10V DC 2 to 10V DC Potentiometer Value Engineering Units For Display 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = None = °C (Default for Europe) = °F (Default for USA) = °K = Bar = pH =% = %RH = PSI Value 0 1 2 3 Maximum Number of Decimal Places In Display = None (e.g. 1234) = One (e.g. 123.4) = Two (e.g. 12.34) = Three (e.g. 1.234) Valid between input 1 range maximum and minimum (see Specifications section for input details) Scaling Value High Limit RW Input 1 Process Variable Offset Dec Description Scaling Value Low Limit Input 1 Scaled Input Upper Limit Dec Values Valid between input 1 range maximum and minimum (see Specifications section for input details) Single Point Calibration PV Offset RW Used for Single Point Calibration of input 1 Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits 88 Input 1 Filter Time Constant Dec 1030 17414 34828 Hex 0406 4406 880C Input 1 Process Input Filter Time RW Input 1 Process Variable Valid between 0.0 and 512.0 Process Input 1 Value Dec 1031 17415 34830 Hex 0407 4407 880E RO Input 1 Signal /Sensor Break Flag Dec 1032 17416 34832 Hex 0408 4408 8810 Value RO Input 1 Signal Under Range Flag Dec 1033 17417 34834 Hex 0409 4409 8812 1034 17418 34836 Hex 040A 440A 8814 RO 1035 17419 34838 Hex 040B 440B 8816 RO RW Input 1 Multi-Point Scaling Enable Dec 1053 17437 34874 Hex 041D 441D 883A 0 1 Value Input 1 Cold Junction Compensation Dec 0 1 Value Input 1 Signal Over Range Flag Dec The current input 1 process value 0 1 Value 0 1 Value RW Input 1 Scale Point 1 0 1 Process Input Break Status Inactive Active (break detected) Process Input Under Range Status Inactive Active (under-range detected) Process Input Over Range Status Inactive Active (over-range detected) CJC Status Disabled Enabled (default) Multi-Point Scaling Status Disabled Enabled (valid only if the input type is linear) Multi-Point Scaling Point 1 Dec 1054 17438 34876 Hex 041E 441E 883C RW Input 1 Display Point 1 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 1 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 1 Dec 1055 17439 34878 Hex 041F 441F 883E RW Input 1 Scale Point 2 Value to display at multi-point scaling point. 1 Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 2 Dec 1056 17440 34880 Hex 0420 4420 8840 RW Input 1 Display Point 2 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 2 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 2 Dec 1057 17441 34882 Hex 0421 4421 8842 RW Input 1 Scale Point 3 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 2. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 3 Dec 1058 17442 34884 Hex 0422 4422 8844 RW Input 1 Display Point 3 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 3 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 3 Dec 1059 17443 34886 Hex 0423 4423 8846 RW Value to display at multi-point scaling point 3. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. 89 Input 1 Scale Point 4 Multi-Point Scaling Point 4 Dec 1060 17444 34888 Hex 0424 4424 8848 RW Input 1 Display Point 4 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 4 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 4 Dec 1061 17445 34890 Hex 0425 4425 884A RW Input 1 Scale Point 5 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 4. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 5 Dec 1062 17446 34892 Hex 0426 4426 884C RW Input 1 Display Point 5 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 5 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 5 Dec 1063 17447 34894 Hex 0427 4427 884E RW Input 1 Scale Point 6 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 5. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 6 Dec 1064 17448 34896 Hex 0428 4428 8850 RW Input 1 Display Point 6 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 6 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 6 Dec 1065 17449 34898 Hex 0429 4429 8852 RW Input 1 Scale Point 7 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 6. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 7 Dec 1066 17450 34900 Hex 042A 442A 8854 RW Input 1 Display Point 7 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 7 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 7 Dec 1067 17451 34902 Hex 042B 442B 8856 RW Input 1 Scale Point 8 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 7. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 8 Dec 1068 17452 34904 Hex 042C 442C 8858 RW Input 1 Display Point 8 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 8 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 8 Dec 1069 17453 34906 Hex 042D 442D 885A RW Input 1 Scale Point 9 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 8. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 9 Dec 1070 17454 34908 Hex 042E 442E 885C RW Input 1 Display Point 9 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 9 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 9 Dec 1071 17455 34910 Hex 042F 442F 885E RW Value to display at multi-point scaling point 9. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. 90 Input 1 Scale Point 10 Multi-Point Scaling Point 10 Dec 1072 17456 34912 Hex 0430 4430 8860 RW Input 1 Display Point 10 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 10 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 10 Dec 1073 17457 34914 Hex 0431 4431 8862 RW Input 1 Scale Point 11 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 10. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 11 Dec 1074 17458 34916 Hex 0432 4432 8864 RW Input 1 Display Point 11 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 11 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 11 Dec 1075 17459 34918 Hex 0433 4433 8866 RW Input 1 Scale Point 12 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 11. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 12 Dec 1076 17460 34920 Hex 0434 4434 8868 RW Input 1 Display Point 12 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 12 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 12 Dec 1077 17461 34922 Hex 0435 4435 886A RW Input 1 Scale Point 13 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 12. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 13 Dec 1078 17462 34924 Hex 0436 4436 886C RW Input 1 Display Point 13 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 13 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 13 Dec 1079 17462 34926 Hex 0437 4437 886E RW Input 1 Scale Point 14 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 13. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 14 Dec 1080 17464 34928 Hex 0438 4438 8870 RW Input 1 Display Point 14 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 14 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 14 Dec 1081 17465 34930 Hex 0439 4439 8872 RW Input 1 Scale Point 15 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 14. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 15 Dec 1082 17466 34932 Hex 043A 443A 8874 RW Input 1 Display Point 15 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 15 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 15 Dec 1083 17467 34934 Hex 043B 443B 8876 RW Value to display at multi-point scaling point 15. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. 91 User Calibration Type Value Dec 1085 17469 34938 Hex 043D 443D 887A User Calibration Point - Low Value Dec 1086 17470 34940 Hex 043E 443E 887C 1087 17471 34942 Hex 043F 443F 887E RW 1088 17472 34944 Hex 0440 4440 8880 RW 1089 17473 34946 Hex 0441 4441 8882 The Low Offset value applied to the reading at the Low Calibration Point 0.0 to 100.0%. Two Point Calibration High Point RW User Calibration Point - High Offset Dec The input value at which the Low Offset will be applied. Valid between input 1 scaled input lower & upper limits. Two Point Calibration Low Offset Value User Calibration Point - High Value Dec None (input 1 base calibration used) Single Point Calibration Two Point Calibration Two Point Calibration Low Point User Calibration Point - Low Offset Dec 0 1 2 RW Calibration Type The input value at which the High Offset will be applied Valid between input 1 scaled input lower & upper limits. Two Point Calibration High Offset Value RW The High Offset value applied to the reading at the High Calibration Point 0.0 to 100.0%. Universal Process Input 2 Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Universal Input 2 Usage Dec 1166 17550 35100 Hex 048E 448E 891C RW Universal Process Input 2 Type Dec 1100 17484 34968 Hex 044C 444C 8898 Values & Description Value Process Input Type 0 Standard 1 Feedback signal for Input 1 2 Redundant Sensor (backup for Input 1 Thermocouple or RTD) 3 Not Used (or Indication only) Value RW Process Input Type 0 B Type Thermocouple 2 C Type Thermocouple 4 D Type Thermocouple 6 E Type Thermocouple 8 J Type Thermocouple 10 K Type Thermocouple 12 L Type Thermocouple 14 N Type Thermocouple 16 R Type Thermocouple 18 S Type Thermocouple 20 T Type Thermocouple 22 PtRh 20%: 40% Thermocouple 24 PT100 RTD 26 NI120 RTD 28 0 to 20mA DC 29 4 to 20mA DC 92 Input 2 Engineering Units 30 0 to 50mV DC 31 10 to 50mV DC 32 0 to 5V DC 33 1 to 5V DC 34 0 to 10V DC 35 2 to 10V DC 36 Potentiometer Value Dec 1101 17485 34970 Hex 044D 444D 889A RW Input 2 Maximum Display Decimal Places Dec 1102 17486 34972 Hex 044E 444E 889C RW Input 2 Scaled Input Lower Limit Dec 1103 17487 34974 Hex 044F 444F 889E 1104 17488 34976 Hex 0450 4450 88A0 RW 1105 17489 34978 Hex 0451 4451 88A2 RW 1106 17490 34980 Hex 0452 4452 88A4 1 = °C (Default for Europe) 2 = °F (Default for USA) 3 = °K 4 = Bar 5 = pH 6 =% 7 = %RH 8 = PSI Value Maximum Number of Decimal Places In Display 0 = None 1 One (e.g. 123.4) 2 Two (e.g. 12.34) 3 Three (e.g. 1.234) Valid between input 2 range maximum and minimum (see Specifications section for input details) Valid between input 2 range maximum and minimum (see Specifications section for input details) Single Point Calibration PV Offset RW Input 2 Filter Time Constant Dec = None Scaling Value High Limit Input 2 Process Variable Offset Dec 0 Scaling Value Low Limit Input 2 Scaled Input Upper Limit Dec Engineering Units For Display Used for Single Point Calibration of input 2. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits Input 2 Process Input Filter Time RW Input 2 Process Variable Valid between 0.0 and 512.0 Process Input 2 Value Dec 1107 17491 34982 Hex 0453 4453 88A6 RO Input 2 Signal /Sensor Break Flag Dec 1108 17482 34984 Hex 0454 4454 88A8 The current input 2 process value Value RO Process Input Break Status 0 Inactive 1 Active (break detected) 93 Input 2 Signal Under Range Flag Dec 1109 17483 34986 Hex 0455 4455 88AA Value RO Input 2 Signal Over Range Flag Dec 1110 17484 34988 Hex 0456 4456 88AC Input 2 Cold Junction Compensation Dec 1111 17485 34990 Hex 0457 4457 88AE RW Input 2 Multi-Point Scaling Enable Dec 1129 17513 35026 Hex 0469 4469 88D2 0 Inactive 1 Active (under-range detected) Value RO Input 2 Scale Point 1 Process Input Over Range Status 0 Disabled 1 Enabled (default) Value CJC Status 0 Disabled 1 Enabled (default) Value RW Process Input Under Range Status Multi-Point Scaling Status 0 Disabled 1 Enabled (only if the input type is linear) Multi-Point Scaling Point 1 Dec 1130 17514 35028 Hex 046A 446A 88D4 RW Input 2 Display Point 1 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 1 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 1 Dec 1131 17515 35030 Hex 046B 446B 88D6 RW Input 2 Scale Point 2 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 1. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 2 Dec 1132 17516 35032 Hex 046C 446C 88D8 RW Input 2 Display Point 2 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 2 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 2 Dec 1133 17517 35034 Hex 046D 446D 88DA RW Input 2 Scale Point 3 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 2. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 3 Dec 1134 17518 35036 Hex 046E 446E 88DC RW Input 2 Display Point 3 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 3 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 3 Dec 1135 17519 35038 Hex 046F 446F 88DE RW Input 2 Scale Point 4 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 3. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 4 Dec 1136 17520 35040 Hex 0470 4470 88E0 RW Input 2 Display Point 4 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 4 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 4 Dec 1137 17521 35042 Hex 0471 4471 88E2 RW Input 2 Scale Point 5 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 4. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 5 Dec 1138 17522 35044 Hex 0472 4472 88E4 RW Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 5 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. 94 Input 2 Display Point 5 Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 5 Dec 1139 17523 35046 Hex 0473 4473 88E6 RW Input 2 Scale Point 6 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 5. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 6 Dec 1140 17524 35048 Hex 0474 4474 88E8 RW Input 2 Display Point 6 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 6 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 6 Dec 1141 17525 35050 Hex 0475 4475 88EA RW Input 2 Scale Point 7 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 6. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 7 Dec 1142 17526 35052 Hex 0476 4476 88EC RW Input 2 Display Point 7 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 7 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 7 Dec 1143 17527 35054 Hex 0477 4477 88EE RW Input 2 Scale Point 8 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 7. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 8 Dec 1144 17528 35056 Hex 0478 4478 88F0 RW Input 2 Display Point 8 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 8 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 8 Dec 1145 17529 35058 Hex 0479 4479 88F2 RW Input 2 Scale Point 9 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 8. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 9 Dec 1146 17530 35060 Hex 047A 447A 88F4 RW Input 2 Display Point 9 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 9 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 9 Dec 1147 17531 35062 Hex 047B 447B 88F6 RW Input 2 Scale Point 10 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 9. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 10 Dec 1148 17532 35064 Hex 047C 447C 88F8 RW Input 2 Display Point 10 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 10 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 10 Dec 1149 17533 35066 Hex 047D 447D 88FA RW Input 2 Scale Point 11 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 10. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 11 Dec 11450 17534 35068 Hex 047E 447E 88FC RW Input 2 Display Point 11 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 11 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 11 Dec 1151 17535 35070 Hex 047F 447F 88FE RW Value to display at multi-point scaling point 11. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. 95 Input 2 Scale Point 12 Multi-Point Scaling Point 12 Dec 11452 17536 35072 Hex 0480 4480 8900 RW Input 2 Display Point 12 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 12 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 12 Dec 1153 17537 35074 Hex 0481 4481 8902 RW Input 2 Scale Point 13 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 12. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 13 Dec 11454 17538 35076 Hex 0482 4482 8904 RW Input 2 Display Point 13 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 13 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 13 Dec 1155 17539 35078 Hex 0483 4483 8906 RW Input 2 Scale Point 14 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 13. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 14 Dec 11456 17540 35080 Hex 0484 4484 8908 RW Input 2 Display Point 14 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 14 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 14 Dec 1157 17541 35082 Hex 0485 4485 890A RW Input 2 Scale Point 15 Value to display at multi-point scaling point 14. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Multi-Point Scaling Point 15 Dec 11458 17542 35084 Hex 0486 4486 890C RW Input 2 Display Point 15 Percentage of the scaled input where multi-point scaling value 15 is applied. 0.1 to 100.0% *set to 100% ends scaling sequence at that point. Multi-Point Scaling Display Value For Point 15 Dec 1159 17543 35086 Hex 0487 4487 890E RW User Calibration Type Value to display at multi-point scaling point 15. Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits. Value Dec 1161 17545 35090 Hex 0489 4489 8912 RW User Calibration Point - Low Value Dec 1162 17546 35092 Hex 048A 448A 8914 1163 17547 35094 Hex 048B 448B 8916 RW 1164 17548 35096 Hex 048C 448C 8918 RW 1165 17549 35098 Hex 048D 448D 891A 1 Single Point Calibration 2 Two Point Calibration The input value at which the Low Offset will be applied. Valid between input 2 scaled input lower & upper limits. The Low Offset value applied to the reading at the Low Calibration Point 0.0 to 100.0% Two Point Calibration High Point RW User Calibration Point - High Offset Dec None (input 2 base calibration used) Two Point Calibration Low Offset Value User Calibration Point - High Value Dec 0 Two Point Calibration Low Point User Calibration Point - Low Offset Dec Calibration Type The input value at which the High Offset will be applied. Valid between input 2 scaled input lower & upper limits. Two Point Calibration High Offset Value RW The High Offset value applied to the reading at the High Calibration Point 0.0 to 100.0%. 96 Digital Input Setup Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Invert Digital Inputs Values Bit Dec 10059 26443 52886 Hex 274B 674B CE96 RW Profile Selection Type 10029 26413 52826 Hex 272D 672D CE5A RW Digital Input Profile Select Dec 10030 26414 52828 Digital Input A 1 Digital Input C1 2 Digital Input C2 3 Digital Input C3 4 Digital Input C4 5 Digital Input C5 6 Digital Input C6 7 Digital Input C7 8 Digital Input C8 Hex 272E 672E CE5C Digital Input A Useage None 1 Binary 2 BCD 10020 26404 52808 Hex 2724 6724 CE48 RW Inputs Assigned Exclusively to Profile Selection 0 Digital Input C1 1 Digital Input C1 to C2 2 Digital Input C1 to C3 3 Digital Input C1 to C4 4 Digital Input C1 to C5 5 Digital Input C1 to C6 6 Digital Input C1 to C7 Value Dec Profile Selection & Bit Pattern Format 0 Value RW If Bit = 1, Input n is Inverted (ON becomes OFF etc) 0 Value Dec & Description Useage for Digital Input A 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 97 Digital Input C1 Useage 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic Value Dec 10021 26405 52810 Hex 2725 6725 CE4A RW Usage for Digital Input C1 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Start/Stop 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 98 Digital Input C2 Usage 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic Value Dec 10022 26406 52812 Hex 2726 6726 CE4C RW Usage for Digital Input C2 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 99 Digital Input C3 Usage 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic Value Dec 10022 26406 52812 Hex 2726 6726 CE4C RW Digital Input C4 Usage 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic Value Dec 10024 26408 52816 Hex 2728 6728 CE50 RW Usage for Digital Input C3 Usage for Digital Input C4 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 100 Digital Input C5 Usage 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic Value Dec 10025 26409 52818 Hex 2729 6729 CE52 RW Usage for Digital Input C5 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 101 Digital Input C6 Usage 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic Value Dec 10026 26410 52820 Hex 272A 672A CE54 RW Usage for Digital Input C6 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 102 Digital Input C7 Usage 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic Value Dec 10027 26411 52822 Hex 272B 672B CE56 RW Usage for Digital Input C7 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 103 Digital Input C8 Usage 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic Value Dec 10028 26412 52824 Hex 272C 672C CE58 RW Usage for Digital Input C8 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 104 Soft Digital 1 Usage 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic Value Dec 10036 26420 52840 Hex 2734 6734 CE68 RW Usage for “Soft” Digital Input S1 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic 105 Soft Digital 1 OR Digital Inputs Dec 10028 26412 52824 Hex 2738 6738 CE70 Bit RW Soft Digital 1 AND Digital Inputs Dec 10041 26434 52850 Hex 2739 6739 CE72 0 Digital Input A 1 Digital Input C1 2 Digital Input C2 3 Digital Input C3 4 Digital Input C4 5 Digital Input C5 6 Digital Input C6 7 Digital Input C7 8 Digital Input C8 Bit RW Soft Digital 1 OR Alarms 10050 26434 52868 Hex 2742 6742 CE84 RW Soft Digital 1 OR Events Digital Input A 1 Digital Input C1 2 Digital Input C2 3 Digital Input C3 4 Digital Input C4 5 Digital Input C5 6 Digital Input C6 7 Digital Input C7 8 Digital Input C8 10051 26435 52870 Hex 2743 6743 CE86 RW If Bit value = 1 Alarm n is Included in OR Selection 0 Alarm 1 1 Alarm 2 2 Alarm 3 3 Alarm 4 4 Alarm 5 5 Alarm 6 6 Alarm 7 Bit Dec If Bit value = 1 Input n is Included in AND Selection 0 Bit Dec If Bit value = 1 Input n is Included in OR Selection If Bit value = 1 Evene n is Included in OR Selection 0 Event 1 1 Event 2 2 Event 3 3 Event 4 4 Event 5 5 Profile Running 6 Profile End 106 Soft Digital 2 Usage Value Dec 10037 26421 52842 Hex 2735 6735 CE6A RW Usage for “Soft” Digital Input S2 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic 107 Soft Digital 2 OR Digital Inputs Dec 10042 26426 52852 Hex 273A 673A CE74 Bit RW Soft Digital 2 AND Digital Inputs Dec 10043 26427 52854 Hex 273B 673B CE76 0 Digital Input A 1 Digital Input C1 2 Digital Input C2 3 Digital Input C3 4 Digital Input C4 5 Digital Input C5 6 Digital Input C6 7 Digital Input C7 8 Digital Input C8 Bit RW Soft Digital 2 OR Alarms 10052 26436 52872 Hex 2744 6744 CE88 RW Soft Digital 2 OR Events Digital Input A 1 Digital Input C1 2 Digital Input C2 3 Digital Input C3 4 Digital Input C4 5 Digital Input C5 6 Digital Input C6 7 Digital Input C7 8 Digital Input C8 10053 26437 52874 Hex 2745 6745 CE8A RW Soft Digital 3 Usage Alarm 1 1 Alarm 2 2 Alarm 3 3 Alarm 4 4 Alarm 5 5 Alarm 6 6 Alarm 7 10038 26422 52844 Hex 2736 6736 CE6C RW If Bit value = 1 Event n is Included in OR Selection 0 Event 1 1 Event 2 2 Event 3 3 Event 4 4 Event 5 5 Profile Running 6 Profile End Value Dec If Bit value = 1 Alarm n is Included in OR Selection 0 Bit Dec If Bit value = 1 Input n is Included in AND Selection 0 Bit Dec If Bit value = 1 Input n is Included in OR Selection Usage for “Soft” Digital Input S3 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 108 Soft Digital 3 OR Digital Inputs Dec 10044 26428 52856 Hex 273C 673C CE78 RW 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic Bit If Bit value = 1 Input n is Included in OR Selection 0 Digital Input A 1 Digital Input C1 2 Digital Input C2 3 Digital Input C3 4 Digital Input C4 5 Digital Input C5 6 Digital Input C6 7 Digital Input C7 8 Digital Input C8 109 Soft Digital 3 AND Digital Inputs Dec 10045 26429 52858 Hex 273D 673D CE7A Bit RW Soft Digital 3 OR Alarms 0 Digital Input A 1 Digital Input C1 2 Digital Input C2 3 Digital Input C3 4 Digital Input C4 5 Digital Input C5 6 Digital Input C6 7 Digital Input C7 8 Digital Input C8 Bit Dec 10054 26438 52876 Hex 2746 6746 CE8C RW Soft Digital 3 OR Events 10055 26439 52878 Hex 2747 6747 CE8E RW Soft Digital 4 Usage Alarm 1 1 Alarm 2 2 Alarm 3 3 Alarm 4 4 Alarm 5 5 Alarm 6 6 Alarm 7 10039 26423 5826 Hex 2737 6737 CE6E RW If Bit value = 1 Event n is Included in OR Selection 0 Event 1 1 Event 2 2 Event 3 3 Event 4 4 Event 5 5 Profile Running 6 Profile End Value Dec If Bit value = 1 Alarm n is Included in OR Selection 0 Bit Dec If Bit value = 1 Input n is Included in AND Selection Usage for “Soft” Digital Input S4 0 Unused 1 Control 1 Enable Disable 2 Control 2 Enable Disable 3 Control 1 Auto/Manual 4 Control 2 Auto/Manual 5 Control 1 Setpoint Selection 6 Control 2 Setpoint Selection 7 Control 1 Pretune Enable/Disable 8 Control 2 Pretune Enable/Disable 9 Control 1 Selftune Enable/Disable 10 Control 2 Selftune Enable/Disable 11 Clear All Latched Outputs 12 Recorder Digital Start/Stop Trigger 13 Profile Run/Hold 14 Profile Abort 110 Soft Digital 4 OR Digital Inputs Dec 10046 26430 52860 Hex 273E 673E CE7C RW Soft Digital 4 AND Digital Inputs Dec 10047 26431 52862 Hex 273F 673F CE7E 15 Profile Hold Release 16 Force Output 1 on/off 17 Force Output 2 on/off 18 Force Output 2B on/off 19 Force Output 3 on/off 20 Force Output 3B on/off 21 Force Output 4 on/off 22 Force Output 5 on/off 23 Output 1 Clear Latch 24 Output 2 Clear Latch 25 Output 2B Clear Latch 26 Output 3 Clear Latch 27 Output 3B Clear Latch 28 Output 4 Clear Latch 29 Output 5 Clear Latch 30 Up Key Press Mimic 31 Down Key Press Mimic 32 Back Key Press Mimic 33 Right Key Press Mimic Bit If Bit value = 1 Input n is Included in OR Selection 0 Digital Input A 1 Digital Input C1 2 Digital Input C2 3 Digital Input C3 4 Digital Input C4 5 Digital Input C5 6 Digital Input C6 7 Digital Input C7 8 Digital Input C8 Bit RW If Bit value = 1 Input n is Included in AND Selection 0 Digital Input A 1 Digital Input C1 2 Digital Input C2 3 Digital Input C3 4 Digital Input C4 5 Digital Input C5 6 Digital Input C6 7 Digital Input C7 8 Digital Input C8 111 Soft Digital 4 OR Alarms Bit Dec 10056 26440 52880 Hex 2748 6748 CE90 RW Soft Digital 4 OR Events 0 Alarm 1 1 Alarm 2 2 Alarm 3 3 Alarm 4 4 Alarm 5 5 Alarm 6 6 Alarm 7 Bit Dec 10057 26441 52882 Hex 2749 6749 CE92 RW If Bit value = 1 Alarm n is Included in OR Selection If Bit value = 1 Event n is Included in OR Selection 0 Event 1 1 Event 2 2 Event 3 3 Event 4 4 Event 5 5 Profile Running 6 Profile End Plug-in Module Slot A Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Digital Input A Status Dec 2115 18499 36998 Hex 0843 4843 9086 RO Option Slot A Module Type Dec 2116 18500 37000 Hex 0844 4844 9088 Values & Description Value Digital Input A Status 0 Active 1 Inactive Value RO 0 None Fitted 1 RS485 Communications 3 Digital Input A 4 Auxiliary Input A 5 Ethernet Communications 255 RS485 Address Value Dec 2117 18501 37002 Hex 0845 4845 908A RW RS485 Data Rate 0 2118 18502 37004 Hex 0846 4846 908C RW Error (unrecognized module) RS485 Communications Address Modbus Master mode 1 to 255 Modbus Slave Address Value Dec Module Fitted In Slot A RS485 Communication Baud Rate 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 (Default) 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 112 RS485 Parity Value Dec 2119 18503 37006 Hex 0847 4847 908E RW Auxiliary Input A Type 0 None 1 Even 2 Odd Value Dec 2120 18504 37008 Hex 0848 4848 9090 RW Parity Used For RS485 Communications Auxiliary Analogue A Input Type 0 0 to 20mA DC 1 4 to 20mA DC 2 0 to 10V DC 3 2 to 10V DC 4 0 to 5V DC 5 1 to 5V DC Target Setpoint Address Slave Controller’s Setpoint Register Address Dec 2121 18505 37010 Hex 0849 4849 9092 Target setpoint parameter address for master mode (as required by slave controller) RW Master Transmit Format Value Dec 2123 18507 37014 Hex 084B 484B 9096 RW Master Transmit Setpoint Selection Dec 2110 18494 36988 Hex 083E 483E 907C Comms Write Enable/Disable Dec 2124 18508 37016 Hex 084C 484C 9098 2127 18511 37022 Hex 084F 484F 909E RW 2128 18512 37024 Hex 0850 4850 90A0 RO RO Auxiliary Input A Signal Over Range Dec 2129 18513 37026 Hex 0851 4851 90A2 1 Integer with 1 decimal place 2 Floating point number Loop 1 Setpoint 1 Loop 2 Setpoint Communications Status 0 Writing via serial communications disabled 1 Writing via serial communications enabled Auxiliary Input A Break Status 0 Inactive 1 Active (break detected) Value Auxiliary Input A Under Range Status 0 Inactive 1 Active (under-range detected) Value RO Source Loop of Setpoint For Broadcast 0 Value Auxiliary Input A Signal Under Range Dec Integer Value Auxiliary Input A Signal Break Dec 0 Value RW Data Format for Setpoint Broadcast Auxiliary Input A Over Range Status 0 Inactive 1 Active (over-range detected) 113 Plug-in Module Slot 1 Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Plug-in Module 1 Type Dec 2130 18514 37028 Hex 0852 4852 90A4 RO Values & Description Value Module Fitted In Slot 1 0 None Fitted 1 Single Relay 2 Single SSR Driver 3 Linear mA/V DC 8 Triac 255 Linear mA/V DC Output 1 Type Dec 2131 18515 37030 Hex 0853 4853 90A6 Value RW Digital Output 1 Status 2132 18516 37032 Hex 0854 4854 90A8 RO Digital Output 1 Latch Enable Dec 2135 18519 37038 0 to 5V DC 1 0 to 10V DC 2 2 to 10V DC 3 0 to 20mA DC 4 4 to 20mA DC 5 Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU Hex 0857 4857 90AE Digital Output 1 Clear Latch Dec 2136 18520 37040 Hex 0858 4858 90B0 RW Digital Output 1 Latch State Dec 2137 18521 37042 Hex 0859 4859 90B2 RO Digital Output 1 Level Status Dec 2137 18521 37042 Hex 0856 4856 90AC Inactive 1 Active 0 Disable 1 Enable Value Latch Clear 0 Do Nothing 1 Clear Latch Value Latch State 0 Unlatched 1 Latched -2.0% to 102.0% of output nominal range (control output will over/under drive by 2%). RO Value 2144 18528 37056 Hex 0860 4860 90C0 Enable / Disable Latching of Output Linear Output % Value Linear Output 1 Function Dec Output 1 Status (Relay, SSR Driver or Triac only) 0 Value RW Linear Output 1 Type 0 Value Dec Error (unrecognized module) RW Linear Output 1 Function 0 Disabled 1 Loop 1 Primary Output Power 2 Loop 1 Secondary Output Power 3 Retransmit Loop 1 Actual Setpoint Value 4 Retransmit Input 1 Process Variable Value 5 Loop 2 Primary Output Power 6 Loop 2 Secondary Output Power 7 Retransmit Loop 2 Actual Setpoint Value 8 Retransmit Input 2 Process Variable Value 114 Digital Output 1 Function Value Dec 10100 26484 52968 Hex 2774 6774 CEE8 RW Output 1 OR Alarm Selection Dec 10107 26491 52982 Hex 277B 677B CEF6 Output 1 OR Event Selection Dec 10108 26492 52984 Hex 277C 677C CEF8 10109 26493 52986 Hex 277D 677D CEFA Disabled 1 Loop 1 Primary Output Power 2 Loop 1 Secondary Output Power 3 Loop 1 VMD Open 4 Loop 1 VMD Close 5 Loop 2 Primary Output Power 6 Loop 2 Secondary Output Power 7 Loop 2 VMD Open 8 Loop 2 VMD Close 9 OR Alarm Event Direct 10 OR Alarm Event Reverse 11 AND Alarm Event Direct 12 AND Alarm Event Reverse RW Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in OR Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End Value RW If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in OR Selection 2 Value Output 1 AND Alarm Selection Dec 0 Value RW Digital Output 1 Function If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in AND Selection 2 Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 115 Output 1 AND Event Selection Dec 10110 26494 52988 Hex 277E 677E CEFC Value RW If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in AND Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End Output 1 Retransmit Input 1 Minimum Dec 2512 18536 37072 Hex 0868 4868 90D0 RW Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Minimum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 Output 1 Retransmit Input 1 Maximum Dec 2513 18537 37074 Hex 0869 4869 90D2 RW Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Maximum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its maximum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 Output 1 Retransmit Input 2 Minimum Dec 2400 18784 37568 Hex 0960 4960 92C0 RW Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Minimum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 Output 1 Retransmit Input 2 Maximum Dec 2410 18794 37588 Hex 096A 496A 92D4 RW Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Maximum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its maximum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 Plug-in Module Slot 2 Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Plug-in Module 2 Type Dec 2160 18544 37088 Hex 0870 4870 90E0 RO Output 2 or 2A Status Values & Description Value Module Fitted In Slot 2 0 None Fitted 1 Single Relay 2 Single SSR Driver 3 Error (invalid module for this slot) 8 Triac 9 Dual Relay 10 Dual SSR Driver 11 24VDC Transmitter PSU 255 Error (unrecognized module) Value Dec 2162 18546 37092 Hex 0872 4872 90E4 RO Output 2B Status 0 Inactive 1 Active Value Dec 2163 18547 37094 Hex 0873 4873 90E6 RO Output 2 or 2A Status Output 2B Status 0 Inactive 1 Active 116 Digital Output 2 Latch Enable Dec 2165 18549 37098 Hex 0875 4875 90EA Value RW Digital Output 2 Clear Latch Dec 2166 18550 37100 Hex 0876 4876 90EC Digital Output 2 Latch State Dec 2167 18551 37102 Hex 0877 4877 90EE 2168 18552 37104 Hex 0878 4878 90F0 RO 2169 18553 37106 Hex 0879 4879 90F2 RW 2170 18554 37108 Hex 087A 487A 90F4 Enable RW Do Nothing 1 Clear Latch Output 2 or 2A Function Unlatched 1 Latched 10101 26485 52970 Hex 2775 6775 CEEA RW Output 2B Function Disable 1 Enable 10102 26486 52972 Hex 2776 6776 CEEC RW Output 2B Latch Clear 0 Do Nothing 1 Clear Latch Output 2B Latch State 0 Unlatched 1 Latched Output 2 or 2A Function 0 Disabled 1 Loop 1 Primary Output Power 2 Loop 1 Secondary Output Power 3 Loop 1 VMD Open 4 Loop 1 VMD Close 5 Loop 2 Primary Output Power 6 Loop 2 Secondary Output Power 7 Loop 2 VMD Open 8 Loop 2 VMD Close 9 OR Alarm Event Direct 10 OR Alarm Event Reverse 11 AND Alarm Event Direct 12 AND Alarm Event Reverse Value Dec Output 2B Enable / Disable Latching 0 Value Dec Output 2 or 2A Latch State 0 Value RO Output 2 or 2A Latch Clear 0 Value Digital Output 2B Latch State Dec 1 Value Digital Output 2B Clear Latch Dec Disable Value Digital Output 2B Latch Enable Dec 0 Value RW Output 2 or 2A Enable / Disable Latching Output 2B Function 0 Disabled 1 Loop 1 Primary Output Power 2 Loop 1 Secondary Output Power 3 Loop 1 VMD Open 4 Loop 1 VMD Close 5 Loop 2 Primary Output Power 6 Loop 2 Secondary Output Power 7 Loop 2 VMD Open 8 Loop 2 VMD Close 9 OR Alarm Event Direct 117 Output 2 OR Alarm Selection Dec 10111 26495 52990 Hex 277F 677F CEFE 10112 26496 52992 Hex 2780 6780 CE00 RW 10113 26497 52994 Hex 2781 6781 CF02 RW 10114 26498 52996 Hex 2782 6782 CF04 RW 10115 26499 52999 Hex 2783 6783 CF06 12 AND Alarm Event Reverse RW Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in OR Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in AND Selection 2 Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in AND Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End Value RW If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in OR Selection 2 Value Output 2B OR Alarm Selection Dec AND Alarm Event Direct Value Output 2 AND Event Selection Dec 11 Value Output 2 AND Alarm Selection Dec OR Alarm Event Reverse Value Output 2 OR Event Selection Dec 10 If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in OR Selection 2 Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 118 Output 2B OR Event Selection Dec 10116 26500 53000 Hex 2784 6784 CF08 Value RW Output 2B AND Alarm Selection Dec 10117 26501 53002 Hex 2785 6785 CF0A 10118 26502 53004 Hex 2786 6786 CF0C 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End Value RW Output 2B AND Event Selection Dec If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in OR Selection If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in AND Selection 2 Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 Value RW If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in AND Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End Plug-in Module Slot 3 Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Plug-in Module 3 Type Dec 2192 18576 37152 Hex 0890 4890 9120 RO Output 3 or 3A Status Values & Description Value Module Fitted In Slot 3 0 None Fitted 1 Single Relay 2 Single SSR Driver 3 Error (invalid module for this slot) 8 Triac 9 Dual Relay 10 Dual SSR Driver 11 24VDC Transmitter PSU 255 Error (unrecognized module) Value Dec 2194 18578 37156 Hex 0892 4892 9124 RO Output 3 or 3A Status 0 Inactive 1 Active 119 Output 3B Status Value Dec 2195 18579 37158 Hex 0893 4893 9126 RO Digital Output 3 Latch Enable Dec 2197 18581 37162 Hex 0895 4895 912A Digital Output 3 Clear Latch Dec 2198 18582 37164 Hex 0896 4896 912C 2199 18583 37166 Hex 0897 4897 912E RW 2200 18584 37168 Hex 0898 4898 9130 RO 2201 18585 37170 Hex 0899 4899 9132 RW RW 2202 18586 37172 Hex 089A 489A 9134 Disable 1 Enable Output 3 or 3A Function Do Nothing 1 Clear Latch 10103 26487 52974 Hex 2777 6777 CEEE RW Output 3B Function Unlatched 1 Latched 10104 26488 52976 Hex 2778 6778 CEF0 RW Output 3B Enable / Disable Latching 0 Disable 1 Enable Output 3B Latch Clear 0 Do Nothing 1 Clear Latch Output 3B Latch State 0 Unlatched 1 Latched Output 3 or 3A Function 0 Disabled 1 Loop 1 Primary Output Power 2 Loop 1 Secondary Output Power 3 Loop 1 VMD Open 4 Loop 1 VMD Close 5 Loop 2 Primary Output Power 6 Loop 2 Secondary Output Power 7 Loop 2 VMD Open 8 Loop 2 VMD Close 9 OR Alarm Event Direct 10 OR Alarm Event Reverse 11 AND Alarm Event Direct 12 AND Alarm Event Reverse Value Dec Output 3 or 3A Latch State 0 Value Dec Output 3 or 3A Latch Clear 0 Value RO Output 3 or 3A Enable / Disable Latching 0 Value Digital Output 3B Latch State Dec Active Value Digital Output 3B Clear Latch Dec 1 Value Digital Output 3B Latch Enable Dec Inactive Value Digital Output 3 Latch State Dec 0 Value RW Output 3B Status Output 3 B Function 0 Disabled 1 Loop 1 Primary Output Power 2 Loop 1 Secondary Output Power 3 Loop 1 VMD Open 4 Loop 1 VMD Close 5 Loop 2 Primary Output Power 6 Loop 2 Secondary Output Power 120 Output 3 OR Alarm Selection Dec 10119 26503 53006 Hex 2787 6787 CF0E 10120 26504 53008 Hex 2788 6788 CF10 RW 10121 26505 53010 Hex 2789 6789 CF12 RW 10122 26506 53012 Hex 278A 678A CF14 RW 10123 26507 53014 Hex 278B 678B CF16 9 OR Alarm Event Direct 10 OR Alarm Event Reverse 11 AND Alarm Event Direct 12 AND Alarm Event Reverse If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in OR Selection 2 Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in OR Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in AND Selection 2 Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 Value RW Output 3B OR Alarm Selection Dec Loop 2 VMD Close Value Output 3 AND Event Selection Dec 8 Value Output 3 AND Alarm Selection Dec Loop 2 VMD Open Value Output 3 OR Event Selection Dec 7 If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in AND Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End Value RW If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in OR Selection 2 Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 121 Output 3B OR Event Selection Dec 10124 26508 53016 Hex 278V 678C CF18 10125 26509 53018 Hex 278D 678D CF1A RW 10126 26510 53020 Hex 278E 678E CF1C 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in OR Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End Value RW Output 3B AND Event Selection Dec Alarm 5 Value Output 3B AND Alarm Selection Dec 6 If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in AND Selection 2 Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 Value RW If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in AND Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End Output 4 Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Linear Output 4 Fitted Dec 3000 19384 38768 Hex 0BB8 4BB8 9770 RO Output 4 Useage Values & Description Value Linear Output 4 Fitted 0 Not Fitted 1 Fitted Value Dec 10105 26489 52978 Hex 2779 6779 CEF2 RW Output 4 Function 0 Disabled 1 Loop 1 Primary Output Power 2 Loop 1 Secondary Output Power 3 Loop 1 VMD Open 4 Loop 1 VMD Close 5 Loop 2 Primary Output Power 6 Loop 2 Secondary Output Power 122 Output 4 Status 7 Loop 2 VMD Open 8 Loop 2 VMD Close 9 OR Alarm Event Direct 10 OR Alarm Event Reverse 11 AND Alarm Event Direct 12 AND Alarm Event Reverse Value Dec 3001 19385 38770 Hex 0BB9 4BB9 9772 RO Digital Output 4 Latch Enable Dec 3002 19386 38772 Hex OBBA 4BBA 9774 3004 19388 38776 Hex 0BBC 4BBC 9778 RW 3003 19387 38774 Hex 0BBB 4BBB 9776 RW 10127 26511 53022 Hex 278F 678F CF1E RO 10128 26512 53024 Hex 2790 6790 CF20 RW 10129 26513 53026 Hex 2791 6791 CF22 Output 4 Latch Enable / Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable Output 4 Latch Clear 0 Do Nothing 1 Clear Latch Output 4 Latch State 0 Unlatched 1 Latched If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in OR Selection 2 Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 Value RW Output 4 AND Alarm Selection Dec Active Value Output 4 OR Event Selection Dec 1 Value Output 4 OR Alarm Selection Dec Inactive Value Digital Output 4 Latch State Dec 0 Value Digital Output 4 Clear Latch Dec Output 4 Status If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in OR Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End Value RW If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in AND Selection 2 Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 123 Output 4 AND Event Selection Dec 10130 26514 53028 Hex 2792 6792 CF24 Value RW If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in AND Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End Output 5 Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Linear Output 5 Fitted Dec 3005 19389 38778 Hex 0BBD 4BBD 977A RO Output 5 Useage Values & Description Value Linear Output 5 Fitted 0 Not Fitted 1 Fitted Value Dec 10106 26490 52980 Hex 277A 677A CEF4 RW Output 5 Status 0 Disabled 1 Loop 1 Primary Output Power 2 Loop 1 Secondary Output Power 3 Loop 1 VMD Open 4 Loop 1 VMD Close 5 Loop 2 Primary Output Power 6 Loop 2 Secondary Output Power 7 Loop 2 VMD Open 8 Loop 2 VMD Close 9 OR Alarm Event Direct 10 OR Alarm Event Reverse 11 AND Alarm Event Direct 12 AND Alarm Event Reverse Value Dec 3006 19390 38780 Hex 0BBE 4BBE 977C RO Digital Output 5 Latch Enable Dec 3007 19391 38782 Hex OBBF 4BBF 977E Digital Output 5 Clear Latch Dec 3009 19393 38786 Hex 0BC1 4BC1 9782 Digital Output 5 Latch State Dec 3008 19392 38784 Hex 0BC0 4BC0 9780 Inactive 1 Active Disable 1 Enable Output 5 Latch Clear 0 Do Nothing 1 Clear Latch Value RO Output 5 Latch Enable / Disable 0 Value RW Output 5 Status 0 Value RW Output 5 Function Output 45 Latch State 0 Unlatched 1 Latched 124 Output 5 OR Alarm Selection Dec 10131 26515 53030 Hex 2793 6793 CF26 Value RW Output 5 OR Event Selection Dec 10132 26516 53032 Hex 2794 6794 CF28 10133 26513 53034 Hex 2795 6795 CF2A RW 10133 26518 53036 Hex 2796 6796 CF2C Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in OR Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End Value RW Output 5 AND Event Selection Dec 2 Value Output 5 AND Alarm Selection Dec If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in OR Selection If Bit = 1, Alarm n is Included in AND Selection 2 Alarm 1 3 Alarm 2 4 Alarm 3 5 Alarm 4 6 Alarm 5 7 Alarm 6 8 Alarm 7 Value RW If Bit = 1, Event n is Included in AND Selection 2 Event 1 3 Event 2 4 Event 3 5 Event 4 6 Event 5 7 Profile Running 8 Profile End 125 Linear Output 6 Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Linear Output 6 Fitted Dec 3016 19400 38800 Hex 0BC8 4BC8 9790 RO Linear Output 6 Useage Values & Description Value Linear Output 6 Fitted 0 Not Fitted 1 Fitted Value Dec 2174 18558 37116 Hex 087E 487E 90FC RW Linear mA/V DC Output 6 Type Dec 3011 19395 38790 Hex 0BC3 4BC3 9786 0 Disabled 1 Loop 1 Primary Output Power 2 Loop 1 Secondary Output Power 3 Retransmit Loop 1 Actual Setpoint Value 4 Retransmit Input 1 Process Variable Value 5 Loop 2 Primary Output Power 6 Loop 2 Secondary Output Power 7 Retransmit Loop 2 Actual Setpoint Value 8 Retransmit Input 2 Process Variable Value Value RW Output 6 Function Linear Output 6 Type 0 0 to 5V DC 1 0 to 10V DC 2 2 to 10V DC 3 0 to 20mA DC 4 4 to 20mA DC 5 Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU Linear Output 6 Level Status Dec 3014 19398 38796 Hex OBC6 4BC6 978C Linear Output % Value RO -2.0% to 102.0% of output nominal range (control output will over/under drive by 2%). Output 6 Retransmit Input 1 Minimum Dec 2182 18566 3712 Hex 0886 4886 910C RW Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Minimum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 Output 6 Retransmit Input 1 Maximum Dec 2183 18567 37134 Hex 0887 4887 910E RW Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Maximum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its maximum level (e.g. 2mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 Output 6 Retransmit Input 2 Minimum Dec 2430 18814 37628 Hex 097E 497E 92FC RW Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Minimum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 Output 6 Retransmit Input 2 Maximum Dec 2431 18815 37630 Hex 097F 497F 92FE RW Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Maximum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its maximum level (e.g. 2mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 126 Linear Output 7 Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Linear Output 7 Fitted Dec 3026 19410 38820 Hex 0BD2 4BD2 97A4 RO Linear Output 7 Useage Values & Description Value Linear Output 7 Fitted 0 Not Fitted 1 Fitted Value Dec 2203 18587 37174 Hex 089B 489B 9136 RW Linear mA/V DC Output 7 Type Dec 3021 19405 38810 Hex 0BCD 4BCD 979A Output 7 Function 0 Disabled 1 Loop 1 Primary Output Power 2 Loop 1 Secondary Output Power 3 Retransmit Loop 1 Actual Setpoint Value 4 Retransmit Input 1 Process Variable Value 5 Loop 2 Primary Output Power 6 Loop 2 Secondary Output Power 7 Retransmit Loop 2 Actual Setpoint Value 8 Retransmit Input 2 Process Variable Value Value RW Linear Output 7 Type 0 0 to 5V DC 1 0 to 10V DC 2 2 to 10V DC 3 0 to 20mA DC 4 4 to 20mA DC 5 Variable 0 to 10VDC Transmitter PSU Linear Output 7 Level Status Dec 3024 19408 38816 Hex 0BD0 4BD0 97A0 Linear Output % Value RO -2.0% to 102.0% of output nominal range (control output will over/under drive by 2%). Output 7 Retransmit Input 1 Minimum Dec 2211 18595 37190 Hex 08A3 48A3 9146 RW Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Minimum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 Output 7 Retransmit Input 1 Maximum Dec 2212 18596 37192 Hex 08A4 48A4 9148 RW Value For Loop 1 Retransmit Maximum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its maximum level (e.g. 2mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 Output 7 Retransmit Input 2 Minimum Dec 2460 18844 37688 Hex 099C 499C 9338 RW Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Minimum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its minimum level (e.g. 4mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 Output 7 Retransmit Input 2 Maximum Dec 2461 18845 37690 Hex 099D 499D 933A RW Value For Loop 2 Retransmit Maximum Displayed value at which the retransmission output reaches its maximum level (e.g. 2mA if type is 4-20mA). Adjustable from -9999 to 9999.9 127 Loop 1 Setpoint Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Values & Description Loop 1 Setpoint Minimum Minimum Allowed Setpoint For Loop 1 Dec 3944 20328 40656 Hex 0F68 4F68 9ED0 RW Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits Loop 1 Setpoint Maximum Dec 3945 20329 40658 Hex 0F69 4F69 9ED2 Maximum Allowed Setpoint For Loop 1 RW Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits Loop 1 Main Local Setpoint Value Dec 3960 20344 40688 Hex 0F78 4F78 9EF0 Main Setpoint Value For Loop 1 RW Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum Loop 1 Main Local Setpoint Offset Dec 3961 20345 40690 Hex 0F79 4F79 9EF2 Offset of Main Setpoint of Loop 1 RW Changes effective setpoint (for multi-zone slaves. +ve values added -ve values subtracted). Setpoint always limited by Setpoint Max and Min. Loop 1 Alternate Local Setpoint Value Dec 3962 20346 40692 Hex 0F7A 4F7A 9EF4 Alternate Setpoint Value For Loop 1 RW Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum. Loop 1 Alternate Local Setpoint Offset Dec 3963 20347 40692 Hex 0F7B 4F7B 9EF6 RW Loop 1 Main Setpoint Source Dec 4050 20434 40868 Hex 0FD2 4FD2 9FA4 4051 20435 40870 Hex 0FD3 4FD3 9FA6 Changes effective setpoint (for multi-zone slaves. +ve values added -ve values subtracted). Setpoint always limited by Setpoint Max and Min. Value RW Loop 1 Alternate Setpoint Source Dec Offset of Alternate setpoint of Loop 1 0 Local Setpoint 1 1 Not Used Value RW Loop 1 Setpoint Select 4122 20506 41012 Hex 101A 501A A034 RW Alternate Setpoint Source For Loop 1 0 Not Used 1 Local Setpoint 2 2 Input 2 Remote Setpoint 3 Input A Remote Setpoint Value Dec Main Setpoint Source For Loop 1 Setpoint Select For Loop 1 0 Main Setpoint 1 Alternate Setpoint Loop 1 Setpoint Ramp Rate Dec 4123 20507 41014 Hex 101B 501B A036 Setpoint Ramp Rate For Loop 1 RW 0 to 10000 display units per hour (1 to 9999 is ramp rate per hour, either 0 or >10000 = Off) Loop 1 Target Setpoint Actual Setpoint Value Of Selected Loop 1 Setpoint Dec 4125 20509 41018 Hex 101D 501D A03A RO Operator Access Setpoint Ramp Rate Dec 4126 20510 41020 Hex 101E 501E A03C RW The Loop 1 target setpoint value when ramping. Value Operator Access To Loop 1 Setpoint Ramp Rate 0 No 1 Yes 128 Operator Access to Setpoint Edit Dec 4128 20512 41024 Hex 1020 5020 A040 Value RW Loop 1 Selected Setpoint Operator Access to Edit Loop 1 Setpoint 0 No 1 Yes Value Dec 4127 20511 41022 Hex 101F 501F A03E RO Loop 1 Actual Setpoint Selected Setpoint For Loop 1 0 Main Setpoint 1 Alternate Setpoint Effective Setpoint Value of Selected Loop 1 Setpoint Dec 8256 24640 49280 Hex 2040 6040 C080 RO The effective setpoint for loop 1 (current instantaneous value of the active setpoint source) Loop 2 Setpoint Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Values & Description Loop 2 Setpoint Minimum Minimum Allowed Setpoint For Loop 2 Dec 3950 20334 40668 Hex 0F6E 4F6E 9EDC RW Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits Loop 2 Setpoint Maximum Dec 3951 20335 40670 Hex 0F6F 4F6F 9EDE Maximum Allowed Setpoint For Loop 2 RW Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits Loop 2 Main Local Setpoint Value Dec 3964 20348 40696 Hex 0F7C 4F7C 9EF8 Main Setpoint Value For Loop 2 RW Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum Loop 2 Main Local Setpoint Offset Dec 3965 20349 40699 Hex 0F7D 4F7D 9EFA Offset of Main Setpoint of Loop 2 RW Changes effective setpoint (for multi-zone slaves. +ve values added -ve values subtracted). Setpoint always limited by Setpoint Max and Min. Loop 2 Alternate Local Setpoint Value Dec 3966 20350 40700 Hex 0F7E 4F7E 9EFC Alternate Setpoint Value For Loop 2 RW Valid between Setpoint Maximum and Minimum. Loop 2 Alternate Local Setpoint Offset Dec 3967 20351 40702 Hex 0F7F 4F7F 9EFE RW Loop 2 Main Setpoint Source Dec 4052 20436 40872 Hex 0FD4 4FD4 9FA8 4053 20437 40874 Hex 0FD5 4FD5 9FAA Changes effective setpoint (for multi-zone slaves. +ve values added -ve values subtracted). Setpoint always limited by Setpoint Max and Min. Value RW Loop 2 Alternate Setpoint Source Dec Offset of Alternate setpoint of Loop 2 0 Local Setpoint 1 1 Not Used Value RW Loop 2 Setpoint Select 4200 20584 41168 Hex 1068 5068 A0D0 RW Alternate Setpoint Source For Loop 2 0 Not Used 1 Local Setpoint 2 3 Input A Remote Setpoint Value Dec Main Setpoint Source For Loop 2 Setpoint Select For Loop 2 0 Local Setpoint 1 1 Alternate Setpoint 129 Loop 2 Setpoint Ramp Rate Dec 4201 20585 41170 Hex 1069 5069 A0D2 Setpoint Ramp Rate For Loop 2 RW 0 to 10000 display units per hour (1 to 9999 is ramp rate per hour, either 0 or >10000 = Off) Loop 2 Target Setpoint Actual Setpoint Value of Selected Loop 2 Setpoint Dec 4203 20587 41174 Hex 106B 506B A0D6 RO Operator Access Setpoint Ramp Rate Dec 4204 20588 41176 Hex 106C 506C A0D8 RW Operator Access to Setpoint Edit Dec 4206 20590 41180 Hex 106E 506E A0DC The Loop 1 target setpoint value when ramping. Value Operator Access to Loop 2 Setpoint Ramp Rate 0 No 1 Yes Value RW Loop 2 Selected Setpoint Operator Access to Edit Loop 2 Setpoint 0 No 1 Yes Value Dec 4205 20589 41178 Hex 101F 501F A03E RO Loop 2 Actual Setpoint Selected Setpoint For Loop 2 0 Main Setpoint 1 Alternate Setpoint Effective Setpoint Value of Selected Loop 2 Setpoint Dec 8269 24653 49306 Hex 204D 604D C09A RO The effective setpoint for loop 2 (current instantaneous value of the active setpoint source) Aux A Input Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Values & Description Auxiliary Input A Scale Minimum Dec 2111 18495 36990 Hex 083F 483F 907E Minimum Input Scaling Value RW Scale value (between ±0.001 & ±10000) when input A is at minimum value. When used for RSP, setpoint is still constrained by setpoint limits. Auxiliary Input A Scale Maximum Dec 2112 18496 36992 Hex 0840 4840 9080 Maximum Input Scaling Value RW Scale value (between ±0.001 & ±10000) when input A is at maximum value. When used for RSP, setpoint is still constrained by setpoint limits Auxiliary Input A Offset Offset Applied to Scaled Aux A Value Dec 2113 18497 36994 Hex 0841 4841 9082 RW Changes effective setpoint (for multi-zone slaves. +ve values added -ve values subtracted). From +/-0.001 to 20000 units or OFF Auxiliary Input A Value Auxiliary Input A Measured Value Dec 2114 18498 36996 Hex 0842 4842 9084 RO The current input A value (scaled). 130 Loop 1 Control Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Loop 1 Manual Control Select Dec 4038 20692 41384 Hex 10D4 50D4 A1A8 RW Loop 1 Control Enable Select Dec 4309 20693 41386 Hex 10D5 50D5 A1AA 4394 20778 41556 Hex 112A 512A A254 RW RW Loop 1 Control Enable Access Dec 4395 20779 41558 Hex 112B 512B A256 & Description Value Auto/Manual Mode Selection 0 Automatic Mode 1 Manual Mode Value Loop 1 Auto/Manual Operator Access Dec Values Value Loop Control Enable/Disable 0 Disable 1 Enable Value Operator Access to Auto/Manual Control 0 Off 1 On Value RW Operator Access to Control Enable/Disable 0 Off 1 On Loop 1 Primary Cycle Time Dec 4301 20685 41370 Hex 10CD 50CD A19A Cycle Time For Primary Control Outputs RW 0.5 to 512.0 Seconds Loop 1 Secondary Cycle Time Dec 4302 20686 41372 Hex 10CE 50CE A19C Cycle Time For Secondary Control Outputs RW Loop 1 Control Mode 0.5 to 512.0 Seconds Value Dec 4390 20774 41548 Hex 1126 5126 A24C RW Loop 1 Control Selection Control Mode For Loop 1 0 Standard 1 Cascade Mode 2 Ratio Mode Value Dec 4307 20691 41382 Hex 10D3 50D3 A1A6 RW Loop 1 Control Type Control Actuator Type Selection 0 Standard (Time Proportioned or Continuous Linear PID) 1 VMD (3-Point Stepping For Valve Motor Drive) Value Dec 4310 20694 41388 Hex 10D6 50D6 A1AC RW Loop 1 Control Action Primary Only or Primary & Secondary 0 Single (Primary Only Control) 1 Dual Control (Primary & Secondary Control) Value Dec 4311 20695 41390 Hex 10D7 50D7 A1AE RW PID Set 1 - Primary Prop Band Dec 4312 20696 41392 Hex 10D8 50D8 A1B0 4313 20697 41394 Hex 10D9 50D9 A1B2 0 Direct Acting 1 Reverse Acting PID Set 1 Primary Proportional Band For Loop RW PID Set 1 - Secondary Prop Band Dec Direction of Control Action Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 1. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 1 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 1 RW Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 1. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 1 - Integral Time PID Set 1 Integral Time For Loop 1 Dec 4314 20698 41396 Hex 10DA 50DA A1B4 Gain Set 1 integral time constant for loop 1 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF RW 131 PID Set 1 - Deriviative Time Dec 4315 20699 41398 Hex 10DB 50DB A1B6 PID Set 1 Derivative Time For Loop 1 Gain Set 1 deriviative time constant for loop 1 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF RW Loop 1 Manual Reset PID Set 1 Manual Reset (Bias) For Loop 1 Dec 4316 20700 41400 Hex 10DC 50DC A1B8 RW Working point from 0 to 100 for single control or -100 to 100 for dual control (primary & secondary) PID Set 1 - Overlap/Deadband Dec 4317 20701 41402 Hex 10D5 50DD A1BA PID Set 1 - Overlap or Deadband For Loop 1 RW PID Set 1 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the combined band width. PID Set 1 - On/Off Differential Dec 4320 20704 41408 Hex 10E0 50E0 A1C0 PID Set 1 - On/Off Control Differential For Loop 1 RW The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 1. 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint. Loop 1 Primary Power Upper Limit Dec 4321 20705 41410 Hex 10E1 50E1 A1C2 Loop 1 Primary Power Upper Limit 10 to 100% but must be at least 10% above the primary power lower limit. RW Loop 1 Primary Power Lower Limit Dec 4322 20706 41412 Hex 10E2 50E2 A1C4 Loop 1 Primary Power Lower Limit 0 to 90% but must be at least 10% below the primary power upper limit. RW Loop 1 Secondary Power Upper Limit Dec 4323 20707 41414 Hex 10E3 50E3 A1C6 Loop 1 Secondary Power Upper Limit 10 to 100% but must be at least 10% above the secondary power lower limit. RW Loop 1 Secondary Power Lower Limit Dec 4324 20708 41416 Hex 10E4 50E4 A1C8 RW Loop 1 Pre-Tune Method Loop 1 Secondary Power Lower Limit 0 to 90% but must be at least 10% below the secondary power upper limit. Value Dec 4396 20780 41560 Hex 112C 512C A258 RW Pre-Tune Type 0 Standard 1 Pretune at Value Loop 1 Pretune at Value Value To Pre-Tune Loop 1 Dec 4399 20783 41566 Hex 112F 512F A25E Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits (applies if Pre-Tune Type = Pre-tune at Value) RW Loop 1 Pre-Tuned Set Value Dec 4397 29781 41562 Hex 112D 512D A25A RW Loop 1 Pre-Tuned Cascade Loop Dec 4398 29782 41564 Hex 112E 512E A25C 4325 20709 41418 Hex 10E5 50E5 A1CA PID Set 1 1 PID Set 2 2 PID Set 3 3 PID Set 4 4 PID Set 5 Value RW Loop 1 Pre-Tune Engage/Disengage Dec PID Set Pre-Tune Will Optimize 0 RW Cascade Loop To Be Pre-Tuned 0 Slave (opens cascade - close when finished) 1 Master (tunes master/slave combination) Value Pre-Tune Engage/Disengage For Loop 1 0 Pre-Tune OFF 1 Run Pre-Tune ON 132 Loop 1 Self-Tune Engage/Disengage Dec 4326 20710 41420 Hex 10E6 50E6 A1CC RW Loop 1 Loop Alarm Type Value Self-Tune Engage/Disengage For Loop 1 0 Self-Tune OFF 1 Self-Tune ON Value Dec 4327 20711 41422 Hex 10E7 50E7 A1CE RW Loop Alarm Type For Loop 1 1 User Defined Time 2 Automatic (2x Integral Time) Loop Alarm Time Loop Alarm Activation Time Dec 4328 20712 41424 Hex 10E8 50E8 A1D0 RW 1 to 5999 Seconds after output loop 1 power reaches saturation Loop 1 Primary Power Loop 1 Primary Power Level Dec 4329 20713 41426 Hex 10E9 50E9 A1D2 RO The current loop 1 primary power level (0 to 100%) Loop 1 Secondary Power Loop 1 Secondary Power Level Dec 4330 20714 41428 Hex 10EA 50EA A1D4 RO Loop 1 Combined Power The current loop 1 secondary power level (0 to 100%) Loop 1 Combined Primary & Secondary Power Level Dec 4331 20715 41430 Hex 10EB 50EB A1D6 RO Loop 1 Pre-Tune Status The current loop 1 combined PID power level (-100 to 100%) Value Dec 4332 20716 41432 Hex 10EC 50EC A1D8 RO Loop 1 Self-Tune Status Pre-Tune Status For Loop 1 0 Inactive 1 Active Value Dec 4333 20717 41434 Hex 10ED 50ED A1DA RO Loop 1 Loop Alarm Status Dec 4334 20718 41436 Hex 10EE 50EE A1DC 0 Inactive 1 Active Value RO 4335 20719 41438 Hex 10EF 50EF A1DE Loop Alarm Status For Loop 1 0 Inactive 1 Active Loop 1 Input Failure Pre-set Power Dec Self-Tune Status For Loop 1 Loop 1 Input Sensor Break Pre-Set Power RW The pre-defined power output applied if input signal is lost 0 to 100% (-100% to 100% for dual control). Loop 1 Auto Pre-Tune Auto Pre-Tune at Every Power-up For Loop 1 Dec 4336 20720 41440 Hex 10F0 50F0 A1E0 RW Pre-Tune Secondary Status Dec 4341 20725 41450 Hex 10F5 50F5 A1EA 0 Inactive 1 Active Value RO Pre-Tune Secondary Status 0 No Additional Information 1 PV within 5% (Pre-Tune cannot run) 2 Manual Control Enabled (Pre-Tune cannot run) 3 Control has On/Off element (Pre-Tune cannot run) 4 Input not valid (Pre-Tune cannot run) 5 Control Disabled (Pre-Tune cannot run) 6 Profile Running (Pre-Tune cannot run) 7 Setpoint Ramping (Pre-Tune cannot run) 133 Self-Tune Secondary Status Dec 4342 20726 41452 Hex 10F6 50F6 A1EC Value RO Self-Tune Secondary Status 0 No Additional Information 2 Manual Control Enabled (Self-Tune cannot run) 3 Control has On/Off element (Self-Tune cannot run) 4 Input not valid (Self-Tune cannot run) 5 Control Disabled (Self-Tune cannot run) Loop 1 Anti Wind-Up Limit Dec 4391 20775 41550 Hex 1127 5127 A24E Loop 1 Anti Wind-up Limit Power level where integral action is suspended. Adjustable from 10.0 to 100.0% of PID power. RW Loop 1 Motor Travel Time Loop 1 Motor Travel Time Dec 4343 20727 41454 Hex 10F7 50F7 A1EE RW The motor travel time (from fully open to fully closed) for 3-point stepping VMD control. Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds. Loop 1 Minimum Motor on Time Dec 4344 20728 41456 Hex 10F8 50F8 A1F0 Loop 1 Minimum Motor on Time RW Loop 1 VMD Break Action Dec 4401 20785 41570 Hex 1131 5131 A262 Minimum drive effort to begin moving valve for 3-point stepping VMD control. In seconds, from 0.02 to 1/10 of Motor Travel Time Value RW Loop 1 Sensor Break Action For VMD Control 0 Close Valve Output On 1 Open Valve Output On Loop 1 Valve Close Limit Loop 1 Minimum Valve Postition Dec 4376 20760 41520 Hex 1118 5118 A230 Minimum position to drive valve in VMD Mode from the valve close limit+1% to 100.0% RW Loop 1 Valve Open Limit Loop 1 Maximum Valve Postition Dec 4377 20761 41522 Hex 1119 5119 A232 Maximum position to drive valve in VMD Mode. From 0.0% to the valve open limit-1% RW Loop 1 PID Set Select Value Dec 4367 20751 41502 Hex 110F 510F A21E RW PID Set 2 - Primary Prop Band Dec 4347 20731 41462 Hex 10FB 50FB A1F6 4348 20732 41464 Hex 10FC 50FC A1F8 0 PID Set 1 1 Gain Schedule Selected by SP 2 Gain Schedule Selected by PV 3 PID Set 2 4 PID Set 3 5 PID Set 4 6 PID Set 5 PID Set 2 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 1 RW PID Set 2 - Secondary Prop Band Dec Loop 1 PID Set Selection Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 2. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 2 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 1 RW Primary Secondary Band for Gain Set 2. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 2 - Integral Time PID Set 2 Integral Time For Loop 1 Dec 4349 20733 41466 Hex 10FD 50FD A1FA RW Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 2. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control 134 PID Set 2 - Derivative Time Dec 4350 20734 41468 Hex 10FE 50FE A1FC PID Set 2 Derivative Time For Loop 1 RW PID Set 2 - Overlap/Deadband Dec 4351 20735 41470 Hex 10FF 50FF A1FE Gain Set 2 derivative time constant for loop 1 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF PID Set 2 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 1 RW PID Set 2 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the combined band width. PID Set 2 - On/Off Differential Dec 4378 20762 41524 Hex 111A 511A A234 PID Set 2 - On/Off Differential For Loop 1 RW PID Set 3 - Primary Prop Band Dec 4352 20736 41472 Hex 1100 5100 A200 PID Set 3 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 1 RW PID Set 3 - Secondary Prop Band Dec 4353 20737 41474 Hex 1101 5101 A202 The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 2. 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint. Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 3. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 3 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 1 RW Primary Secondary Band for Gain Set 3. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 3 - Integral Time PID Set 3 Integral Time For Loop 1 Dec 4354 20738 41476 Hex 1102 5102 A204 Gain Set 3 integral time constant for loop 1 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF RW PID Set 3 - Derivative Time Dec 4355 20739 41478 Hex 1103 5103 A206 PID Set 3 Derivative Time For Loop 1 RW PID Set 3 - Overlap/Deadband Dec 4356 20740 41480 Hex 1104 5104 A208 Gain Set 3 derivative time constant for loop 1 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF PID Set 3 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 1 RW PID Set 3 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the combined band width. PID Set 3 - On/Off Differential Dec 4379 20763 41526 Hex 111B 511B A236 PID Set 3 - On/Off Differential For Loop 1 RW PID Set 4 - Primary Prop Band Dec 4357 20741 41482 Hex 1105 5105 A20A PID Set 4 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 1 RW PID Set 4 - Secondary Prop Band Dec 4358 20742 41484 Hex 1106 5106 A20C The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 3. 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint. Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 4. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 4 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 1 RW Primary Secondary Band for Gain Set 4. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 4 - Integral Time PID Set 4 Integral Time For Loop 1 Dec 4359 20743 41486 Hex 1107 5107 A20E Gain Set 4 integral time constant for loop 1 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF RW PID Set 4 - Derivative Time Dec 4360 20744 41488 Hex 1108 5108 A210 PID Set 4 Derivative Time For Loop 1 RW Gain Set 4 derivative time constant for loop 1 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF 135 PID Set 4 - Overlap/Deadband Dec 4361 20745 41490 Hex 1109 5109 A212 PID Set 4 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 1 RW PID Set 4 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the combined band width. RW The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 4. 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint. PID Set 4 - On/Off Differential Dec 4380 20764 41528 Hex 111C 511C A238 PID Set 4 - On/Off Differential For Loop 1 PID Set 5 - Primary Prop Band Dec 4362 20746 41492 Hex 110A 510A A214 PID Set 5 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 1 RW Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 5. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 5 - Secondary Prop Band Dec 4363 20747 41494 Hex 110B 510B A216 PID Set 5 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 1 RW Primary Secondary Band for Gain Set 5. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 5 Integral Time PID Set 5 Integral Time For Loop 1 Dec 4364 20748 41496 Hex 110C 510C A218 Gain Set 5 integral time constant for loop 1 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF RW PID Set 5 - Derivative Time Dec 4365 20749 41498 Hex 110D 510D A21A PID Set 5 Derivative Time For Loop 1 Gain Set 5 derivative time constant for loop 1 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF RW PID Set 5 - Overlap/Deadband Dec 4366 20750 41500 Hex 110E 510E A21C PID Set 5 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 1 RW PID Set 5 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the combined band width. PID Set 5 - On/Off Differential Dec 4381 20765 41530 Hex 111D 511D A23A PID Set 5 - On/Off Differential For Loop 1 The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 5. 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint. RW Loop 1 Gain Set 2 Breakpoint Dec 4369 20753 41506 Hex 1111 5111 A222 Gain Scheduling PID Set 1 to 2 Switch Point RW Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 1 To 2. Value between Scaled Input 1 Lower & Upper Limits Loop 1 Gain Set 3 Breakpoint Dec 4370 20754 41508 Hex 1112 5112 A224 Gain Scheduling PID Set 2 to 3 Switch Point RW Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 2 To 3. Value between Set 2 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 1 Upper Limit. Loop 1 Gain Set 4 Breakpoint Dec 4371 20755 41510 Hex 1113 5113 A226 Gain Scheduling PID Set 3 to 4 Switch Point RW Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 3 To 4. Value between Set 3 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 1 Upper Limit. Loop 1 Gain Set 5 Breakpoint Dec 4372 20756 41512 Hex 1114 5114 A228 Gain Scheduling PID Set 4 to 5 Switch Point RW Loop 1 Cascade Mode Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 4 To 5. Value between Set 4 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 1 Upper Limit. Value Dec 4393 20777 41554 Hex 1129 5129 A252 RW Cascade Master/Slave Link Status 0 Cascade Closed 1 Cascade Open Loop 1 Ratio NO Constant Dec 4387 20771 41542 Hex 1123 5123 A246 Ratio NO Constant For Atomizing Air RW 0 to 9999 atomizing air value, Added to the x1 value in ratio mode (air flow is x1 + NO). 136 Loop 1 Ratio SFAC Constant Dec 4388 20772 41544 Hex 1124 5124 A248 Ratio SFAC Constant For Atomizing Air Ratio control mode scaling factor. Adjustable from 0.010 to 99.999 RW Loop 2 Control Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Loop 2 Manual Control Select Dec 4408 20792 41584 Hex 1138 5138 A270 RW Loop 2 Control Enable Select Dec 4409 20793 41586 Hex 1139 5139 A272 4494 20878 41756 Hex 118E 518E A31C RW 4495 20879 41758 Hex 118F 518F A31E Value Selection 0 Automatic Mode 1 Manual Mode Control Enable Selection 0 Disable 1 Enable Value RW Loop 2 Control Enable Access Dec & Description Value Loop 2 Auto/Manual Access Dec Values Operator Access to Auto/Manual Control 0 Off 1 On Value RW Operator Access to Control Enable/Disable 0 Off 1 On Loop 2 Primary Cycle Time Dec 4303 20687 41374 Hex 10CF 50CF A19E Cycle Time For Primary Control Outputs RW 0.5 to 512.0 Seconds Loop 2 Secondary Cycle Time Dec 4304 20688 41376 Hex 10D0 50D0 A1A0 Cycle Time For Secondary Control Outputs RW Loop 2 Control Selection 0.5 to 512.0 Seconds Value Dec 4407 20791 41582 Hex 1137 5137 A26E RW Loop 2 Control Type Control Actuator Type Selection 0 Standard (Time Proportioned or Continuous Linear PID) 1 VMD (3-Point Stepping For Valve Motor Drive) Value Dec 4410 20794 41588 Hex 113A 513A A274 RW Loop 2 Control Action Primary Only or Primary & Secondary 0 Single (Primary Only Control) 1 Dual Control (Primary & Secondary Control) Value Dec 4411 20795 41590 Hex 113B 513B A276 RW PID Set 1 - Primary Prop Band Dec 4312 20796 41492 Hex 113C 513C A278 4413 20797 41594 Hex 113D 513D A27A 0 Direct Acting 1 Reverse Acting PID Set 1 Primary Proportional Band For Loop2 RW PID Set 1 - Secondary Prop Band Dec Direction of Control Action Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 1. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 1 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 2 RW Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 1. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control 137 PID Set 1 - Integral Time PID Set 1 Integral Time For Loop 2 Dec 4414 20798 41596 Hex 113E 513E A27C Gain Set 1 integral time constant for loop 2 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF RW PID Set 1 - Deriviative Time Dec 4415 20799 41598 Hex 113D 513F A27E PID Set 1 Derivative Time For Loop 2 Gain Set 1 deriviative time constant for loop 2 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF RW Loop 2 Manual Reset (Bias) Dec 4416 20800 41600 Hex 1140 5140 A280 PID Set 1 Manual Reset (Bias) For Loop 2 Working point from 0 to 100 for single control or -100 to 100 for dual control (primary & secondary) RW PID Set 1 - Overlap/Deadband Dec 4417 20801 41602 Hex 1141 5141 A282 PID Set 1 - Overlap or Deadband For Loop 2 RW PID Set 1 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the combined band width. PID Set 1 - On/Off Differential Dec 4420 20804 41608 Hex 1144 5144 A288 PID Set 1 - On/Off Control Differential For Loop 2 The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 1. 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint. RW Loop 2 Primary Power Upper Limit Dec 4421 20805 41610 Hex 1145 5145 A28A Loop 2 Primary Power Upper Limit 10 to 100% but must be at least 10% above the primary power lower limit. RW Loop 2 Primary Power Lower Limit Dec 4422 20806 41612 Hex 1146 5146 A28C Loop 2 Primary Power Lower Limit 0 to 90% but must be at least 10% below the primary power upper limit. RW Loop 2 Secondary Power Upper Limit Dec 4423 20807 41614 Hex 1147 5147 A28E Loop 2 Secondary Power Upper Limit 10 to 100% but must be at least 10% above the secondary power lower limit. RW Loop 2 Secondary Power Lower Limit Dec 4424 20808 41616 Hex 1148 5148 A290 RW Loop 2 Pre-Tune Method Loop 2 Secondary Power Lower Limit 0 to 90% but must be at least 10% below the secondary power upper limit. Value Dec 4496 20880 41760 Hex 1190 5190 A320 RW Pre-Tune Type 0 Standard 1 Pretune at Value Loop 2 Pretune at Value Value To Pre-Tune Loop 2 Dec 4499 20883 41766 Hex 1193 5193 A326 Valid between the scaled input lower & upper limits (applies if Pre-Tune Type = Pre-tune at Value) RW Loop 2 Pre-Tune Set Value Dec 4497 29881 41762 Hex 1191 5191 A322 RW Loop 2 Pre-Tune Engage/Disengage Dec 4425 20809 41618 Hex 1149 5149 A292 RW PID Set Pre-Tune Will Optimize 0 PID Set 1 1 PID Set 2 2 PID Set 3 3 PID Set 4 4 PID Set 5 Value Pre-Tune Engage/Disengage For Loop 2 0 Pre-Tune OFF 1 Run Pre-Tune 138 Loop 2 Self-Tune Engage/Disengage Dec 4426 20810 41620 Hex 114A 514A A294 RW Loop 2 Loop Alarm Type Value Self-Tune Engage/Disengage For Loop 2 0 Self-Tune OFF 1 Self-Tune ON Value Dec 4427 20811 41622 Hex 114B 514B A296 RW Loop Alarm Type For Loop 2 1 User Defined Time 2 Automatic (2x Integral Time) Loop Alarm Time Loop Alarm Activation Time Dec 4428 20812 41624 Hex 114C 514C A298 RW 1 to 5999 Seconds after output loop 2 power reaches saturation Loop 2 Primary Power Loop 2 Primary Power Level Dec 4429 20813 41626 Hex 114D 514D A29A RO The current loop 2 primary power level (0 to 100%) Loop 2 Secondary Power Loop 2 Secondary Power Level Dec 4430 20814 41628 Hex 114E 514E A29C RO Loop 2 Combined Power The current loop 2 secondary power level (0 to 100%) Loop 2 Combined Primary & Secondary Power Level Dec 4431 20815 41630 Hex 114F 514F A29E RO Loop 2 Pre-Tune Status The current loop 2 combined PID power level (-100 to 100%) Value Dec 4432 20816 41632 Hex 1150 5150 A2A0 RO Loop 2 Self-Tune Status Pre-Tune Status For Loop 2 0 Inactive 1 Active Value Dec 4433 20817 41634 Hex 1151 5151 A2A2 RO Loop 2 Loop Alarm Status Dec 4434 20818 41636 Hex 1152 5152 A2A4 0 Inactive 1 Active Value RO 4435 20819 41638 Hex 1153 5153 A2A6 Loop Alarm Status For Loop 2 0 Inactive 1 Active Loop 2 Input Failure Pre-set Power Dec Self-Tune Status For Loop 2 Loop 2 Input Sensor Break Pre-Set Power RW The pre-defined power output applied if input signal is lost 0 to 100% (-100% to 100% for dual control). Loop 2 Auto Pre-Tune Auto Pre-Tune at Every Power-up For Loop 2 Dec 4436 20820 41640 Hex 1154 5154 A2A8 RW Pre-Tune Secondary Status Dec 4441 20825 41650 Hex 1159 5159 A2B2 0 Inactive 1 Active Value RO Loop 2 Pre-Tune Secondary Status 0 No Additional Information 1 PV within 5% (Pre-Tune cannot run) 2 Manual Control Enabled (Pre-Tune cannot run) 3 Control has On/Off element (Pre-Tune cannot run) 4 Input not valid (Pre-Tune cannot run) 5 Control Disabled (Pre-Tune cannot run) 6 Profile Running (Pre-Tune cannot run) 7 Setpoint Ramping (Pre-Tune cannot run) 139 Self-Tune Secondary Status Dec 4442 20826 41652 Hex 115A 515A A2B4 Value RO Loop 2 Self-Tune Secondary Status 0 No Additional Information 2 Manual Control Enabled (Self-Tune cannot run) 3 Control has On/Off element (Self-Tune cannot run) 4 Input not valid (Self-Tune cannot run) 5 Control Disabled (Self-Tune cannot run) Loop 2 Anti Wind-Up Limit Dec 4491 20875 41750 Hex 118B 518B A316 Loop 2 Anti Wind-up Limit Power level where integral action is suspended. Adjustable from 10.0 to 100.0% of PID power. RW Loop 2 Motor Travel Time Loop 2 Motor Travel Time Dec 4443 20827 41654 Hex 115B 515B A2B6 RW The motor travel time (from fully open to fully closed) for 3-point stepping VMD control. Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds. Loop 2 Minimum Motor on Time Dec 4444 20828 41656 Hex 115C 515C A2B8 Loop 2 Minimum Motor on Time RW Loop 2 Valve Break Action Dec 4501 20885 41770 Hex 1195 5195 A32A Minimum drive effort to begin moving valve for 3-point stepping VMD control. In seconds, from 0.02 to 1/10 of Motor Travel Time Value RW Loop 2 Sensor Break Action For VMD Control 0 Close Valve Output On 1 Open Valve Output On Loop 2 Minimum Valve Position Dec 4476 20860 41720 Hex 117C 517C A2F8 Loop 2 Minimum Valve Postition Minimum position to drive valve in VMD Mode from the valve close limit+1% to 100.0% RW Loop 2 Maximum Valve Position Dec 4477 20861 41722 Hex 117D 517D A2FA Loop 2 Maximum Valve Postition Maximum position to drive valve in VMD Mode. From 0.0% to the valve open limit-1% RW Loop 2 PID Set Select Value Dec 4467 20851 41702 Hex 1173 5173 A2E6 RW PID Set 2 - Primary Prop Band Dec 4447 20831 41662 Hex 115F 515F A2BE 4448 20832 41664 Hex 1160 5160 A2C0 0 PID Set 1 1 Gain Schedule Selected by SP 2 Gain Schedule Selected by PV 3 PID Set 2 4 PID Set 3 5 PID Set 4 6 PID Set 5 PID Set 2 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 2 RW PID Set 2 - Secondary Prop Band Dec Loop 2 PID Set Selection Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 2. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 2 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 2 RW Primary Secondary Band for Gain Set 2. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 2 - Integral Time PID Set 2 Integral Time For Loop 2 Dec 4449 20833 41666 Hex 1161 5161 A2C2 RW Secondary Proportional Band for Gain Set 2. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control 140 PID Set 2 - Derivative Time Dec 4450 20834 41668 Hex 1162 5162 A2C4 PID Set 2 Derivative Time For Loop 2 RW PID Set 2 - Overlap/Deadband Dec 4451 20835 41670 Hex 1163 5163 A2C6 PID Set 2 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 2 RW PID Set 2 - On/Off Differential Dec 4478 20862 41724 Hex 117E 517E A2FC 4452 20836 41672 Hex 1164 5164 A2C8 RW 4553 20837 41674 Hex 1165 5165 A2CA The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 2. 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint. PID Set 3 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 2 RW PID Set 3 - Secondary Prop Band Dec PID Set 2 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the combined band width. PID Set 2 - On/Off Differential For Loop 2 PID Set 3 - Primary Prop Band Dec Gain Set 2 derivative time constant for loop 1 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 3. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 3 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 2 RW Primary Secondary Band for Gain Set 3. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 3 - Integral Time PID Set 3 Integral Time For Loop 2 Dec 4454 20838 41676 Hex 1166 5166 A2CC Gain Set 3 integral time constant for loop 2 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF RW PID Set 3 - Derivative Time Dec 4455 20839 41678 Hex 1167 5167 A2CE PID Set 3 Derivative Time For Loop 2 RW PID Set 3 - Overlap/Deadband Dec 4456 20840 41680 Hex 1168 5168 A2D0 PID Set 3 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 2 RW PID Set 3 - On/Off Differential Dec 4479 20863 41726 Hex 117F 517F A2FE 4457 20841 41682 Hex 1169 5169 A2D2 RW 4458 20842 41684 Hex 116A 516A A2D4 The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 3. 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint. PID Set 4 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 2 RW PID Set 4 - Secondary Prop Band Dec PID Set 3 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the combined band width. PID Set 3 - On/Off Differential For Loop 2 PID Set 4 - Primary Prop Band Dec Gain Set 3 derivative time constant for loop 2 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 4. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 4 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 2 RW Primary Secondary Band for Gain Set 4. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 4 - Integral Time PID Set 4 Integral Time For Loop 2 Dec 4459 20843 41686 Hex 116B 516B A2D6 Gain Set 4 integral time constant for loop 2 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF RW PID Set 4 - Derivative Time Dec 4460 20844 41688 Hex 116C 516C A2D8 PID Set 4 Derivative Time For Loop 2 RW Gain Set 4 derivative time constant for loop 2 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF 141 PID Set 4 - Overlap/Deadband Dec 4461 20845 41690 Hex 116D 516D A2DA PID Set 4 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 2 RW PID Set 4 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the combined band width. RW The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 4. 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint. PID Set 4 - On/Off Differential Dec 4480 20864 41728 Hex 1180 5180 A300 PID Set 4 - On/Off Differential For Loop 2 PID Set 5 - Primary Prop Band Dec 4462 20846 41692 Hex 116E 516E A2DC PID Set 5 Primary Proportional Band For Loop 2 RW PID Set 5 - Secondary Prop Band Dec 4463 20847 41694 Hex 116F 516F A2DE Primary Proportional Band for Gain Set 5. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 5 Secondary Proportional Band For Loop 2 RW Primary Secondary Band for Gain Set 5. 1 display unit to 9999 units, but limited to 10 x scaled input span. 0 = On-Off control PID Set 5 Integral Time PID Set 5 Integral Time For Loop 2 Dec 4464 20848 41696 Hex 1170 5170 A2E0 Gain Set 5 integral time constant for loop 2 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF RW PID Set 5 - Derivative Time Dec 4465 20849 41698 Hex 1171 5171 A2E2 PID Set 5 Derivative Time For Loop 2 RW PID Set 5 - Overlap/Deadband Dec 4466 20850 41700 Hex 1172 5172 A2E4 PID Set 5 - Overlap/Deadband For Loop 2 RW PID Set 5 - On/Off Differential Dec 4481 20865 41730 Hex 1181 5181 A302 4469 20853 41706 Hex 1175 5175 A2EA RW 4470 20854 41708 Hex 1176 5176 A2EC RW 4471 20855 41710 Hex 1177 5177 A2EE RW 4472 20856 41712 Hex 1178 5178 A2F0 RW Dec 4485 20869 41738 1185 5185 A30A RW 4486 20870 41752 Hex 1186 5186 A30C Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 4 To 5. Value between Set 4 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 2 Upper Limit. 0% Master Power Demand to Slave Setpoint Scaling RW Slave Setpoint Scale Maximum Dec Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 3 To 4. Value between Set 3 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 2 Upper Limit. Gain Scheduling PID Set 4 to 5 Switch Point Slave Setpoint Scale Minimum Hex Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 2 To 3. Value between Set 2 Breakpoint & Scaled Input 2 Upper Limit. Gain Scheduling PID Set 3 to 4 Switch Point Loop 2 Gain Set 5 Breakpoint Dec Value (SP or PV) gain scheduling switches from PID Set 1 To 2. Value between Scaled Input 2 Lower & Upper Limits Gain Scheduling PID Set 2 to 3 Switch Point Loop 2 Gain Set 4 Breakpoint Dec The on-off control hysteresis (deadband) for PID Set 5. 1 to 300 display units, centred about the setpoint. Gain Scheduling PID Set 1 to 2 Switch Point Loop 2 Gain Set 3 Breakpoint Dec PID Set 5 overlap (+ve) or deadband (-ve) between primary & secondary prop bands. In display units - limited to 20% of the combined band width. PID Set 5 - On/Off Differential For Loop 2 Loop 2 Gain Set 2 Breakpoint Dec Gain Set 5 derivative time constant for loop 2 0.1 to 5999 Seconds. 0 or 6000 = OFF The effective cascade slave setpoint value equating to 0% power demand from the master loop. 100% Master Power Demand to Slave Setpoint Scaling RW The effective cascade slave setpoint value equating to 100% power demand from the master loop. 142 Slave Setpoint Slave Setpoint Value for Cascade Control Dec 4492 20876 41752 Hex 118C 518C A318 RW The slave setpoint valve when in Cascade Control Mode. Only write to this parameter if the unit is cascade status is OPEN (e.g. when tuning slave). Alarm Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Alarm 1 Input Source Dec 6143 22527 45054 Hex 17FF 57FF AFFE RW Alarm 1 Type Values & Description Value Alarm 1 Source 0 Input 2 1 Input 2 2 Aux A Input 3 Control Loop 1 Primary Power 4 Control Loop 1 Secondary Power 5 Control Loop 2 Primary Power 6 Control Loop 2 Secondary Power 7 Loop 1 8 Loop 2 Value Dec 6144 22528 45056 Hex 1800 5800 B000 RW Alarm 1 Type 0 Input 2 1 Process High Alarm 2 Process Low Alarm 3 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV) 4 Band Alarm 5 Input Rate of Change 6 Input/Sensor Break Alarm 7 Loop Alarm 10 % memory used 11 High Power Alarm 12 Low Power Alarm Alarm 1 Value Value at which Alarm Activates Dec 6145 22529 45058 Hex 1801 5801 B002 RW Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4. Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7. 0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12. Alarm 1 Rate of Change Value Dec 6150 22534 45068 Hex 1806 5806 B00C Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold RW Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 1 activates when PV change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999 Alarm 1 Hysteresis Alarm 1 Hysteresis Value Dec 6146 22530 45060 Hex 1802 5802 B004 RW Alarm 1 Inhibit Enable Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal must pass before alarm 1 deactivates. Limited by the input scaling span. Value Dec 6147 22531 45062 Hex 1803 5803 B006 RW Alarm 1 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit 0 Disable 1 Enable 143 Alarm 1 Status Value Dec 6148 22532 45064 Hex 1804 5804 B008 RO Alarm 1 Inhibit Status Alarm 1 Status 0 Disable 1 Enable Value Dec 6149 22533 45066 Hex 1805 5805 B00A RO Alarm 1 Inhibit Status 0 Disable 1 Enable Alarm 1 Main Label Main Language Name For Alarm 1 In Status Screen Dec 6151 22535 45070 Hex 1807 5807 B00E RW Alarm 1 Alternate Label 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 1” in alarm status screens when main display language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alternate Language Name For Alarm 1 In Status Screen Dec 6152 22536 45072 Hex 1808 5808 B010 RW 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 1” in alarm status screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alarm 1 Minimum Duration Dec 6153 22537 45074 Hex 1809 5809 B012 Alarm 1 Minimum Duration RW Alarm 2 Input Source Dec 6159 22543 45086 Hex 180F 580F B01E RW Alarm 2 Type Minimum time alarm 1 must be passed its threshold before activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter). From 0 to 9999 secs Value Source 0 Input 1 1 Input 2 2 Aux A Input 3 Control Loop 1 Primary Power 4 Control Loop 1 Secondary Power 5 Control Loop 2 Primary Power 6 Control Loop 2 Secondary Power 7 Loop 1 8 Loop 2 Value Dec 6160 22544 45088 Hex 1810 5810 B020 RW Alarm 2 Type 0 Unused 1 Process High Alarm 2 Process Low Alarm 3 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV) 4 Band Alarm 5 Input Rate of Change 6 Input/Sensor Break Alarm 7 Loop Alarm 10 % memory used 11 High Power Alarm 12 Low Power Alarm Alarm 2 Value Value at which Alarm 2 Activates Dec 6161 22545 45090 Hex 1811 5811 B022 RW Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4 Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7. 0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12. 144 Alarm 2 Rate of Change Value Dec 6166 22550 45100 Hex 1816 5816 B02C Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold RW Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 2 activates when PV change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999 Alarm 2 Hysteresis Alarm 2 Hysteresis Value Dec 6162 22546 45092 Hex 1812 5812 B024 RW Alarm 2 Inhibit Enable/Disable Dec 6163 22547 45094 Hex 1813 5813 B026 Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal must pass before Alarm 2 deactivates. Limited by the input scaling span Value RW Alarm 2 Status Alarm 2 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Value Dec 6164 22548 45096 Hex 1814 5814 B028 RO Alarm 2 Inhibit Status Alarm 2 Status 0 Inactive 1 Active Value Dec 6165 22549 45098 Hex 1815 5815 B02A RO Alarm 2 Inhibit Status 0 Not Inhibited 1 Inhibited Alarm 2 Label Main Language Name For Alarm 2 In Status Screen Dec 6167 22551 45102 Hex 1817 5817 B02E RW Alarm 2 Alternate Label 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 2” in alarm status screens when main display language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alternate Language Name For Alarm 2 In Status Screen Dec 6168 22552 45104 Hex 1818 5818 B010 RW 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 2” in alarm status screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alarm 2 Minimum Duration Dec 6169 22553 45106 Hex 1819 5819 B032 Alarm 2 Minimum Duration RW Alarm 3 Input Source Dec 6175 22559 45118 Hex 181F 581F B03E RW Minimum time alarm 2 must be passed its threshold before activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter). From 0 to 9999 secs Value Source 0 Input 1 1 Input 2 2 Aux A Input 3 Control Loop 1 Primary Power 4 Control Loop 1 Secondary Power 5 Control Loop 2 Primary Power 6 Control Loop 2 Secondary Power 7 Loop 1 8 Alarm 3 Type Loop 2 Value Dec 6176 22560 45120 Hex 1820 5820 B040 RW Alarm 3 Type 0 Unused 1 Process High Alarm 2 Process Low Alarm 3 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV) 4 Band Alarm 5 Input Rate of Change 145 6 Input/Sensor Break Alarm 7 Loop Alarm 10 % memory used 11 High Power Alarm 12 Low Power Alarm Alarm 3 Value Value at which Alarm 3 Activates Dec 6177 22561 45122 Hex 1821 5821 B042 RW Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4 Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7. 0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12. Alarm 3 Rate of Change Value Dec 6182 22652 45132 Hex 1826 5826 B04C Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold RW Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 3 activates when PV change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999 Alarm 3 Hysteresis Alarm 3 Hysteresis Value Dec 6178 22562 45124 Hex 1822 5822 B044 RW Alarm 3 Inhibit Enable/Disable Dec 6179 22563 45126 Hex 1823 5823 B046 Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal must pass before Alarm 3 deactivates. Limited by the input scaling span Value RW Alarm 3 Status Alarm 3 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Value Dec 6180 22564 45128 Hex 1824 5824 B048 RO Alarm 3 Inhibit Status Alarm 3 Status 0 Inactive 1 Active Value Dec 6181 22565 45130 Hex 1825 5825 B04A RO Alarm 3 Inhibit Status 0 Not Inhibited 1 Inhibited Alarm 3 Label Main Language Name For Alarm 3 In Status Screen Dec 6183 22567 45134 Hex 1817 5817 B02E RW Alarm 3 Alternate Label 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 3” in alarm status screens when main display language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alternate Language Name For Alarm 3 In Status Screen Dec 6184 22568 45136 Hex 1828 5828 B050 RW 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 3” in alarm status screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alarm 3 Minimum Duration Dec 6185 22569 45138 Hex 1829 5829 B052 Alarm 3 Minimum Duration RW Alarm 4 Input Source Dec 6191 22575 45150 Hex 182F 582F B05E RW Minimum time alarm 3 must be passed its threshold before activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter). From 0 to 9999 secs Value Source 0 Input 1 1 Input 2 2 Aux A Input 3 Control Loop 1 Primary Power 4 Control Loop 1 Secondary Power 5 Control Loop 2 Primary Power 146 Alarm 4 Type 6 Control Loop 2 Secondary Power 7 Loop 1 8 Loop 2 Value Dec 6192 22576 45152 Hex 1830 5830 B060 RW Alarm 4 Type 0 Unused 1 Process High Alarm 2 Process Low Alarm 3 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV) 4 Band Alarm 5 Input Rate of Change 6 Input/Sensor Break Alarm 7 Loop Alarm 10 % memory used 11 High Power Alarm 12 Low Power Alarm Alarm 4 Value Value at which Alarm 4 Activates Dec 6193 22577 45154 Hex 1831 5831 B062 RW Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4 Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7. 0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12. Alarm 4 Rate of Change Value Dec 6198 22582 45164 Hex 1836 5836 B06C Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold RW Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 4 activates when PV change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999 Alarm 4 Hysteresis Alarm 4 Hysteresis Value Dec 6194 22578 45156 Hex 1832 5832 B064 RW Alarm 4 Inhibit Enable/Disable Dec 6195 22579 45158 Hex 1833 5833 B066 Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal must pass before Alarm 4 deactivates. Limited by the input scaling span Value RW Alarm 4 Status Alarm 4 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Value Dec 6196 22580 45160 Hex 1834 5834 B068 RO Alarm 4 Inhibit Status Alarm 4 Status 0 Inactive 1 Active Value Dec 6197 22581 45162 Hex 1835 5835 B06A RO Alarm 4 Label Alarm 4 Inhibit Status 0 Not Inhibited 1 Inhibited Main Language Name For Alarm 4 In Status Screen Dec 6199 22583 45166 Hex 1837 5837 B06E RW Alarm 4 Alternate Label 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 4” in alarm status screens when main display language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alternate Language Name For Alarm 4 In Status Screen Dec 6200 22584 45168 Hex 1838 5838 B070 RW 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 4” in alarm status screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. 147 Alarm 4 Minimum Duration Dec 6201 22585 45170 Hex 1839 5839 B072 Alarm 4 Minimum Duration RW Alarm 5 Input Source Dec 6207 22591 45182 Hex 183F 583F B07E RW Alarm 5 Type Minimum time alarm 4 must be passed its threshold before activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter). From 0 to 9999 secs Value Source 0 Input 1 1 Input 2 2 Aux A Input 3 Control Loop 1 Primary Power 4 Control Loop 1 Secondary Power 5 Control Loop 2 Primary Power 6 Control Loop 2 Secondary Power 7 Loop 1 8 Loop 2 Value Dec 6208 22592 45184 Hex 1840 5840 B080 RW Alarm 5 Type 0 Unused 1 Process High Alarm 2 Process Low Alarm 3 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV) 4 Band Alarm 5 Input Rate of Change 6 Input/Sensor Break Alarm 7 Loop Alarm 10 % memory used 11 High Power Alarm 12 Low Power Alarm Alarm 5 Value Value at which Alarm 5 Activates Dec 6209 22593 45186 Hex 1841 5841 B082 RW Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4 Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7. 0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12. Alarm 5 Rate of Change Value Dec 6214 22598 45196 Hex 1846 5846 B08C Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold RW Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 5 activates when PV change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999 Alarm 5 Hysteresis Alarm 5 Hysteresis Value Dec 6210 22594 45188 Hex 1842 5842 B084 RW Alarm 5 Inhibit Enable/Disable Dec 6211 22595 45190 Hex 1843 5843 B086 Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal must pass before Alarm 5 deactivates. Limited by the input scaling span Value RW Alarm 5 Status 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Value Dec 6212 22596 45192 Hex 1844 5844 B088 RO Alarm 5 Inhibit Status 6213 22597 45194 Hex 1845 5845 B08A RO Alarm 5 Status 0 Inactive 1 Active Value Dec Alarm 5 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit Alarm 5 Inhibit Status 0 Not Inhibited 1 Inhibited 148 Alarm 5 Label Main Language Name For Alarm 5 In Status Screen Dec 6215 22599 45198 Hex 1847 5847 B08E RW Alarm 5 Alternate Label 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 5” in alarm status screens when main display language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alternate Language Name For Alarm 5 In Status Screen Dec 6216 22600 45200 Hex 1848 5848 B090 RW 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 5” in alarm status screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alarm 5 Minimum Duration Dec 6201 22585 45170 Hex 1839 5839 B072 Alarm 5 Minimum Duration RW Alarm 6 Input Source Dec 6223 22607 45214 Hex 184F 584F B09E RW Alarm 6 Type Minimum time alarm 5 must be passed its threshold before activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter). From 0 to 9999 secs Value Source 0 Input 1 1 Input 2 2 Aux A Input 3 Control Loop 1 Primary Power 4 Control Loop 1 Secondary Power 5 Control Loop 2 Primary Power 6 Control Loop 2 Secondary Power 7 Loop 1 8 Loop 2 Value Dec 6224 22608 45216 Hex 1850 5850 B0A0 RW Alarm 6 Type 0 Unused 1 Process High Alarm 2 Process Low Alarm 3 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV) 4 Band Alarm 5 Input Rate of Change 6 Input/Sensor Break Alarm 7 Loop Alarm 10 % memory used 11 High Power Alarm 12 Low Power Alarm Alarm 6 Value Value at which Alarm 6 Activates Dec 6225 22609 45218 Hex 1851 5851 B0A2 RW Alarm 6 Rate of Change Value Dec 6230 22614 45228 Hex 1856 5856 B0AC Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4 Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7. 0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12. Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold RW Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 6 activates when PV change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999 Alarm 6 Hysteresis Alarm 6 Hysteresis Value Dec 6226 22610 45220 Hex 1852 5852 B0A4 RW Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal must pass before Alarm 6 deactivates. Limited by the input scaling span 149 Alarm 6 Inhibit Enable/Disable Dec 6227 22611 45222 Hex 1853 5853 B0A6 Value RW Alarm 6 Status 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Value Dec 6228 22612 45224 Hex 1854 5854 B0A8 RO Alarm 6 Inhibit Status 6229 22613 45226 Hex 1855 5855 B0AA RO Alarm 6 Status 0 Inactive 1 Active Value Dec Alarm 6 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit Alarm 6 Inhibit Status 0 Not Inhibited 1 Inhibited Alarm 6 Label Main Language Name For Alarm 6 In Status Screen Dec 6231 22615 45230 Hex 1857 5857 B0AE RW Alarm 6 Alternate Label 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 6” in alarm status screens when main display language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alternate Language Name For Alarm 6 In Status Screen Dec 6232 22616 45232 Hex 1858 5858 B0B0 RW 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 6” in alarm status screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alarm 6 Minimum Duration Dec 6233 22617 45234 Hex 1859 5859 B0B2 Alarm 6 Minimum Duration RW Alarm 7 Input Source Dec 6239 22623 45246 Hex 185F 585F B0BE RW Alarm 7 Type Minimum time alarm 6 must be passed its threshold before activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter). From 0 to 9999 secs Value Source 0 Input 1 1 Input 2 2 Aux A Input 3 Control Loop 1 Primary Power 4 Control Loop 1 Secondary Power 5 Control Loop 2 Primary Power 6 Control Loop 2 Secondary Power 7 Loop 1 8 Loop 2 Value Dec 6240 22624 45248 Hex 1860 5860 B0C0 RW Alarm 7 Type 0 Unused 1 Process High Alarm 2 Process Low Alarm 3 Deviation Alarm (SP-PV) 4 Band Alarm 5 Input Rate of Change 6 Input/Sensor Break Alarm 7 Loop Alarm 10 % memory used 11 High Power Alarm 12 Low Power Alarm 150 Alarm 7 Value Value at which Alarm 7 Activates Dec 6241 22625 45250 Hex 1861 5861 B0C2 RW Limited by input scaling for alarm types 1 to 4 Not used for alarms 5, 6 or 7. 0 to 100% for alarms 10 to 12. Alarm 7 Rate of Change Value Dec 6246 22630 45260 Hex 1866 5866 B0CC Process Variable Rate of Change Alarm Threshold RW Value for Rate of Change Alarm. Alarm 7 activates when PV change exceeds this level. From 0.0 to 99999 Alarm 7 Hysteresis Alarm 7 Hysteresis Value Dec 6242 22626 45252 Hex 1862 5862 B0C4 RW Alarm 7 Inhibit Enable/Disable Dec 6243 22627 45254 Hex 1863 5863 B0C6 Deadband value (on “safe” side of alarm), through which signal must pass before Alarm 7 deactivates. Limited by the input scaling span Value RW Alarm 7 Status Alarm 7 Power-up/Setpoint Change Inhibit 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Value Dec 6244 22628 45256 Hex 1864 5864 B0C8 RO Alarm 7 Inhibit Status Alarm 7 Status 0 Inactive 1 Active Value Dec 6245 22629 45258 Hex 1865 5865 B0CA RO Alarm 7 Inhibit Status 0 Not Inhibited 1 Inhibited Alarm 7 Label Main Language Name For Alarm 7 In Status Screen Dec 6247 22631 45262 Hex 1867 5867 B0CE RW Alarm 7 Alternate Label 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 7” in alarm status screens when main display language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alternate Language Name For Alarm 7 In Status Screen Dec 6248 22632 45264 Hex 1868 5868 B0D0 RW 8 ASCII characters replacing the title “Alarm 7” in alarm status screens when the alternate language is used, read/written with Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Alarm 7 Minimum Duration Dec 6249 22633 45266 Hex 1869 5869 B0D2 Alarm 7 Minimum Duration RW Minimum time alarm 7 must be passed its threshold before activating (deactivation is not affected by this parameter). From 0 to 9999 secs Recorder & Clock Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Redcording Sample Interval Dec 7750 23934 47868 Hex 1D7E 5D7E BAFC RW Values & Description Value Recording Sample Interval 0 Every Second 1 Every 2 Seconds 2 Every 5 Seconds 3 Every 10 Seconds 4 Every 15 Seconds 5 Every 30 Seconds 6 Every Minute 7 Every 2 Minutes 151 Recording Mode Dec 7551 23935 47870 Hex 1D7F 5D7F BAFE RW Manual Recording Trigger Dec 7552 23936 47872 Hex 1D80 5D80 BB00 RW Data Recorder Fitted 8 Every 5 Minutes 9 Every 10 Minutes 10 Every 15 Minutes 11 Every 30 Minutes Value Recording Mode 0 Record until memory used 1 Continuous FIFO buffer Value Manual Recording Trigger 0 Manual Recording Trigger Off 1 Manual Recording Trigger On Value Dec 7553 23937 47874 Hex 1D81 5D81 BB02 RO Data Recroder Fitted 0 Not Fitted 1 Recorder Fitted Memory Remaining Remaining Data Recorder Capacity Dec 7554 23938 47876 Hex 1D82 5D82 BB04 RO Recorder Auto-Alarm Trigger Dec 7563 23947 47894 Hex 1D8B 5D8B BB16 Value RW Operator Access to Record Trigger Dec 7559 23943 47886 Hex 1D87 5D87 BB0E RW 7560 23944 4788 Hex 1D88 5D88 BB10 Record Input 1 Process Variable Dec 7572 23956 47912 Hex 1D94 5D94 BB28 7573 23957 47914 Hex 1D95 5D95 BB2A RW RW Record Input 1 Min Between Samples Dec 7574 23958 47916 Hex 1D96 5D96 BB2C RW Record Input 2 Process Variable Dec 7607 23991 47982 Hex 1DB7 5DB7 BB6E 7608 23992 47984 Hex 1DB8 5DB8 BB70 On Alarm 2 On Profile Run 3 On Alarm or Profile Running RW RW Operator Access to Manual Record Trigger 0 None 1 On Alarm Recorder Status Visible In Operator Mode 0 No 1 Yes Record Process Variable Of Input 1 0 Do Not Record PV 1 Record PV Value Value Record Max PV For Input 1 Since Last Sample 0 Do Not Record Maximum PV 1 Record Maximum PV Value Between Values Value Record Min PV For Input 1 Since Last Sample 0 Do Not Record Minimum PV 1 Record Minimum PV Value Between Values Value Record Input 2 Max Between Samples Dec 1 Value Record Input 1 Max Between Samples Dec None Value RW Automatic Data Recorder Trigger 0 Value Operator Access in Operator Mode Dec The unused memory remainin, in bytes Record Process Variable of Input 2 0 Do Not Record PV 1 Record PV Value Value Record Max PV For Input 2 Since Last Sample 0 Do Not Record Maximum PV 1 Record Maximum PV Value Between Values 152 Record Input 2 Min Between Samples Dec 7609 23993 47986 Hex 1DB9 5DB9 BB72 RW Record Aux A Input Value Record Min PV For Input 2 Since Last Sample 0 Do Not Record Minimum PV 1 Record Minimum PV Value Between Values Value Dec 7606 23990 47980 Hex 1DB6 5DB6 BB6C RW Record Loop 1 Actual Setpoint Dec 7575 23959 47918 Hex 1D97 5D97 BB2E 7610 23994 47988 Hex 1DBA 5DBA BB74 RW 7576 23960 47920 Hex 1D98 5D98 BB30 RW 7577 23961 47922 Hex 1D99 5D99 BB32 RW 7611 23995 47990 Hex 1DBB 5DBB BB76 RW 7612 23996 47992 Hex 1DBC 5DBC BB78 Record Effective Value of Loop 1 Setpoint 0 Do Not Record Setpoint 1 Record Actual Setpoint Record Effective Value of Loop 2 Setpoint 0 Do Not Record Setpoint 1 Record Actual Setpoint Record Primary Power For Loop 1 0 Do Not Record Primary Power 1 Record Primary Power Record Secondary Power For Loop 1 0 Do Not Record Secondary Power 1 Record Secondary Power Value RW Record Loop 1 Secondary Power Dec Record Aux A Value Value Record Loop 2 Primary Power Dec 1 Value Record Loop 1 Secondary Power Dec Do Not Record Aux A Value Record Loop 1 Primary Power Dec 0 Value Record Loop 2 Actual Setpoint Dec Record Auxiliary A Input Value Record Primary Power For Loop 2 0 Do Not Record Primary Power 1 Record Primary Power Value RW Record Alarm 1 Status Record Secondary Power For Loop 2 0 Do Not Record Secondary Power 1 Record Secondary Power Value Dec 7578 23962 47924 Hex 1D9A 5D9A BB34 RW Record Alarm 2 Status Record Change of State for Alarm 1 0 Do Not Record Alarm 1 1 Record Alarm 1 Value Dec 7579 23963 47926 Hex 1D9B 5D9B BB36 RW Record Alarm 3 Status Record Change of State for Alarm 2 0 Do Not Record Alarm 2 1 Record Alarm 2 Value Dec 7580 23964 47928 Hex 1D9C 5D9C BB38 RW Record Alarm 4 Status Record Change of State for Alarm 3 0 Do Not Record Alarm 3 1 Record Alarm 3 Value Dec 7581 23965 47930 Hex 1D9D 5D9D BB3A RW Record Alarm 5 Status Record Change of State for Alarm 4 0 Do Not Record Alarm 4 1 Record Alarm 4 Value Dec 7582 23966 47932 Hex 1D9E 5D9E BB3C RW Record Alarm 6 Status Record Change of State for Alarm 5 0 Do Not Record Alarm 5 1 Record Alarm 5 Value Dec 7615 23999 47998 Hex 1DBF 5DBF BB7E RW Record Change of State for Alarm 6 0 Do Not Record Alarm 6 1 Record Alarm 6 153 Record Alarm 7 Status Value Dec 7616 24000 48000 Hex 1DC0 5DC0 BB80 RW Record Power 0 Do Not Record Alarm 7 1 Record Alarm 7 Value Dec 7583 23967 47934 Hex 1D9F 5D9F BB3E RW Record Cascade Master PV Dec 7530 23914 47828 Hex 1D6A 5D6A BAD4 Record Cascade Master SP Dec 7531 23915 47830 Hex 1D6B 5D6B BAD6 Record Cascade Slave PV Dec 7532 23916 47832 Hex 1D6C 5D6C BAD8 7533 23917 47834 Hex 1D6D 5D6D BADA RW RW Record Slave Secondary Power Dec 7538 23922 47844 Hex 1D72 5D72 BAE4 1 Record Power On/Off Do Not Record PV 1 Record PV of Master Record Ratio PV Input 1 Do Not Record SP 1 Record SP Value of Master 7534 23918 47836 Hex 1D6E 5D6E BADC RW Record Ratio PV Input 2 Do Not Record PV 1 Record PV of Slave Value 7535 23919 47838 Hex 1D6F 5D6F BADE RW Record Ratio SP Dec 7536 23920 47840 Hex 1D70 5D70 BAD0 RW Record Ratio Power Do Not Record Primary Power 1 Record Primary Power of Slave 7537 23921 47842 Hex 1D71 5D71 BAE2 RW Trigger Recording on Alarm 1 Dec 7584 23968 47936 Do Not Record Secondary Power 1 Record Secondary Power Hex 1DA0 5DA0 BB40 Trigger Recording on Alarm 2 Dec 7685 24069 48138 Do Not Record PV 1 Record Ratio Input 2 PV Value Hex 1E05 5E05 BC0A Trigger Recording on Alarm 3 Dec 7686 24070 48140 Do Not Record PV 1 Record Ratio Input 2 PV Value Value Record Ratio Mode Setpoint 0 Do Not Record SP 1 Record Ratio Mode SP Value Hex 1E06 5E06 BC0C Record Ratio Power 0 Do Not Record Ratio Pwer 1 Record Ratio Mode Power Alarm 1 to Trigger Recording 0 Off 1 Trigger On Alarm 1 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm) Alarm 2 to Trigger Recording 0 Off 1 Trigger On Alarm 2 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm) Value RW Record Ratio PV Input 2 Process Value 0 Value RW Record Ratio PV Input 1 Process Value 0 Value RW Record Slave Secondary Power in Cascade Mode 0 Value Dec Record Primary Power Value of Cascade Slave 0 Value Dec Record Cascade Mode Slave Process Value 0 Value Dec Record Cascade Mode Master Setpoint 0 Value RW Record Cascade Mode Master Process Variable 0 Value Record Cascade Slave Primary Power Dec Do Not Record Power On/Off Value RW Record Instrument Power Turned On/Off 0 Value RW Record Change of State for Alarm 7 Alarm 3 to Trigger Recording 0 Off 1 Trigger On Alarm 3 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm) 154 Trigger Recording on Alarm 4 Dec 7687 24071 48142 Hex 1E07 5E07 BC0E Value RW Trigger Recording on Alarm 5 Dec 7688 24072 48144 Hex 1E08 5E08 BC10 7613 23997 47994 Hex 1DBD 5DBD BB7A RW 7614 23998 47996 Hex 1DBE 5DBE BB7C Off 1 Trigger On Alarm 4 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm) Alarm 5 to Trigger Recording 0 Off 1 Trigger On Alarm 5 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm) Value RW Trigger Recording on Alarm 7 Dec 0 Value Trigger Recording on Alarm 6 Dec Alarm 4 to Trigger Recording Alarm 6 to Trigger Recording 0 Off 1 Trigger On Alarm 6 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm) Value RW Alarm 7 to Trigger Recording 0 Off 1 Trigger On Alarm 7 (if auto-trigger = profile or alarm) Sample Size Data Recording Sample Size Dec 7595 23979 47958 Hex 1DAB 5DAB BB56 RO Record Event 1 The size (in bytes) for recording sample with current settings Value Dec 7599 23983 47966 Hex 1DAF 5DAF BB5E RW Record Event 2 Record Change of State For Event 1 0 Do Not Record Event 1 1 Record Event 1 Value Dec 7600 23984 47968 Hex 1DB0 5DB0 BB60 RW Record Event 3 Record Change of State For Event 2 0 Do Not Record Event 2 1 Record Event 2 Value Dec 7601 23985 47970 Hex 1DB1 5DB1 BB62 RW Record Event 4 Record Change of State For Event 3 0 Do Not Record Event 3 1 Record Event 3 Value Dec 7602 23986 47972 Hex 1DB2 5DB2 BB64 RW Record Event 5 Record Change of State For Event 4 0 Do Not Record Event 4 1 Record Event 4 Value Dec 7603 23987 47974 Hex 1DB3 5DB3 BB66 RW Record Change of State For Event 5 0 Do Not Record Event 5 1 Record Event 5 Memory Used Percentage Data Memory Used Dec 7605 23989 47978 Hex 1DB5 5DB5 BB6A RO Date Format Recorder Memory Used. 0 (Empty) to 100% (Full) Value Dec 7868 24252 48504 Hex 1EBC 5EBC BD78 RW Display Date Format 0 dd/mm/yyyy (European Default) 1 mm/dd/yyyy (USA Default) Clock Time Real Time Clock Time of Day Setting Dec 7869 24253 48506 Hex 1EBD 5EBD BD7A RW Format is the number of seconds since midnight. 155 Clock Date Real Time Clock Date Setting Dec N/A N/A 48508 Hex N/A N/A BD7C RW This can be entered only as a floating point number. When converted to binary the least significant 19 bits represent the date in this format: www DDDDD MMMM YYYYYYY YYYYYYY = YEAR MMMM = MONTH DDDDD = DAY OF MONTH (1-31 but must be valid) www = Day of the week The day of week portion is calculated from the date (Read Only). Example with date set to 31/07/2012 Day (31) = 11111 Month (7) = 0111 Year (12) = 0001100 Bits 17 and higher are ignored when writing so 11111 0111 0001100 (64396 decimal) is just one of many possible numbers to write as 31/07/2012, and when reading the date back, the number returned is 10 11111 0111 0001100 (195468 decimal) because bits 17-19 are 010 (to represent “Tuesday”). Real Time Clock Fitted Value Dec 7871 24255 48510 Hex 1EBF 5EBF BD7E RO Day of the Week 0 Not Fitted 1 Fitted Value Dec 7872 24256 48512 Hex 1EC0 5EC0 BD80 RO Real Time Clock Fitted Day of the Week (Calculated from clock date setting) 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 7 Sunday 156 Display & Security Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Values & Description LED 1 Label Dec 7657 24040 48080 Hex 1DE8 5DE8 BBDD RW LED 1 Alternate Label Dec 7660 24044 48088 Hex 1DEC 5DEC BBD8 RW LED 2 Label Dec 7657 24041 48082 Hex 1DE9 5DE9 BBD2 RW LED 2 Alternate Label Dec 7661 24045 48090 Hex 1DED 5DED BBDA RW Labels shown in display immediately below the 4 red LED indicators. With up to 5 ASCII characters, which can read or written using Modbus functions 16 or 23. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. LED 3 Label Dec 7658 24042 48084 Hex 1DEA 5DEA BBD4 RW Defaults: 1 = PRI (Primary); 2 = SEC (Secondary); 3 = TUNE (Tuning); 4 = ALARM (Alarm) LED 3 Alternate Label Dec 7662 24046 48092 Hex 1DEE 5DEE BBDC RW LED 4 Label Dec 7659 24043 48086 Hex 1DEB 5DEB BBD6 RW LED 4 Alternate Label Dec 7663 24047 48094 Hex 1DEF 5DEF BBDE RW LED 1 Useage Value Dec 7868 24252 48504 Hex 1EBC 5EBC BD78 RW LED 1 Usage. For 8 & 9 see also LED 1 Selections 0 Loop 1 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON 1 Loop 1 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON 2 Loop 2 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON 3 Loop 2 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON 4 Loop 1 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON 5 Loop 1 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON 6 Loop 2 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON 7 Loop 2 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON 8 Alarm/Event/Digital/Control (Logical OR) 9 Alarm/Event/Digital/Control inverted (Logical NOR) Value 8 (Logical OR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns ON the LED if any of the selected alarms, events, inputs or functions are active. Value 9 (Logical NOR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns OFF the LED if any of the selected alarms, events, inputs or functions are active. Note: Pre-tune will flash the LED instead of turning it on, but flashing will be obscured if used in conjunction with other functions when they are on. 157 LED 1 Alarm Indication Bit Dec 7690 24074 48148 Hex 1E0A 5E0A BC14 RW LED 1 Profiler Event Indication Dec 7692 24076 48152 Hex 1E0C 5E0C BC18 LED 1 Slot A & Soft Input Indication Dec 7694 24078 48156 Hex 1E0E 5E0E BC1C 7696 24080 48160 Hex 1E10 5E10 BC20 Alarm 1 1 Alarm 2 2 Alarm 3 3 Alarm 4 4 Alarm 5 5 Alarm 6 6 Alarm 7 RW Event 1 1 Event 2 2 Event 3 3 Event 4 4 Event 5 5 Event 6 6 Event 7 LED 1 Control Indication Digital Input A 1 Soft Digital 1 2 Soft Digital 2 3 Soft Digital 3 4 Soft Digital 4 7644 24028 48056 Hex 1DDC 5DDC BBB8 RW LED 2 Useage Digital Input C1 1 Digital Input C2 2 Digital Input C3 3 Digital Input C4 4 Digital Input C5 5 Digital Input C6 6 Digital Input C7 7665 24049 48098 Hex 1DF1 5DF1 BBE2 RW If bit =1, the function’s status is selected 0 Loop 1 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing) 1 Loop 1 Manual Control 2 Loop 2 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing) 3 Loop 2 Manual Control Value Dec If bit =1, Digital Cn status is selected 0 Bit Dec If bit =1, Digital A / Soft Input n status is selected 0 Bit RW If bit =1, Event n status is selected 0 Bit LED 1 Option C Digital Indication Dec 0 Bit RW If bit =1, Alarm n status is selected LED 2 Usage. For 8 & 9 see also LED 2 Selections 0 Loop 1 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON 1 Loop 1 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON 2 Loop 2 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON 3 Loop 2 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON 4 Loop 1 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON 5 Loop 1 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON 158 6 Loop 2 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON 7 Loop 2 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON 8 Alarm/Event/Digital/Control (Logical OR) 9 Alarm/Event/Digital/Control inverted (Logical NOR) Value 8 (Logical OR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns ON the LED if any of the selected alarms, events, inputs or functions are active. Value 9 (Logical NOR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns OFF the LED if any of the selected alarms, events, inputs or functions are active. Note: Pre-tune will flash the LED instead of turning it on, but flashing will be obscured if used in conjunction with other functions when they are on. LED 2 Alarm Indication Bit Dec 7698 24082 48164 Hex 1E12 5E12 BC24 RW LED 2 Event Indication If bit =1, Alarm n status is selected 0 Alarm 1 1 Alarm 2 2 Alarm 3 3 Alarm 4 4 Alarm 5 5 Alarm 6 6 Alarm 7 Bit Dec 7700 24084 48168 Hex 1E14 5E14 BC28 RW LED 2 Slot A & Soft Input Indication Dec 7702 24086 48172 Hex 1E16 5E16 BC2C 7704 24088 48176 Hex 1E18 5E18 BC30 0 Event 1 1 Event 2 2 Event 3 3 Event 4 4 Event 5 5 Profile Running 6 Profile End Bit RW LED 2 Option C Digital Indication Dec If bit =1, Event n status is selected If bit =1, Digital A / Soft Input n status is selected 0 Digital Input A 1 Soft Digital 1 2 Soft Digital 2 3 Soft Digital 3 4 Soft Digital 4 Bit RW If bit =1, Digital Cn status is selected 0 Digital Input C1 1 Digital Input C2 2 Digital Input C3 3 Digital Input C4 4 Digital Input C5 5 Digital Input C6 6 Digital Input C7 159 LED 2 Control Indication Bit Dec 7646 24030 48060 Hex 1DDE 5DDE BBBC RW LED 3 Useage 0 Loop 1 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing) 1 Loop 1 Manual Control 2 Loop 2 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing) 3 Loop 2 Manual Control Value Dec 7666 24050 48100 Hex 1DF2 5DF2 BBE4 RW If bit =1, the function’s status is selected LED 3 Usage. For 8 & 9 see also LED 3 Selections 0 Loop 1 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON 1 Loop 1 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON 2 Loop 2 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON 3 Loop 2 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON 4 Loop 1 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON 5 Loop 1 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON 6 Loop 2 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON 7 Loop 2 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON 8 Alarm/Event/Digital/Control (Logical OR of selection) 9 Alarm/Event/Digital/Control inverted (Logical NOR of selection) Value 8 (Logical OR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns ON the LED if any of the selected alarms, events, inputs or functions are active. Value 9 (Logical NOR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns OFF the LED if any of the selected alarms, events, inputs or functions are active. Note: Pre-tune will flash the LED instead of turning it on, but flashing will be obscured if used in conjunction with other functions when they are on. LED 3 Alarm Indication Bit Dec 7706 24090 48180 Hex 1E1A 5E1A BC34 RW LED 3 Event Indication 0 Alarm 1 1 Alarm 2 2 Alarm 3 3 Alarm 4 4 Alarm 5 5 Alarm 6 6 Alarm 7 Bit Dec 7708 24092 48184 Hex 1E1C 5E1C BC38 RW If bit =1, Alarm n status is selected If bit =1, Event n status is selected 0 Event 1 1 Event 2 2 Event 3 3 Event 4 4 Event 5 5 Profile Running 6 Profile End 160 LED 3 Slot A & Soft Input Indication Dec 7710 24094 48188 Hex 1E1E 5E1E BC3C Bit RW LED 3 Option C Digital Indication Dec 7712 24096 48192 Hex 1E20 5E20 BC40 If bit =1, Digital A / Soft Input n status is selected 0 Digital Input A 1 Soft Digital 1 2 Soft Digital 2 3 Soft Digital 3 4 Soft Digital 4 Bit RW LED 3 Control Indication If bit =1, Digital Cn status is selected 0 Digital Input C1 1 Digital Input C2 2 Digital Input C3 3 Digital Input C4 4 Digital Input C5 5 Digital Input C6 6 Digital Input C7 Bit Dec 7648 24032 48064 Hex 1DE0 5DE0 BBC0 RW LED 4 Useage If bit =1, the function’s status is selected 0 Loop 1 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing) 1 Loop 1 Manual Control 2 Loop 2 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing) 3 Loop 2 Manual Control Value Dec 7667 24051 48102 Hex 1DF3 5DF3 BBE6 RW LED 4 Usage. For 8 & 9 see also LED 4 Selections 0 Loop 1 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON 1 Loop 1 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON 2 Loop 2 Primary Control ON = LED 1 ON 3 Loop 2 Secondary Control ON = LED 1 ON 4 Loop 1 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON 5 Loop 1 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON 6 Loop 2 VMD Open ON = LED 1 ON 7 Loop 2 VMD Close ON = LED 1 ON 8 Alarm/Event/Digital/Control (Logical OR of selection) 9 Alarm/Event/Digital/Control inverted (Logical NOR of selection) Value 8 (Logical OR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns ON the LED if any of the selected alarms, events, inputs or functions are active. Value 9 (Logical NOR selection of Alarm/Events/Digital/Control) turns OFF the LED if any of the selected alarms, events, inputs or functions are active. Note: Pre-tune will flash the LED instead of turning it on, but flashing will be obscured if used in conjunction with other functions when they are on. LED 4 Alarm Indication Bit Dec 7714 24098 48196 Hex 1E22 5E22 BC44 RW If bit =1, Alarm n status is selected 0 Alarm 1 1 Alarm 2 2 Alarm 3 3 Alarm 4 4 Alarm 5 161 LED 4 Event Indication 5 Alarm 6 6 Alarm 7 Bit Dec 7716 24100 48200 Hex 1E24 5E24 BC48 RW LED 4 Slot A & Soft Input Indication Dec 7718 24102 48204 Hex 1E26 5E26 BC4C LED 4 Option C Digital Indication Dec 7720 24104 48208 Hex 1E28 5E28 BC50 0 Event 1 1 Event 2 2 Event 3 3 Event 4 4 Event 5 5 Profile Running 6 Profile End Bit RW LED 4 Control Indication Digital Input A 1 Soft Digital 1 2 Soft Digital 2 3 Soft Digital 3 4 Soft Digital 4 7648 24032 48064 Hex 1DE2 5DE2 BBC4 RW Backlight Color Digital Input C1 1 Digital Input C2 2 Digital Input C3 3 Digital Input C4 4 Digital Input C5 5 Digital Input C6 6 Digital Input C7 7668 24052 48104 Hex 1DF4 5DF4 BBE8 RW Display Language Loop 1 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing) 1 Loop 1 Manual Control 2 Loop 2 Auto Tune (self-tune=On, pre-tune=flashing) 3 Loop 2 Manual Control 7675 24059 48118 Hex 1DFB 5DFB BBF6 RW Display Backlight Color 0 Green to Red if any output is latched 1 Red to Green if any output is latched 2 Green to Red if any alarm active 3 Red to Green if any alarm active 4 Permanent Green 5 Permanent Red Value Dec If bit =1, the function’s status is selected 0 Value Dec If bit =1, Digital Cn status is selected 0 Bit Dec If bit =1, Digital A / Soft Input n status is selected 0 Bit RW If bit =1, Event n status is selected Select Display Language 0 Main Display Language 1 Alternate Display Language Display Contrast Display Contrast Value Dec 7676 24060 48120 Hex 1DFC 5DFC BBF8 RW Screen contrast adjustment to improve clarity. 10 to 100 with 100 = maximum contrast. 162 Invert Display Value Dec 7677 24061 48122 Hex 1DFD 5DFD BBFA RW Normal or Inverted Display 0 Normal Display 1 Inverted Display Setup Lock Code Setup Mode Entry Passcode Dec 7678 24062 48124 Hex 1DFE 5DFE BBFC RW 1 to 9999. Default is 10 Configuration Lock Code Configuration Mode Entry Passcode Dec 7679 24063 48126 Hex 1DFF 5DFF BBFE RW 1 to 9999. Default is 10 Tuning Lock Code Tuning Mode Entry Passcode Dec 7680 24064 48128 Hex 1D00 5D00 BC00 RW 1 to 9999. Default is 10 Supervisor Lock Code Supervisor Mode Entry Passcode Dec 7681 24065 48130 Hex 1E01 5E01 BC02 RW 1 to 9999. Default is 10 Profiler Setup Lock Code Profiler Setup Mode Entry Passcode Dec 7682 24066 48132 Hex 1E02 5E02 BC04 RW 1 to 9999. Default is 10 USB Lock Code USB Mode Entry Passcode Dec 7683 24067 48134 Hex 1E03 5E03 BC06 RW 1 to 9999. Default is 10 Recorder Lock Code Recorder Control Mode Entry Passcode Dec 7684 24068 48136 Hex 1E04 5E04 BC08 RW Profiler Control Lock Code Dec 7688 24072 48144 Hex 1E08 5E08 BC10 Value RW Read Only Operation Mode Dec 7685 24069 48138 Hex 1E05 5E05 BC0A RW Loop 1 Trend View Sample Rate Dec 9000 25384 50768 Hex 2328 6328 C650 1 to 9999. Default is 10 0 Operation Mode Read/Write 1 Operation Mode Read Only Value Read Only Operation Mode 0 Operation Mode Read/Write 1 Operation Mode Read Only Value RW Profiler Control Mode Entry Passcode Trend Sample Interval For Loop 1 0 Every Second 1 Every 2 Seconds 2 Every 5 Seconds 3 Every 10 Seconds 4 Every 15 Seconds 5 Every 30 Seconds 6 Every Minute 7 Every 2 Minutes 8 Every 5 Minutes 9 Every 10 Minutes 10 Every 15 Minutes 11 Every 30 Minutes 163 Loop 1 Trend View Data Value Dec 9001 25385 50770 Hex 2329 6329 C652 RW Loop 1 Trend View in Operator Mode Dec 9007 25391 50782 Hex 232F 632F C65E RW Loop 2 Trend View Sample Rate Dec 9010 25394 50788 Hex 2332 6332 C664 Values to Display in Loop 1 Trend View 1 Process Variable Only 2 Process Variable and Setpoint 3 Max & Min Process Value Since Last Sample Value Trend View for Loop 1 Visible in Operator Mode 0 No 1 Yes Value RW Loop 2 Trend View Data Trend Sample Interval For Loop 2 0 Every Second 1 Every 2 Seconds 2 Every 5 Seconds 3 Every 10 Seconds 4 Every 15 Seconds 5 Every 30 Seconds 6 Every Minute 7 Every 2 Minutes 8 Every 5 Minutes 9 Every 10 Minutes 10 Every 15 Minutes 11 Every 30 Minutes Value Dec 9011 25395 50790 Hex 2333 6333 C666 RW Loop 2 Trend View in Operator Mode Dec 9017 25401 50802 Hex 2339 6339 C672 RW Values to Display in Loop 2 Trend View 1 Process Variable Only 2 Process Variable and Setpoint 3 Max & Min Process Value Since Last Sample Value Trend View for Loop 2 Visible in Operator Mode 0 No 1 Yes Instrument Data Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Values & Description Serial Number 1 Serial Number (Part 1) Dec 210 16594 33188 Hex 00D2 40D2 81A4 RO The first 4 digits of the instrument’s Serial number. Serial Number 2 Serial Number (Part 2) Dec 211 16595 33190 Hex 00D3 40D3 81A6 RO The first 5 to 8 digits of the instrument’s Serial number. Serial Number 3 Serial Number (Part 3) Dec 212 16596 33192 Hex 00D4 40D4 81A8 RO The digits 9 to 11 of the instrument’s Serial number. 164 Serial Number 4 Serial Number (Part 4) Dec 213 16597 33194 Hex 00D5 40D5 81AA RO The digits 12 to 14 of the instrument’s Serial number. Manufacture Day Day of Manufacture Dec 370 16754 33508 Hex 0172 4172 82E4 RO Date of manufacture – 1 to 31 (day of month) Manufacture Month Month of Manufacture Dec 371 16755 33510 Hex 0173 4173 82E6 RO Month of manufacture – 1 to 12 Manufacture Year Year of Manufacture Dec 372 16756 33512 Hex 0174 4174 82E8 RO USB Option Fitted 4 digit number = Year of manufacture (e.g. 2013) Value Dec 7503 23887 47774 Hex 1D4F 5D4F BA9E RO Data Recorder Fitted USB Option 0 Not Fitted 1 Fitted Value Dec 7553 23937 47874 Hex 1D81 5D81 BB02 RO Profiler Enabled Data Recorder Fitted 0 Not Fitted 1 Fitted Value Dec 8199 24583 49166 Hex 2007 6007 C00E RO Profiler Feature Enabled 0 Profiler Not Enabled 1 Profiler Enabled Software PRL Product Revions Label (Firmware) Dec 208 16592 33184 Hex 00D0 40D0 81A0 RO A 4 character ASCII string incremented with each update. Starting 0x20 (space) & ending 0x0, (e.g “ 0P” is 20, 30, 50, 00) Hardware PRL Product Revions Label (Hardware) Dec 207 16591 33183 Hex 00CF 40CF 819E RO Firmware Type A 4 character ASCII string incremented with each update. Starting 0x20 (space) & ending 0x0, (e.g “ 02” is 20, 30, 32, 00) Product Firmware Type Reference Number Dec 217 16601 33202 Hex 00D9 40D9 81B2 RO A 6 character ASCII string starting with 0x20 (space) & ending 0x0, (e.g type “ 406A” is 20, 34, 30, 36, 43, 00) Firmware Version Product Firmware Revision Number Dec 218 16602 33204 Hex 00DA 40DA 81B4 RO A 6 character ASCII string starting with 1 or more spaces (0x20), (e.g type “ 3.0” is 20, 20, 33, 2E, 36, 30, 00) 165 Contact Details 1 “For Service” Contact Details - Lines 1 to 7 Dec 400 16784 33568 Hex 0190 4190 8320 RW Contact Details 2 Dec 401 16785 33570 Hex 0191 4191 8322 RW Contact Details 3 Dec 402 16786 33572 Hex 0199 4192 8324 RW Contact Details 4 Dec 403 16787 33574 Hex 0193 4193 8326 RW 404 16788 33576 Hex 0194 4194 8328 RW Contact Details 6 Dec 405 16789 33578 Hex 0195 4195 832A Note: The number of ASCII characters transmitted per line must be EVEN. If the text string you wish to send has an odd number, place an additional space character at the end. The space character is 20 hex. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Contact Details 5 Dec 7 lines of user definable text - 25 ASCII characters per line which can be read or written using Modbus functions 16 or 23. Example. To write “My Company Name” to line 1 send: [ADDRESS], 16, 01, 90, 00, 08, 10, 4D, 79, 20, 43, 6F, 6D, 70, 61, 6E, 79, 20, 4E, 61, 6D, 65, 20, [CRC] RW Contact Details 7 Dec 406 16790 33580 Hex 0196 4196 832C RW Profiler Control & Status Parameters Parameter Name & Register Address Integer Int +1 Float Access Values & Description Active Profiler Active Profiler Number Dec 8243 24627 49254 Hex 2033 6033 C066 RW Currently selected profile number (0 to 63) Active Segment Active Segment Number Dec 8244 24628 49256 Hex 2034 6034 C068 RO Profiler Control Commands Dec 8245 24629 49258 Hex 2035 6035 C06A Value RW Note: The Profiler Control Commands must be followed by a Profiler Control Confirmation Action command, otherwise the command will not be implemented. Profiler Control Confirmation Action Dec 8257 24641 49282 Hex 2041 6041 C082 The active segment number (1 to 244) of the selected profile RW Profiler Command 0 Do Nothing 1 Run the currently selected profile 2 Hold the currently running profile 3 Abort the currently running profile 4 Jump to the next segment 5 Release the hold 6 Exit profiler, return to controller mode 8 Select a profile to be run but not start it Value Implement Profiler Command 0 Do Not Implement Command 1 Implement previous Profiler Command 166 Enable Edit While Running Dec 8262 24646 49292 Hex 2046 6046 C08C Value RW Operator Access to Profile Control Dec 8260 24644 49288 Hex 2044 6044 C088 Operator Editing of Current Running Profile 0 Editing of running profile forbidden 1 Editing of running profile via Keypad allowed Value RW Profile Control From Operation Mode 0 Operation Mode profile control disabled 1 Operation Mode profile control enabled Prifile Cycles Run Profile Cycles Run Status Dec 8247 24631 49262 Hex 2037 6037 C06E RO Event 1 Status The Number of times the currently running profile has cycled Value Dec 8249 24633 49266 Hex 2038 6039 C072 RO Event 2 Status Status of Event 1 0 Event 1 Inactive 1 Event 1 Active Value Dec 8250 24634 49268 Hex 203A 603A C074 RO Event 3 Status Status of Event 2 0 Event 2 Inactive 1 Event 2 Active Value Dec 8251 24635 49270 Hex 203B 603B C076 RO Event 4 Status Status of Event 3 0 Event 3 Inactive 1 Event 3 Active Value Dec 8252 24636 49272 Hex 203C 603C C078 RO Event 5 Status Status of Event 4 0 Event 4 Inactive 1 Event 4 Active Value Dec 8253 24637 49274 Hex 203D 603D C07A RO Segment Type Status Status of Event 5 0 Event 5 Inactive 1 Event 5 Active Value Dec 8258 24642 49284 Hex 2042 6042 C084 RO The Current Running Profile Segment Type 0 No Segment 1 Setpoint ramping up 2 Step 3 Dwell 4 Held 5 Loop 6 Join 7 End 8 Setpoint ramping down Active Profile Name Name of Currently Selected Profile Dec 8259 24643 49286 Hex 2043 6043 C086 RO The name of the currently selected profile 167 Secondary Profile Status Value Dec 8232 24616 49323 Hex 2028 6028 C050 RO Secondary Profile Status of Selected Profile 0 Profile running 1 Input sensor break 2 Profile not valid 3 Controller in manual mode 4 Profile finished and maintaining last profile setpoint 5 Profile finished with control outputs off 6 Profile control has ended. Unit is Controller Mode. Delay Time Remaining Profile Delay Time Dec 8233 24617 49234 Hex 2029 6029 C052 RO The current start delay time remaining in seconds, before selected profile will begin. Current Profile Running Time Dec 8235 24619 49238 Hex 202B 602B C056 Current Profile Running Time RO The elapsed time of the current running profile in seconds since it began running. Current Profile Remaining Time Dec 8236 24620 49240 Hex 202C 602C C058 Current Profile Remaining Time RO The remaining time for the current running profile before reaching its end segment, in seconds. Current Segment Running Time Dec 8237 24621 49242 Hex 202D 602D C05A Current Segment Running Time RO The elapsed time of the current profile segment in seconds Current Segment Remaining Time Dec 8238 24622 49244 Hex 202E 602E C05C Current Segment Remaining Time RO The remaining time for the current profile segment in seconds Total Hold Time Total Hold Time Dec 8239 24623 49246 Hex 202F 602F C05E RO Current Segment Loops Run Dec 8240 24624 49248 Hex 2030 6030 C060 Total (accumulated) time the current profile has been held in seconds Number of Current Segment Loop-backs RO Total (accumulated) time the current profile has been held in seconds Profile Setup Profile Setup via Modbus Dec 8198 24582 49164 Hex 2006 6006 C00C RW Note: Refer to the Profile Setup Over Modbus information below for setting up profiles via comms 168 Profile Setup via Modbus Instruction Sequence to create a profile at a specified profile position: The information in this section is intended for advanced users writing their own software code. Most users will create or edit profiles using the instrument keypad, or using the the PC software (available from your supplier). Either method allows quick and easy editing of profiles. If this profile number is already in use then the profile header data is overwritten but the segments associated with it are kept. Note: There is a global block on profile creation or editing via Modbus while a profile is running. An attempt to do so returns the error code 0x15. 1. Determine which profile positions are being used by using the Command Code value PS (0x50, 0x53). This command will return a list of all the profile positions currently being used. The only profile related commands allowed while a profile runs are the Profile Control & Status Parameters in the previous section. 2. Choose a location that is not being used and write the profile header data using the Command Code value WP (0x57, 0x50). The profile number is echoed back by the instrument in the Edit Response Message. Advanced users can setup or edit profiles by writing to the Profile Configuration parameter at address 8198 (0x2006). This can only be accessed by using Modbus function code 23 (0x17). The instrument replies with a status message. When creating a new profile the steps below must be followed exactly, either to create a profile at the next available position, or at the position you specify. 3. Write the first segment using the Command Code value Code WS (0x57, 0x53). This command will fill the next available segment position and link it to the profile created in step 1. 4. Write the second segment, again using Command Code WS. This fills the next available segment position and links it to the segment created in step 2. Each message in the sequence includes a 2 byte Command Code that tells the instrument the purpose of the message, and therefore the meaning of the data contained in it. 5. Continue writing segments until the profile is complete (whilst remaining within the overall limit of 255 segments for all profiles combined). Each of these segments fills the next available position and links it to the previous segment specified. Instruction Sequence to create a profile at the next available position: 1. Create a profile by writing the profile header data using the Command Code value CP (0x43, 0x50). This starts the profile creation process by reserving a profile memory slot. The profile number is returned by the instrument in the Edit Response Message. 6. The very last segment of the profile must be one of the end type segments. Thereafter, no more segments can be added to the specified profile. To add a segment to an existing profile the insert segment command must be used. 2. Write the first segment using the Command Code value Code WS (0x57, 0x53). This command will fill the next available segment position and link it to the profile created in step 1. Instruction Sequence to edit an existing Profile Header 3. Write the second segment, again using Command Code WS. This fills the next available segment position and links it to the segment created in step 2. When a profile header is changed, the segments associated with it remain unchanged. They must be edited separately if required. 4. Continue writing segments until the profile is complete (whilst remaining within the overall limit of 255 segments for all profiles combined). Each of these segments fills the next available position and links it to the previous segment specified. 1. Determine the number of the profile to be edited. Use the Command Code value PS (0x50, 0x53) which returns a list of all profile positions/numbers currently in use. 2. Write a new profile header data using the Command Code value EP (0x45, 0x50). The profile number is echoed back by the instrument in the Edit Response Message. 5. The very last segment of the profile must be one of the end type segments. Thereafter, no more segments can be added to the specified profile. To add a segment to an existing profile the insert segment command must be used. 169 Instruction Sequence to read a profile The following rules apply when creating a profile over communications: 1.Use the command RP to read the profile header data • Profiles must always be terminated with an end segment. • Segments cannot be added after an end segment has been added. • All changes made to the selected profile are immediately saved in the instrument. 2. Use the command RS to read the 1st segment’s data 3. Use the command RS to read the 2nd segment’s data. 4.Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an end segment is reached. Creating or Editing a Profile Header Creating or Editing a Profile Header - Request (to instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument. Function Code 23 17 Read Start Address High Byte 32 20 Read Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte 0 0 Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 1 1 Write Start Address High Byte 32 20 Write Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte 0 0 Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 20 or 21 14 or 15 20dec / 0x14hex if creating a profile at the next available location. 21dec / 0x15hex if creating a profile at a specified location, or editing a profile. Byte Count 40 or 42 28 or 2A 40dec / 0x28hex if creating a profile at the next available location. 42dec / 0x2Ahex if creating a profile at a specified location, or editing a profile. Command Code High Byte 67, 69 or 87 43, 45 or 57 0x43hex (67dec) if creating a profile at the next available location. 45hex (69 dec) / 57hex (87dec) if creating a profile at a specified location, or editing a profile. Command Code Low Byte 80 50 Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R 170 Requires the multi read/write function. Note: The profile number is not included in the message when creating a profile at the next available position. Profile Name Character 21 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 2 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 3 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 4 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 5 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 6 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 7 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 8 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 9 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 10 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 11 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 12 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 13 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 14 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 15 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 16 A/R A/R Profile Start Signal High Byte 0 0 Profile Start Signal Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Start Time (Byte 4 - High) Profile Start Time (Byte 3) Profile Start Time (Byte 2) A/R (Floating point number) Profile Start Time (Byte 1 - Low) Profile Start Day High Byte 0 0 Profile Start Day Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Starting Setpoint High 0 0 Profile Starting Setpoint Low A/R A/R Profile Recovery High Byte 0 0 Profile Recovery Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Recovery Time (Byte 4 - high) Profile Recovery Time (Byte 3) Profile Recovery Time (Byte 2) A/R (Floating point number) The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the 16 characters of the profile name, e.g.: A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc. a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62 etc. Valid characters are 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus ß ö ( ) - and _. Note: Only valid characters from the instruments supported character set should be used. The space character (32dec / 0x20hex) is used to fill any unused characters at the end of the name. 0 = No delay, 1 = After delay, 2 = At Time/ day *2 only if recorder (RTC) fitted The time, in elapsed seconds from the start trigger, before a profile will begin if Start Signal =1 (After Delay) or seconds from midnight if Start Signal =2 (Time of Day) Use zero if Start Signal =0 (No Delay) 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday, 4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday, 6 = Saturday, 7 = Sunday, 8 = Monday to Friday, 9 = Monday to Saturday, 10 = Saturday And Sunday, 11= All Week. Use 1 if no recorder fitted. 0 = Current Setpoint, 1 = Current Process Variable Value 0 = Control to off, 1 = Restart profile, 2 = Maintain last profile setpoint, 3 = Use controller setpoint, 4 = Continue profile from where it was when power failed The Profile Recovery Time(before the recovery action will be used after power/signal returns). Entered as elapsed seconds. Use zero if no recorder fitted. Profile Recovery Time (Byte 1 - Low) Profile Abort action High Byte 0 0 Profile Abort action Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Cycles High Byte A/R A/R Profile Cycles Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Number of Loops High Byte 0 0 Profile Number of Loops Low Byte A/R A/R CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R 0 = Control to off, 1 = Maintain last profile setpoint, 2 = Use controller setpoint 1 to 9999 or 10,000 for “Infinite” The number of loops to be controlled by the profile: 1 or 2 The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message. 171 Creating, Editing or Inserting Segments Creating new segments is only possible when a new profile is being created (see above for instruction for creating a profile at the next available position, or at a position that you specify). An error is returned if the correct sequence is not followed. The Insert Segment command is used to add segments to an existing profile (one that already has an end segment). This inserts a new segment at the position specified. The Edit Segment command is used to alter segments of an existing profile. The segment number is in relation to the profile number, e.g. to edit or insert a segment at position 3 of profile 1 the segment number will be 3, and to edit or insert a segment at position 3 of profile 6 the segment number will also be 3. Creating, Editing or Inserting Segments - Request (to instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument. Function Code 23 17 Read Start Address High Byte 32 20 Read Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Read Quantity Of Registers High 0 0 Read Quantity Of Registers Low 1 1 Write Start Address High 32 20 Write Start Address Low 6 6 Write Quantity Of Registers High 0 0 Write Quantity Of Registers Low 16 or 17 10 or 11 Create Segment (WS) = 16dec / 0x10hex Insert Segment (IS) = 17dec / 0x11hex Edit A Segment (ES) = 17dec / 0x11hex Byte Count 32 or 34 20 or 22 Create Segment (WS) = 32dec / 0x20hex Insert Segment (IS) = 34dec / 0x22hex Edit A Segment (ES) = 34dec / 0x22hex Command Code High Byte 87, 69 or 73 57, 45 or 49 Create Segment (WS) = 87dec / 0x57hex Insert Segment (IS) = 73dec / 0x49hex Edit A Segment (ES) = 69dec / 0x45hex. Command Code Low Byte 83 53 Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R Segment Position High Byte A/R A/R Segment Position Low Byte A/R A/R Segment Type High Byte 0 0 Segment Type Low Byte A/R A/R Requires the multi read/write function. Profile number to place this segment in (IS, ES) or append to (WS) Note: The Segment Position is not included in the message when creating a segment at the next available position. 0 = Ramp Time, 1 = Ramp Rate* 2 = Step, 3 = Dwell, 4 = Hold, 5 = Loop 6 = Join, 7 = End, 8 = Repeat sequence then end (*1 is not valid for 2 loop profiles) Segment Info A (Byte 4 - High) Segment Info A (Byte 3) Segment Info A (Byte 2) A/R (Floating point number) The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info A depends on the type of segment it relates to. See below. A/R (Floating point number) The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info B depends on the type of segment it relates to. See below. Segment Info A (Byte 1 - Low) Segment Info B (Byte 4 - High) Segment Info B (Byte 3) Segment Info B (Byte 2) Segment Info B (Byte 1 - Low) 172 Auto Hold Type Loop 1 High Byte A/R A/R Auto Hold Type Loop 1 Low Byte A/R A/R 0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP, 2 = Hold below SP, 3 = Hold above & below SP Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 4 - High) Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 3) A/R (Floating point number) Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 2) The distance loop 1 can be way from setpoint before Auto-Hold activates. Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 1 - Low) Events High Byte 0 0 Events Low Byte A/R A/R The status of the five events are defined by the lowest 5 bits of the low byte. A bit value of 1 signifies the event is on. Bit 0 = event 1, bit 1 = event 2, bit 2 = event 3 bit 3 = event 4 and bit 4 = event 5. Segment Info B Loop 1 (Byte 4 - High) Segment Info B Loop 1 (Byte 3) A/R (Floating point number) Segment Info B Loop 1 (Byte 2) Segment Info B Loop 1 (Byte 1 - Low) Auto Hold Type Loop 2 High Byte A/R A/R Auto Hold Type Loop 2 Low Byte A/R A/R The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info B depends on the type of segment it relates to. See below. (write 0 for single loop profiles) 0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP, 2 = Hold below SP,3 - Hold above and below SP (write 0 for single loop profiles). Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 4 - High) Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 3) A/R (Floating point number) Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 2) The distance loop 2 can be way from setpoint before Auto-Hold activates. Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 1 - Low) CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R Segment Data The Segment Data is included in the command message when creating, editing or inserting segments (see above). It is provided in two parts (Segment Info A and B). The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info A and B depends on the type of segment it relates to. Null is shown for unused data, these data values should be set to zero when writing the segment data. Segment Info Segment Type A B Ramp Time Time Target setpoint Ramp to the target setpoint “B” in the time “A” Ramp Rate Ramp rate Target setpoint Ramp to the target setpoint “B” at the ramp rate “A” Step Null (0) Target setpoint Step to a target setpoint “B” Dwell Dwell time Null (0) Stay at the current setpoint for a period of time “A” Hold 0 = Operator Null (0) Wait for the operator to release the hold 1 = Time of day Start Time 2 = Digital input Null (0) 173 Description Wait until time of the day “B” in seconds since midnight (recorder only). Wait for digital input signal Loop Number of times to repeat 1 to 9999 Segment number Null (0) Profile number On completion of this profile jump run profile “B” 0 = Control off Null (0) Turn off all control outputs on the loop(s) controlled by the profile. Doesn't affect loop 2 on single loop profiles. 1 = Maintain profile setpoint Null (0) Stay at the final setpoint of the profile 2 = Use controller setpoint Null (0) Use the active controller setpoint (e.g. Main or Alternate as selected). This exits from Profiler Mode back to Controller Mode. Number of times to repeat sequence Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times, then turn off the control outputs Join End Loop to the specified segment number “B” from this point. Repeat this “A” times. Note: Only segments below the current segment can be entered. Two “loop-backs” must not cross each other. Repeat Sequence then End 0 = Outputs off 1 = Maintain profile setpoint Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times, then hold the last profile setpoint. 2 = Use controller setpoint Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times, then use the active controller setpoint (e.g. Main or Alternate as selected). This exits from Profiler Mode back to Controller Mode. The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message. Deleting All or Single Profiles An individual profile can be deleted, or all profiles can be deleted with a single message. Deleting a profile removes the header of the specified profile and any segments associated with it. Delete all profiles wipes all profiles and segments from the instrument. Delete Profiles - Request (to instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument. Function Code 23 17 Read Start Address High Byte 32 20 Read Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Read Quantity Of Registers High 0 0 Read Quantity Of Registers Low 1 1 Write Start Address High 32 20 Write Start Address Low 6 6 Requires the multi read/write function. Write Quantity Of Registers High 0 0 Write Quantity Of Registers Low 02 or 01 02 or 01 Delete A Profile (DP) = 02dec / 0x02hex Delete All Profiles (DA) = 01dec / 0x01hex Byte Count 04 or 02 04 or 02 Delete A Profile (DP) = 04dec / 0x04hex Delete All Profiles (DA) = 02dec / 0x02hex 174 Command Code High Byte 68 44 Command Code Low Byte 80 or 65 50 or 41 Delete A Profile (DP) = 80dec / 0x50hex Delete All Profiles (DA) = 65dec / 0x41hex Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R Note: The profile number is not included in the message when deleting all profiles. CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message. Deleting a Segment The delete segment command deletes the specified segment from the specified profile. The following segments are moved up one place in the profile (e.g. if segment 6 is deleted segment 7 becomes segment 6). Delete a Segment - Request (to instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument. Function Code 23 17 Read Start Address High Byte 32 20 Read Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Read Quantity Of Registers High 0 0 Read Quantity Of Registers Low 1 1 Write Start Address High 32 20 Write Start Address Low 6 6 Write Quantity Of Registers High 0 0 Write Quantity Of Registers Low 02 or 01 02 or 01 Byte Count 04 or 02 04 or 02 Command Code High Byte 68 44 Command Code Low Byte 83 53 Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R Requires the multi read/write function. The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message. 175 Get Segments Remaining Returns the number of unused segments remaining in the instrument. The number will be between 0 and 255, depending on how many have been used in the profiles so far created. Get Segments Remaining - Request (to instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument. Function Code 23 17 Read Start Address High Byte 32 20 Read Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Read Quantity Of Registers High 0 0 Read Quantity Of Registers Low 1 1 Write Start Address High 32 20 Write Start Address Low 6 6 Write Quantity Of Registers High 0 0 Write Quantity Of Registers Low 1 1 Byte Count 2 2 Command Code High Byte 83 53 Command Code Low Byte 82 52 CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R Requires the multi read/write function. The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message. Edit Response Message from Instrument The instrument replies to each profile or segment creation, edit or delete message with an Edit Response Message. The same format is used when replying to the Get Segments Remaining request. Edit Response Message - Response (to instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument Function Code 23 17 Byte Count 2 2 Command Code High Byte A/R A/R Command Code Low Byte A/R A/R CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R The multi read/write function Two data bytes containing the Command Response data (see below) The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message. 176 Command Response Data The data contained in the Edit Response Message returned after each profile or segment edit message is shown below. The data seen can be an error code, the number of unused segments or the profile number following a successful profile header creation/edit. The error code shown will be as appropriate for the request message and instrument status. Response Command Response Name Low Byte High Byte Description Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument. Profile Number A/R A/R The number of the profile created or edited Segments Remaining A/R A/R The number of unused segments remaining Command Successfully 0x4F 0x4B The command requested was executed without error Command Not Recognized 0xFF 0xFF The command is not recognized Profile Number Invalid 0xF0 0x00 The profile number specified is not available. Profile Name Invalid 0xF0 0x01 The profile name/characters are not valid Start Signal Invalid 0xF0 0x02 The start signal is not recognized Start Time Invalid 0xF0 0x03 The specified time is not within range Start Day Invalid 0xF0 0x04 The specified day is not recognized Starting Setpoint Invalid 0xF0 0x05 The specified starting setpoint is not recognized Profile Recovery Invalid 0xF0 0x06 The profile recovery is not recognized Recovery Time Invalid 0xF0 0x07 The recovery time is not within limits Abort Action Invalid 0xF0 0x08 The abort action is not recognized Profile Cycles Invalid 0xF0 0x09 The number of profile cycles is not within limits Segment Number Invalid 0xF0 0x0A The segment number is not valid for this profile Segment Type Invalid 0xF0 0x0B The segment type is not recognized Segment Info A Invalid 0xF0 0x0C Segment information A not valid for the type defined Segment Info B Invalid 0xF0 0x0D Segment information B is not valid for the type defined Write Length Invalid 0xF0 0x12 The number of parameters to be written are invalid for the function requested Segment Setpoint Clamped 0xF0 0x13 The setpoint value entered was out of bounds. It has been clamped within the units setpoint limits. Segment Not Written 0xF0 0x14 The segment has not been written Profiler Running 0xF0 0x15 The profiler is currently running so cannot be edited Loop 1 Auto Hold Value Invalid 0xF0 0x16 The auto hold value is not within input span Loop 2 Auto Hold Value Invalid 0xF0 0x17 The auto hold value is not within input span Invalid number of loops 0xF0 0x18 The number of loops is not recognized Deleting End Segment Is Invalid 0xF0 0x19 Deleting final segment (End, Join or Repeat) is denied Already Editing A Profile 0xF0 0x1A Finish editing the profile before starting another edit 177 Read a Profile Header Request & Response Sequence Returns the number of unused segments remaining in the instrument. The number will be between 0 and 255, depending on how many have been used in the profiles so far created. Read A Profile Header - Request (to instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument. Function Code 23 17 Read Start Address High Byte 32 20 Read Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte 0 0 Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 19 13 Write Start Address High Byte 32 20 Write Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte 0 0 Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 2 2 Byte Count 4 4 Command Code High Byte 82 52 Command Code Low Byte 80 50 CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R Requires the multi read/write function. Profile Number from 0 to 63 The instrument replies to this message with an Edit Response Message. Read Profile Header - Request (from instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument Function Code 23 17 Byte Count 38 26 178 The multi read/write function Profile Name Character 1 82 52 Profile Name Character 2 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 3 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 4 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 5 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 6 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 7 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 8 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 9 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 10 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 11 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 12 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 13 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 14 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 15 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 16 A/R A/R Profile Start Signal High Byte 0 0 Profile Start Signal Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Start Time (Byte 4 - High) Profile Start Time (Byte 3) Profile Start Time (Byte 2) A/R (Floating point number) Profile Start Time (Byte 1 - Low) Profile Start Day High Byte 0 0 Profile Start Day Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Starting Setpoint High 0 0 Profile Starting Setpoint Low A/R A/R Profile Recovery High Byte 0 0 Profile Recovery Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Recovery Time (Byte 4 - High) Profile Recovery Time (Byte 3) Profile Recovery Time (Byte 2) A/R (Floating point number) Profile Recovery Time (Byte 1 - Low) The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the 16 characters of the profile name, e.g.: A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc. a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62 etc. 0 = No delay, 1 = After delay, 2 = At Time/ day The time, in elapsed seconds, from the start trigger before a profile will begin if Start Signal =1 (After Delay) or seconds from midnight if Start Signal =2 (Time of Day) Is zero if Start Signal =0 (No Delay) 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday, 4 = Thursday, 5 = Friday, 6 = Saturday, 7 = Sunday, 8 = Monday to Friday, 9 = Monday to Saturday, 10 = Saturday And Sunday, 11= All Week 0 = Current Setpoint, 1 = Current Process Value 0 = Control to off, 1 = Restart profile, 2 = Maintain last profile setpoint, 3 = Use controller setpoint, 4 = Continue profile from where it was when power failed The Profile Recovery Time (before the recovery action will be used after power/ signal returns) in elapsed seconds. Is zero if no recorder (RTC) fitted - function not possible Profile Abort action High Byte 0 0 Profile Abort action Low Byte A/R A/R 0 = Control to off, 1 = Maintain last profile setpoint, 2 = Use controller setpoint Profile Cycles High Byte A/R A/R 1 to 9999 or 10,000 for “Infinite” Profile Cycles Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Number of Loops High Byte 0 0 Profile Number of Loops Low Byte A/R A/R CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R 179 The number of loops controlled by the profile: 1 or 2 Read a Segment Read A Segment - Request (to instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument. Function Code 23 17 Read Start Address High Byte 32 20 Read Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte 0 0 Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 17 11 Write Start Address High Byte 22 16 Write Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte 0 0 Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 3 3 Byte Count 6 6 Command Code High Byte 82 52 Command Code Low Byte 83 53 Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R Segment Number High Byte A/R A/R Segment Number Low Byte A/R A/R CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R Requires the multi read/write function. The instrument replies to the Read A Segment request as follows: Read A Segment - Response (from instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument Function Code 23 17 Byte Count 34 22 Command Response High Byte 82 52 Command Response Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R Segment Number High Byte A/R A/R Segment Number Low Byte A/R A/R Segment Type High Byte A/R A/R Segment Type Low Byte A/R A/R 180 The multi read/write function 0 = Ramp Time, 1 = Ramp Rate, 2 = Step, 3 = Dwell, 4 = Hold, 5 = Loop, 6 = Join, 7 = End, 8 = Repeat sequence then end Segment Info A (Byte 4 - High) Segment Info A (Byte 3) Segment Info A (Byte 2) A/R (Floating point number) The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info A depends on the type of segment it relates to. See below. A/R (Floating point number) The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info B depends on the type of segment it relates to. See below. Segment Info A (Byte 1 - Low) Segment Info B (Byte 4 - High) Segment Info B (Byte 3) Segment Info B (Byte 2) Segment Info B (Byte 1 - Low) Auto Hold Type Loop 1 High Byte A/R A/R Auto Hold Type Loop 1 Low Byte A/R A/R 0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP, 2 = Hold below SP,3 - Hold above and below SP Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 4 - High) Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 3) Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 2) A/R (Floating point number) The distance loop 2 can be way from setpoint before Auto-Hold activates. Auto Hold Value Loop 1 (Byte 1 - Low) Events High Byte 0 0 Events Low Byte A/R A/R The status of the five events are defined by the lowest 5 bits of the low byte. A bit value of 1 signifies the event is on. Bit 0 = event 1, bit 1 = event 2, bit 2 = event 3, bit 3 = event 4 and bit 4 = event 5. Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 4 - High) Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 3) Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 2) A/R (Floating point number) The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info B depends on the type of segment it relates to. See below. Segment Info B Loop 2 (Byte 1 - Low) Auto Hold Type Loop 2 High Byte 0 0 Auto Hold Type Loop 2 Low Byte A/R A/R Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 4 - High) Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 3) Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 2) A/R (Floating point number) Auto Hold Value Loop 2 (Byte 1 - Low) CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R 181 0 = Auto-Hold Off, 1 = Hold above SP, 2 = Hold below SP,3 - Hold above and below SP The distance loop 2 can be way from setpoint before Auto-Hold activates. (Always 0 when profile only controls a single loop) Segment Data The Segment Data is included in the response to a Read Segment request. It is provided in two parts (Segment Info A and B). The meaning of the data contained in Segment Info A and B depends on the type of segment it relates to. Null is shown for unused data, this can be any value. Segment Info Segment Type A B Ramp Time Time Target setpoint Ramp to the target setpoint “B” in the time “A” Ramp Rate Ramp rate Target setpoint Ramp to the target setpoint “B” at the ramp rate “A” Step Null (0) Target setpoint Step to a target setpoint “B” Dwell Dwell time Null (0) Stay at the current setpoint for a period of time “A” Hold 0 = Operator Null (0) Wait for the operator to release the hold 1 = Time of day Start Time 2 = Digital input Null (0) Number of times to repeat 1 to 9999 Segment number Null (0) Profile number On completion of this profile jump run profile “B” 0 = Control off Null (0) Turn off all control outputs. 1 = Maintain profile setpoint Null (0) Stay at the final setpoint of the profile 2 = Use controller setpoint Null (0) Use the active controller setpoint. Loop Join End Repeat Sequence then End 0 = Outputs off 1 = Maintain profile setpoint Description Wait until time of the day “B” in seconds since midnight (recorder only). Wait for digital input signal Loop to the specified segment number “B” from this point. Repeat this “A” times. Note: Only segments below the current segment can be entered. Two “loop-backs” must not cross each other. Number of times to repeat sequence 2 = Use controller setpoint Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times, then turn off the control outputs Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times, then hold the last profile setpoint. Repeat the profile sequence number “B” times, then use the active controller setpoint. 182 Read a Profile Name This command requests the name of a specific profile. The instrument responds with the name of the profile number requested. Read Profile Name - Request (to instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument. Function Code 23 17 Read Start Address High Byte 32 20 Read Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte 0 0 Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 8 8 Write Start Address High Byte 32 20 Write Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte 0 0 Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 2 2 Byte Count 4 4 Command Code High Byte 80 50 Command Code Low Byte 78 4E Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R Requires the multi read/write function. The instrument replies to the Read Profile Name request as follows: Read Profile Header - Request (from instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The ID address of the instrument Function Code 23 17 Byte Count 16 10 183 The multi read/write function Profile Name Character 1 82 52 Profile Name Character 2 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 3 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 4 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 5 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 6 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 7 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 8 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 9 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 10 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 11 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 12 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 13 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 14 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 15 A/R A/R Profile Name Character 16 A/R A/R CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R The ASCII codes equivalent to each of the 16 characters of the profile name, e.g. : A = 65dec / 0x41, B = 66dec / 0x42 etc. a = 97dec / 0x61, b = 98dec / 0x62 The space character (32dec / 0x20hex) is used to fill any unused characters at the end of the name. Read Profile Memory Status This command returns the status of the profile memory used. The response to this command is to return a table of all the profile numbers that are in use. A value of 0x00 indicates that the profile position is free and value of 0x01 indicates that the position is used by a profile. Using this command in conjunction with the read profile name command can be used to create a directory of profile numbers and profile names. Read Profile Memory Status - Request (to instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument. Function Code 23 17 Read Start Address High Byte 32 20 Read Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Read Quantity Of Registers High Byte 0 0 Read Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 32 20 Write Start Address High Byte 32 20 Write Start Address Low Byte 6 6 Write Quantity Of Registers High Byte 0 0 Write Quantity Of Registers Low Byte 1 1 Byte Count 2 2 Command Code High Byte 80 50 Command Code Low Byte 78 4E Profile Number High Byte A/R A/R 184 Requires the multi read/write function. Profile Number Low Byte A/R A/R CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R The instrument replies to the Read Profile Memory Status request as follows: Read Profile Status Read Profile Memory Status - Request (to instrument) Data Field Name Dec Hex Comments Unit Address A/R A/R The network address ID of the instrument. Function Code 23 17 Byte Count 64 40 Profile 0 Position 0 or 1 0 or 1 Profile 1 Position 0 or 1 0 or 1 A/R A/R Profile 62 Position 0 or 1 0 or 1 Profile 63 Position 0 or 1 0 or 1 CRC High Byte A/R A/R CRC Low Byte A/R A/R Profile Number High Byte etc...... 185 Requires the multi read/write function. For each of the 64 possible profile positions, a value of 0 is returned if the position is free, or 1 if the position is empty. 21 Glossary Active Setpoint Alarm Configuration The term Active Setpoint is used to describe the currently selected setpoint when the instrument is in controller mode. Controllers can use the Main local setpoint and/or the Alternate Setpoint. Only one of the setpoints can be active at any time. During profiler control, the setpoint value is controlled by the profiler function. A sub-menu of the configuration menu, used to adjust the alarm parameters (alarm types, values, hysteresis, minimum duration and inhibiting). Also refer to: Actual Setpoint; Alternate Setpoint; Controller Mode; Local Setpoints; Profiler Mode; Remote Setpoint; Setpoint; and Setpoint Selection. Alarm Duration Inhibit Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis; Alarm Inhibit; Alarm Operation; Alarm Types and Configuration Mode. An adjustable alarm configuration time. After an alarm trigger point is passed, the alarm is inhibited from activation until this time has elapsed. If the alarm trigger is removed before the time has passed (e.g. the process falls back below a high alarm value) the alarm will not activate at all. The time duration inhibit is not applied when an alarm condition ends. This parameter is in addition to the alarm activation inhibit. Actual Setpoint Actual Setpoint is the effective current value of the active setpoint. This will be different to the setpoints target value during setpoint ramps. The actual setpoint will rise or fall at the ramp-rate set, until it reaches its target setpoint value. During profile control, the actual setpoint value is controlled by the profiler function. Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis; Alarm Inhibit; Alarm Operation; Alarm Types and Configuration Mode. Also refer to: Active Setpoint; Controller Mode; Profiler Mode; Setpoint; Setpoint Ramp Rate and Setpoint Selection. Alarm Hysteresis An adjustable band through which the process variable must pass before the alarm will change state. The band is always on the “safe” side of an alarm point, e.g. a high alarm’s hysteresis band is below the high alarm value, and a low alarm’s hysteresis is above the low alarm value. Refer to the Alarm Hysteresis Operation diagram on the next page. Alarm Activation Inhibit Alarm Inhibit prevents unwanted alarm activation at power-up or when the controller setpoint is changed. The alarm activation is inhibited until a ‘Safe’ (nonalarm) condition is present. The alarm operates normally from that point onwards. E.g. if inhibited, a low alarm will not activate at power-up, until the process has first risen above the alarm point and then falls back below. This parameter is in addition to the alarm minimum duration setting. Also refer to: Alarm Duration Inhibit; Alarm Types; Loop Alarm; Alarm Operation; LSD; Process Variable; and Rate Of Change Alarm. Also refer to: Alarm Duration Inhibit; Alarm Types and Alarm Operation. 186 Inactive Inactive Figure 63. PROCESS HIGH ALARM Active Alarm Hysteresis Operation Alarm Value Alarm Hysteresis Value Process Variable Process Variable Alarm Hysteresis Value PROCESS LOW ALARM Alarm Value Inactive Inactive Active Alarm Value (from Setpoint) Alarm Hysteresis Value Process Variable BAND ALARM Setpoint Alarm Hysteresis Value Alarm Value (from Setpoint) Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Active Active Inactive Inactive Alarm Value (from Setpoint) DEVIATION HIGH ALARM Alarm Hysteresis Value Process Variable Setpoint Setpoint Process Variable Alarm Hysteresis Value DEVIATION LOW ALARM Alarm Value (from Setpoint) Alarm Inactive Alarm Inactive Alarm Active 187 Alarm Operation The process and control deviation alarm types are illustrated, together with the action of any associated outputs. Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis; Alarm Inhibit; Alarm Types; Band Alarm Value; Deviation Alarm; Latching Relay; Logical Alarm Combinations; Loop Alarm; Process High Alarm and Process Low Alarm. Output Off Process High Alarm Alarm Off Direct Acting Alarm Alarm Off Reverse Acting Alarm Output On Process Low Alarm Alarm On Direct Acting Alarm Output Off Process Low Alarm Alarm On Reverse Acting Direct Acting Band Alarm Reverse Acting Alarm On Value Process Variable Output Om Output Off Process High Alarm Band Alarm Output On Output On Alarm On Alarm On Process Variable Value Output Off Alarm Off Value Process Variable Output On Alarm Off Alarm Value Output Off Alarm Off Alarm Value Process Variable Output On Alarm On Alarm Value Output On Output Off Alarm On Alarm Output Off Alarm On Off Alarm Value Alarm Value Deviation High Direct Acting Alarm Value Deviation High Output On Alarm (+ve values) Alarm Off Reverse Acting Alarm (+ve values) Alarm Value Alarm (+ve values) Reverse Acting Process Variable Output Off Alarm On Process Variable Output On Output Off Alarm On Alarm Off Direct Acting Deviation Low Process Variable Output Off Output On Alarm Off Alarm On Alarm (+ve values) Deviation Low Process Variable Process Variable Alarm Value Output Off Output On Alarm On Alarm Off Alarm Value Process Variable Setpoint Figure 64. Alarm Operation 188 Alarm Types Auxiliary Input Lower Limit There are three basic alarm types, Process Alarms, Control Deviation Alarms and Event Based Alarms; plus some special condition alarms. Process Alarms are based on the absolute value of the Process Variable. If the PV rises above a high alarm value, or falls below a low alarm value, the alarm will become active. Control Deviation Alarms are based on the value of the Control Deviation error. If the PV is more than the high deviation alarm value above setpoint, or more than the low deviation alarm value below setpoint, the alarm will become active. Event based alarms activate when the condition for that alarm type is true. These can be Signal Break, Low Memory or Loop Alarms. Rate of Signal Change Alarm is based on the rate of change of the PV. If the rate of change is greater than the alarm value for longer than the Minimum Duration time, the alarm will activate. Control Power High and Control Power Low alarms are based on the output power from the PID control algorithm. When auxiliary input A is used to provide a remote setpoint (RSP), this setting defines the Alternate Setpoint value when the auxiliary input signal is at its minimum value (e.g. for 4 to 20mA, the value when 4mA is applied). However, the setpoint is always constrained by the setpoint limits. Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Auxiliary Input; Auxiliary Input Upper Limit; Auxiliary Input Offset; Remote Setpoint; Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit. Auxiliary Input Offset Used to adjust the value of auxiliary input A if it provides a Remote Setpoint. Positive values are added to the remote setpoint value, negative values are subtracted, but the setpoint is still constrained by the setpoint limits. Also refer to: Auxiliary Input; Remote Setpoint; Scaled Input Upper Limit; Scaled Input Lower Limit Setpoint Lower Limit and Setpoint Upper Limit. Also refer to: Alarm Operation; Band Alarm Value; Control Deviation; Control Power Alarm; Deviation Alarm; Loop Alarm; PID; Process High Alarm; Process Low Alarm; Process Variable; Rate Of Change Alarm; and Setpoint. Auxiliary Input Type Defines the type and range of the linear input signal for auxiliary input A. It can be mADC or VDC. This can be used as a Remote Setpoint input. Alternate Setpoint The instrument can use one of two setpoints (Main or Alternate). The alternate setpoint can be chosen from Local Setpoint 2 or a remote setpoint input from Auxiliary Input A if fitted. One setpoint can be chosen as the active at using the setpoint selection screen. Also refer to: Remote Setpoint and Setpoint. Auxiliary Input Upper Limit When the auxiliary input is used to provide a Remote Setpoint (RSP), this setting defines the value of the RSP when the auxiliary input signal is at its maximum value (e.g. for 4 to 20mA, the value when 20mA is applied). However, the RSP value is always constrained by the setpoint limits. Also refer to: Auxiliary Input; Local Setpoints; Main Setpoint; Profiler; Remote Setpoints; Setpoint and Setpoint Select. Auto Pre-Tune Also refer to: Auxiliary Input; Auxiliary Input Lower Limit; Auxiliary Input Offset; Remote Setpoint; Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Lower Limit. When the auto pre-tune is enabled, a pre-tune activation is attempted at every power-up (Standard PreTune activation rules apply). Auto pre-tune is useful when the process to be controlled may vary significantly each time it is run. Auto pre-tune ensures that the process is tuned correctly each time the process is started. Self-tune may also be engaged to fine-tune the controller. Band Alarm Value The amount of control deviation that is acceptable before a Band Alarm is activated. If the process variable is more than the value of this band from the actual setpoint, the alarm will be active. Also refer to: Pre-Tune; Self-Tune; PID and Tuning. Also refer to: Actual Setpoint; Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Control Deviation; Input Span; LSD and Process Variable. Automatic Reset - Refer to Integral Action Bar Graphs Auxiliary Input The instrument displays uni or bi-directional bar-graphs in the operation mode for loop 1 & 2 PID power (single control = 0 to 100%, dual control = -100% to +100%), control deviation (-5% to +5%) and % Recorder Memory Used (0 to 100%). In Profiler Mode, profile & current segment bar-graphs are shown (0 to 100%). A secondary linear input module can be installed in option slot A to provide a remote setpoint input. Signals can be mA, or VDC. The 2nd Universal input can also be used as an auxiliary input if fitted. Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Digital Input; Linear Input; mADC; Remote Setpoint and VDC Also refer to: Control Deviation; Data Recorder; Display Configuration; Operation Mode; Main Menu; PID & Profiler. 189 Bias Communications Write Enable - Refer to Manual Reset. Enables/disables the changing of parameter values via the Serial Communications link, if a communication option such as Modbus RTU (RS485) or Modbus TCP (Ethernet) is installed. When disabled, communication becomes read-only. Bumpless Transfer A method used to prevent sudden changes to the correcting variable, when switching between automatic PI or PID and Manual control modes. During a transition from PI or PID to manual control, the initial manual power value is set to the previous automatic mode value. The operator then adjusts the value as required. During a transition from manual control to PI or PID, the initial automatic value is set to the previous manual mode value. The correcting variable level will gradually adjusted by the control algorithm at a rate dependant on the integral action resulting from the integral time constant value. A similar Bumpless transfer is used with Gain Scheduling when switching PID Sets. Since integral action is essential to Bumpless Transfer, this feature is not available if integral is turned off. Also refer to: Ethernet; Modbus RTU; Modbus TCP; RS485 and Serial Communications Configuration Menu A selection of sub-menus from which the user can adjust the major instrument settings. There are sub-menus for the Inputs, Control, Outputs, Alarms, Communications, Recorder, Clock, Display and Lock Codes. Configuration mode is entered from the main menu. An unlock code is required to access this mode. Refer to the Configuration Menu information in the Configuration & Use section. Also refer to: Alarm Configuration, Lock Codes, Clock Configuration, Control Configuration, Display Configuration, Input Configuration, Main Menu, Output Configuration, Recorder Configuration, Serial Communications Configuration Also refer to: Correcting Variable; Gain Scheduling; Integral Action; Manual Mode; PI and PID. Calibration Adjustment or correction of the displayed values relative to the actual measured values. Contactor Refer to the User Calibration section of this manual for calibration use and instructions. - Refer to Relay Also refer to: Multi-point Scaling and Process Variable. Continuous Control Cascade Control Current or voltage correcting variables using linear outputs (4 to 20mA, 0-20mA, 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V or 2 - 10V DC) for proportional control, PI, PD or PID control modes. On-Off control cannot be used with linear outputs. Applications with long time lags (e.g. indirect heat via hot water jackets) can be difficult to control with a single control loop. The solution is to split the process into two (or more) cascaded loops consisting of a Master and Slave acting on a common actuator. The 2-loop version with built-in cascade feature is ideal for this type of application, although it can be achieved with two discrete controllers, one with a setpoint retransmission output and the other with a remote setpoint input. Also refer to: Correcting Variable; Linear Output; OnOff Control; PD; PI; PID; Proportional Control; and Time Proportional Control. Control Configuration A sub-menu of the configuration menu used to adjust the parameters that relate to the control of the process (enabling control, auto/manual mode, control type and action, PID tuning terms, power limits, sensor break action, setpoint values and setpoint selection). The master controller measures the main process variable and compares it to the desired product setpoint. Its PID output becomes the slave’s effective setpoint (scaled to suit the process). This is compared the slave’s process input, and the controlling actuator is adjusted accordingly. Also refer to: Configuration Mode; Control Action; Control Enable; Local Setpoints; Manual Mode; PID; Setpoint Selection and Tuning. Refer to the Cascade Control section of this manual for full details. Control Deviation Also refer to: Master & Slave; Proportional Control; PID; Remote Setpoint and Setpoint. Control Deviation is the difference between the process variable value and the actual setpoint. The control deviation error is equal to PV – SP. This value can be monitored using the bar-graph (±5% of span). An excessive deviation warning can be given by using a deviation or band alarm. Clock Configuration A sub-menu of the configuration menu used to adjust the setting of the real time clock fitted with the data recorder option (e.g. date, time, and date format). Also refer to: Actual Setpoint; Alarm Types; Band Alarm; Bar Graph; Deviation Alarm; Input Span; Process Variable and Setpoint Also refer to: Data Recorder and Configuration Mode 190 Control Action Controller Mode This refers to the control loop(s) primary power output direction. Reverse action is typically used with heating applications as it increases the correcting variable as the process variable falls. If a secondary output has been configured, its action is always the opposite of the primary output. The normal operating mode when profiling is not fitted or it is not being used. Also refer to: Controller; Profiler and Profiler Mode Correcting Variable The output level from a controller used to adjust the process variable up or down, in order to remove any control deviation. This might be turning on a chiller in a temperature application or increasing the variable speed drive of a pump in a flow application. The level of correcting variable is commonly referred to as the controller output power. Also refer to: Control Type; Correcting Variable; Direct Acting Control and Reverse Acting Control. Control Enable/Disable The PID controller outputs can be temporarily turned off by disabling the control. When control is disabled the setpoint value is replaced by “OFF”. All other functions continue as normal. The control enable/disable function can be controlled from the control configuration sub-menu, via a digital input or optionally from the operation menu if enabled in the display configuration sub-menu. Also refer to: Control Deviation; PID; Primary Power Output Limit and Process Variable CPU Also refer to: Digital Input; Display Configuration; Operation Mode and PID This stands for Central Processing Unit and refers to the on-board microprocessor that controls the measurement, control, alarm; display and other functions of the instrument. Control Power Alarm Custom Display Mode A control power alarm is based on the output from the PID control algorithm. It can provide a warning if the PID output rises above or falls below a set value. This is often used in conjunction with the minimum alarm duration time so that very brief power output peaks can be ignored. The user can copy up to 50 Configuration Menu parameters into operation mode using the PC software. If enabled in the display configuration sub-menu, the configured parameters follow the normal operation mode screens. In this mode these screens are not protected by a lock code. Also refer to: Alarm Duration Minimum; Alarm Types and PID Also refer to: Control Configuration; Display Configuration; Lock Codes and Operation Mode Control Type Cycle Time This defines if a control loop has Single (unidirectional) or Dual (bidirectional) control outputs. Single outputs have a primary output only. This can drive the process in one direction (e.g. heat only, cool only, increase humidity etc). Dual outputs have both primary and secondary outputs which can force the process to increase or decrease (e.g. heat & cool, humidify & dehumidify etc). For time proportioning outputs, the cycle time is the period over which the controller averages the ON vs. OFF time, in order to provide the required correcting variable. Each control loop has separate cycle times for the primary and secondary control outputs. Shorter cycle times give better control, but at the expense of reduce life for any electromechanical control devices (e.g. relays or solenoid valves). Short cycle times do not harm SSRs. Also refer to: Control Action; PID; Primary Proportional Band; Process Variable; and Secondary Proportional Band. Also refer to: Correcting Variable; PID; Primary Proportional Band; Proportional Control; Relay; Secondary Proportional Band; Solenoid Valve; SSR and Time Proportioning. Controller An instrument that controls one or more process control loops. For each control loop it compares a process variable to a target setpoint, and attempts to make the process maintain the setpoint value by applying a correcting variable (e.g. turning on a heater or dosing with alkali if controlling pH). The controller uses proportional (P, PI, PD o PID) or On-Off control. Data Recorder The Data Recorder option can record the process values, setpoints, alarms and events over time. Recordings can be transferred to a USB memory stick or via the serial communications options for analysis in the PC software or spreadsheets. This option includes a battery backed-up real time clock (RTC) which continues to keep time when the instrument is powered down. Also refer to: Correcting Variable; Indicator; Limit Controller; On-Off Control; PD Control; PI Control; PID; Process Variable; Proportional Control; Profiler and Setpoint. 191 Refer to the Data Recorder Option section of this manual for full details. active. If an alarm is required if the control deviation is either side of the setpoint, consider using a Band alarm or a logical combination of a deviation high and deviation low alarm. Also refer to: PC Software and Recorder Configuration. Deadband Also refer to: Actual Setpoint; Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Band Alarm; Control Deviation; Logical Combination; Process Variable and Setpoint. - Refer to Overlap/Deadband. Derivative Action Digital Input Derivative action biases the proportional control output to compensate for the rate of change in the process variable. In a typical reverse acting application, derivative power is increased if the PV is rising, or decreased if it is falling. The combined proportional and derivative values adjust the correcting variable until the process stabilizes, at which point derivative power becomes zero. Increasing the derivative time increases the effect of derivative action. An input that can be driven to one of two states (active or inactive) by and external voltage or a contact opening/closing. Digital Inputs can be used to set the instrument in to different states. Typical uses are to select auto/manual mode, active setpoint selection, control enable/disable, profile selection, profile run/hold/ abort, hold segment release, recorder trigger, tuning start/stop and latching alarm reset. Digital inputs may be “inverted” so that they are inactive when on. Also refer to: Active Setpoint; Control Enable; Data Recording; Invert Digital Inputs; Manual Mode; Profiling and Segment Types. Setpoint Constant Rate Derivative Time Process Value Direct Acting Control Direct action is required for applications where the primary control output will be used to force the process variable down towards the setpoint. A typical application is a chiller. When the control action is selected as direct acting, primary proportional control outputs decrease the correcting variable as the process variable reduces within the proportional band, and primary OnOff outputs turn off when the process variable is less than the setpoint. The control action of a secondary output is always the opposite of the primary output. Power Time The Derivative Time Constant is defined as the time interval in which the part of the output signal due to proportional action increases by the same amount as the immediate output change due to derivative action, when the control deviation error is changing at a constant rate*. As the PV falls at a fixed rate, derivative action causes a step in power output (D%), and over time proportional power (P%) increases as the PV falls within the proportional band. *For the purpose of the definition, the increased power does not affect the PV (in reality it would begin correcting the control error). Derivative must be set to OFF if PI control is required, and it is not available if the primary output is set to on-off. Also refer to: Control Action; Control Type; Correcting Variable; On-Off Control; Process Variable; Proportional Control and Reverse Acting Control. Display Configuration A sub-menu of configuration mode used to adjust the display (color & contrast) and to enable access to selected parameters from operation mode. These are: Profile Control; Recorder Start/Stop; Recorder Status; Loop 1 & 2 Setpoint Select; Loop 1 & 2 Auto/Manual Select; Loop 1 & 2 Control Enable/Disable; Loop 1 & 2 Trend View; Loop 1 & 2 Setpoint Ramp Rate. It also has settings for language selection, to enable the custom menus or to make operation mode read-only. Also refer to: Modulating Valve; On-Off Control; PD Control; PI Control; PID; PID Sets; Process Variable and Tuning. Also refer to: Configuration Mode; Control Enable; Custom Display Mode; Display Language; Manual Control; Operation Mode; Profile Control; Setpoint Ramp Rate; Recorder; Setpoint Select and Trend Display. Deviation Alarm An alarm configured to activate once an unacceptable amount of control deviation error occurs. A positive value (deviation high) sets the alarm point above the current actual setpoint, a negative value (deviation low) sets the alarm point below actual setpoint. If the process variable deviates from the actual setpoint by a margin greater than this value, the alarm becomes Display Languages The instrument supports two languages. The main language is English. The alternate language is chosen at time of order, but can also be changed by downloading a new file via the PC software. Supported languages include English, French, German, Italian and Spanish. 192 Input Configuration Also refer to: Display Configuration; Operation Mode; Main Menu and PC Software. A sub-menu of configuration mode, used to adjust the parameters that relate to the process and auxiliary inputs (type, engineering units, decimal places, scaling, filtering etc.). Display Resolution The maximum number of digits that can be displayed and/or the maximum number of decimal places. Numeric values (e.g. process variable, setpoints etc) are limited to no more than 5 digits. The maximum number of decimal places is selectable from 0 to 3 places, but the overall 5-digit limit means that larger values reduce the number of decimal places shown. For example, values >99.999 will show no more than 2 decimal places (e.g. 100.00). Also refer to: Auxiliary Input; Configuration Mode and Process Input. Input Filter Time Constant This parameter is used to filter out extraneous impulses affecting process variable values. The filtered PV is used for all PV dependent functions (display, control, alarm etc). Use this parameter with care as it will also slow the response to genuine process changes. Also refer to: LSD. Effective Setpoint Also refer to: Process Variable. - Refer to Actual Setpoint. Input Range Engineering Units This is the overall process variable input range and type as selected by the Process Input Type parameter. This range can be scaled using the Scale Input Upper & Lower Limits. The Process Variable and Setpoint displays can assigned engineering units to describe the signals connected to the process inputs. The engineering units for linear inputs can be: °C; °F; K; bar; %; %RH; pH; psi or none. For temperature inputs (RTD or Thermocouples) they can be °C; °F or K. Also refer to: Input Span; Process Input; Scaled Input Lower Limit and Scaled Input Upper Limit. Input Span Also refer to: Linear Input; Process Input; Process Variable RTD and Thermocouple. The measuring and display limits, as defined by the Scale Input Lower and Scaled Input Upper Limits. The trimmed span value is also used as the basis for calculations that relate to the span of the instrument (e.g. proportional bands). Ethernet A networking technology for local area networks (LANs). Used to link computers and other equipment in order to share data or control such devices. If fitted with an Ethernet communications module in option slot A, this instrument can connect as a slave to a Modbus TCP master device via a wired Ethernet LAN connection. Also refer to: Input Range; LSD; Primary Proportional Band; Scaled Input Lower Limit; Scaled Input Upper Limit and Secondary Proportional Band. Integral Action Integral action biases the proportional control output to compensate for process load variations. Their combined values adjust the correcting variable, until the control deviation error is zero, at which point the integral value is held constant. Decreasing the integral time constant increases the integral action. Integral action is also known as “Automatic Reset”. Also refer to: Modbus TCP and Serial Communications. Gain Scheduling Gain scheduling bumplessly switches between pre-set PID values automatically at successively higher setpoint or process values. This allows optimal control across a wide range of process conditions, or if the controller is used in several different applications. It is especially useful if the process conditions change significantly during use, such as a process that becomes exothermic as the temperature rises. Response begins to control deviation step Also refer to: Bumpless Transfer; PID; PID Sets; Process Variable and Setpoint. Power Indicator An instrument that displays process values, but lacks control features. Typically, alarm outputs are available that will activate at pre-set PV values. Time Also refer to: Controller; Limit Controller and Process Variable. Integral Time 193 Also refer to: Auxiliary Input; Input Range; Linear Output; mVDC; mADC; PID; Process Variable; Remote Setpoint and VDC. The time constant is defined as the interval in which the part of the output due to integral action increases by an amount equal to the part of the output due to the proportional action, when the control deviation is unchanging*. For example, if a step change is made in the PV, the output immediately changes due to proportional action. The deviation error is integrated over time, steadily changing the integral output. The time it takes for integral power to change by the same amount due to proportional action (I% = P%) is the “reset”, or integral time. *For the purpose of the definition, the power output change does not affect the PV (in reality it would begin correcting the control error). Integral must be set to OFF if PD control is required, and it is not available if the primary output is set to On-Off. Linear Output A mVDC, mADC or voltage signal used to provide a continuous proportional control output or to retransmit the process or setpoint values to an external device. Also refer to: Continuous Control; Linear Input mVDC; mADC; Process Variable; Proportional Control; Retransmit Output; Setpoint and VDC Limit Controller A process protection device that can shut down a process at a pre-set “exceed condition”. Limit controllers work independently of the normal process controller in order to prevent possible damage to equipment or products. A fail-safe latching relay is fitted, which cannot be reset by the operator until the process has returned to a safe condition. Limit controllers are especially recommended for any process that could potentially become hazardous under fault conditions. Ensure you choose a limit controller with the correct approvals for local regulations (e.g EN 14597 etc) if it is to be used as a safety limiter. Also refer to: Control Deviation; On-Off Control; PD Control; PI Control; PID; PID Sets; Primary Proportional Band; Secondary Proportional Band; Derivative Action; and Tuning. Invert Digital Input Digital inputs may be “inverted” so that they are active when off and inactive when on. This is useful if the signal applied to the chosen digital input function is reversed in relation the digital input action. Also refer to: Digital Input. Also refer to: Controller and Latching Relay. Latching Output Local Setpoints Alarm outputs can be set to latch on when they become active. If enabled, an output will remain latched ON even if the condition that caused it to be on is nolonger present and it remains latched even if the unit is powered off-on. The output latch must be reset to turn it off. The latch reset signal can be via a digital input or using the front keys in the clear latched output screen. The alarm condition that caused the output to switch must have cleared before the latch can be deactivated. Local setpoints are target setpoint values for the control loops that are entered by the user and stored in the controller. The value of local setpoints can be adjusted within the setpoint limits using the front keypad, or via a serial communications link. The instrument can has two setpoints for each control loop. The main local setpoint and an alternate setpoint. The alternate setpoint can be a local setpoint or a remote setpoint from an auxiliary input. One setpoint at a time is chosen to be active using the setpoint selection. Also refer to: Alarm Types; Digital Input and Relay Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Auxiliary Input; PID; Remote Setpoint; Serial Communications; Setpoint; Setpoint Lower Limit; Setpoint Upper Limit; and Setpoint Select. LED Light Emitting Diode. Four LED’s are used as indicator lights (e.g. for the alarm indication, automatic tuning stats, manual mode etc). Their function and labels can be changed with the PC software. Lock Codes Also refer to: Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Automatic Tuning; Manual Mode and PC Software. The four-digit passwords required when entering the setup wizard, configuration mode, tuning menu, supervisor mode, USB menu, recorder menu and profiler setup menu. The correct code must be entered to gain access. If unrestricted access is required for a menu, its lock can set to OFF. Linear Input A mVDC, mADC or voltage signal usually used to represent the value of the process variable for one of the PID control loops. This can be any variable that can be converted into a suitable DC linear signal. Common examples are Humidity, pressure, pH or temperature. One or optionally two main inputs are available, and an auxiliary linear input can also be installed to provide a remote setpoint source. Refer to the Lock Code Configuration sub-menu in the Configuration Menu. Also refer to: Configuration Mode; Main Menu; Profiler Setup Menu; Recorder Menu; Setup Wizard; Supervisor Mode; Tuning Menu and USB Menu. 194 Logical Output Combinations lected alarms or profile events must be active to cause the output to turn on for direct acting outputs, or inactive for reverse acting outputs. Any suitable output may be assigned as a logical OR or logical AND output of the alarm and profile event conditions, and can be configured for reverse or direct action. If OR is chosen, any of the selected alarms or profile events that are active will cause the output to turn on for direct acting outputs, or inactive for reverse acting outputs (NOR). If AND is chosen, all of the se- The following table explains the concept of logical OR & AND outputs. Also refer to: Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Output Configuration and Profile Events. Examples of Logical Outputs OUTPUT Reverse-Acting OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OUTPUT OFF ON OFF ON ALARM 2 OFF ON ON ON ALARM 1 Direct Acting OFF OFF ON ON OUTPUT OFF ON OFF ON ALARM 2 ALARM 1 Logical OR: Alarm 1 OR Alarm 2 ON ON ON OFF Loop Alarm OFF ON OFF ON Reverse-Acting OFF OFF ON ON ALARM 2 OFF OFF OFF ON EVENT 3 Direct Acting OFF OFF ON ON OUTPUT OFF ON OFF ON ALARM 2 EVENT 3 Logical AND: Event 3 AND Alarm 2 Also refer to: Alarm Types; Control Type; Manual Loop Alarm Time; Linear Input; LSD; Manual Mode; On-Off Control; PD; PI; PID; Pre-Tune; Process Variable and Tuning. A loop alarm detects faults in the control feedback in the selected loop, by continuously monitoring the process variable response to the control outputs. If any alarm is setup as a loop alarm, it repeatedly checks if the control output is at saturation. If saturation is reached (0% or 100% power for single control type, -100% or +100% for dual control type), an internal timer is started. Thereafter, if the output has not caused the process variable to be corrected by a predetermined amount ‘V’ after time ‘T’ has elapsed, the alarm becomes active. The alarm repeatedly checks the process variable and the control output. If the process starts to change in the correct direction or the control output is no longer at the limit, the alarm deactivates. LSD The Least Significant Digit (LSD) is the smallest incremental value that can be shown at the defined display resolution. Also refer to: Display Resolution. mADC This stands for milliamp DC. It is used in reference to the linear DC milliamp input ranges and the linear DC milliamp outputs. Typically, these will be 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA. For PI or PID control, the loop alarm time ‘T’ can be automatic (twice the Integral Time value) or set to a user defined value up to 99m 59s. Correct operation with the automatic loop alarm time depends upon reasonably accurate PID tuning. The user defined value is always used for P, PD or On-Off control. The timer starts as soon as an output turns on with on-off control. Also refer to: Input Range; Linear Input; Linear Output; mVDC; Process Variable and VDC Main Menu The top-level menu that allows access to operation mode as well as all other menus. These are: configuration mode, profiler setup and recorder menus, the setup wizard, supervisor mode and the tuning and USB menus. Most menus require an unlock code to gain access. The value of ‘V’ is dependent upon the input type. For Temperature inputs, V = 2°C or 3°F. For Linear inputs, V = 10 x LSD The loop alarm is automatically disabled in manual control mode and during execution of a pre-tune. Upon exit from manual mode or after completion of the pretune routine, the loop alarm is automatically re-enabled. Refer to the Main Menu information in the Configuration & Use section. 195 Also refer to: Configuration Mode; Lock Codes; Operation Mode; Profiler Setup Menu; Recorder Menu; Setup Wizard; Supervisor Mode; Tuning Menu and USB Menu. output is set to On-Off control. If the process variable settles below setpoint use a higher value to remove the error, if the process variable settles above the setpoint use a lower value. For PID or PI control, typically set manual reset to approximately 80% of power needed to maintain setpoint, although lower values can be used to inhibit start-up overshoot. Integral action will automatically remove any control deviation error. Main Setpoint The instrument can has two setpoints for each control loop. The main local setpoint and an alternate setpoint. If used, the main setpoint is always a “local” setpoint. One setpoint can be chosen to be active from the setpoint selection screen. Also refer to: Control Deviation; Integral Action; ON/ OFF Control; PI Control; PID; Proportional Control; Process Variable; and Setpoint. Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Auxiliary Input; Local Setpoints; Profiler; Remote Setpoints; Setpoint and Setpoint Select. Master & Slave Controllers The terms Master and Slave are often used in relation to serial communications. This instrument can be a communications slave if an Ethernet or RS485 module is fitted. Manual Loop Alarm Time The loop alarm time used is manually set whenever a loop alarm is defined to have a manually set time, or if P, PD or On-Off control is selected. This parameter determines the duration of the output saturation condition after which the loop alarm will be activated. With RS485 it can also act as a setpoint master or slave in multi-zone applications. In this case, one instrument controls the setpoint of one or more others. This could be a simple master/slave application where the master controller transmits its setpoint to the slaves so that all operate at the same temperature. Alternatively, an offset can be applied to each zone using the slave’s setpoint offset parameter, so each is offset slightly from the master. Also refer to: Loop Alarm; On-Off Control; PD; PI and PID. Manual Mode Manual Mode operates as follows: The setpoint legend is replaced by the word MAN and setpoint value is replaced by a % output power value. This value may be adjusted using the keypad or via serial comms. The power value can be varied from 0% to 100% for controllers using single control type, and -100% to +100% for controllers using dual control type. Switching between automatic and manual modes is achieved using “bumpless transfer”. A similar master/slave relationship can be achieved if the master retransmits its setpoint as an analogue signal. In this case, the slave controllers must have matching remote setpoint inputs so that they can follow the masters’ setpoint value. It is possible to apply an offset to each zone if the slave has an RSP offset parameter. If not the remote setpoint input scaling can be adjusted to achieve the offset. Cascade Control is another type of Master & Slave application where the slaves setpoint is set using the master controllers PID power output. Auto/manual mode can selected from the control configuration sub-menu or via a digital input if one has been configured for this function. Alternatively, if enabled in the display configuration sub-menu, the user to switch between automatic and manual control from operation mode. It is possible to use a controller as a permanent “Manual Station” by permanently selecting manual control in the control configuration sub-menu. CAUTION: Manual Mode should be used with care because the power output level is set by the operator, therefore the PID algorithm is no longer in control of the process. Manual mode also ignores any output power limits, valve open/close limits and the control enable/disable setting. The operator is responsible for maintaining the process within safe limits. Also refer to: Cascade Control; Linear Output; Retransmit Output; Remote Setpoint; Auxiliary Input Offset; Serial Communications and Setpoint. Modbus RTU Modbus RTU is the serial communications protocol used on instruments fitted with the RS485 Communications module into option slot A. Alternatively, the Modbus TCP protocol is available if the Ethernet communications module is fitted. Modbus RTU is a Master/ Slave protocol. Only the Master may initiate communications. Each slave is given a unique address, and the message contains the Modbus address of the intended slave. Only this slave will act on the command, even though other devices might receive it (an exception is “broadcast commands” sent to address 0, which are acted upon by all slaves). The commands can instruct the slave to change values in its memory registers, or ask it to send back values contained in the registers. Each query or response message includes a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) checksum to ensure that it arrives uncorrupted. Also refer to: Bumpless Transfer; Control Configuration; Control Type; Operation Mode; PID; Power Output Limits and Serial Communications. Manual Reset Used to manually bias proportional outputs to compensate for control deviation errors due to process load variations. It is expressed as a percentage of output power. This parameter is not applicable if the primary 196 This instrument can act as a slave, or it can be a “setpoint master” over RS485. In this mode the unit continuously sends its setpoint value using broadcast messages. standard control mode (using PI control) instead of VMD mode. Also refer to Linear Outputs; PI Control and Valve Motor Drive Control. Refer to the Serial Communications and Modbus Parameter sections for more information. Motor Travel Time Also refer to: Modbus TCP; RS485; Serial Communications and Setpoint. The Motor Travel Time parameter is used in Valve Motor Drive control mode. It must be set to the time the valve takes to travel from one physical end stop to the other. This time is used by the VMD algorithm when calculating how long to energize the “Valve Open” or “Valve Close” outputs in order to bring the process on to control. It is important that the time set accurately reflects the time taken to travel between the physical limits, otherwise the control can be severely impaired. The motor travel time may be stated in your valve supplier’s specification or the valve can be timed from the fully closed to fully opened position. The controller can be placed in Manual Mode to assist with the timing of valve movement. Modbus TCP Modbus TCP is a version of the Modbus protocol for networks such as Ethernet, which support the Internet Protocol. It is available if an Ethernet communications module is fitted into option slot A. This instrument can only act as a Slave when using Modbus TCP. A master device initiates the communications, and the instrument only acts on the command if it has been sent to its own IP address. Modbus/TCP does not require a checksum to ensure that the message arrives intact. Apart from this, the data model and function calls used by Modbus TCP and RTU are identical; only the message encapsulation is different. Also refer to Manual Mode Enable Refer to the Serial Communications and Modbus Parameter sections for more information. Multi-Point Scaling If the process input is connected to a linear input signal, multi-point scaling can be enabled in the input configuration sub-menu. This allows the linearization of non-linear signals. The scale input limits define the values shown when the input is at minimum and maximum values, and up to 15 breakpoints can scale input vs. displayed value between these limits. It is advisable to concentrate the break points in the area of the range that has the greatest amount of non-linearity, or the area of particular interest in the application. Also refer to: Ethernet; Modbus RTU and Serial Communications. Minimum Motor On Time This defines the minimum drive effort needed to initiate valve movement if the valve was previously stationary. It ensures that frictional and inertial effects are taken into account when driving the valve, and reduces the actuator switching operations when close to setpoint. If the pulse required to position the valve would be less than the minimum on time, the output is suppressed. Each of these short pulse times is accumulated until their value exceeds the minimum on time, and the output is turned on for this time. Also refer to: Input Configuration; Linear Input; Process Input; Scaled Input Lower Limit and Scaled Input Upper Limit. When the control deviation error is inside a “neutral zone”, the PID algorithm inhibits integration in order to avoid oscillation. The neutral zone (symmetrical to setpoint) is: This stands for millivolt DC. It is used in reference to the linear DC millivolt input ranges of the main process inputs. These can be 0 to 50mV or 10 to 50mV mVDC 2 * PropBand * (MinOnTime / MotorTravelTime) Also refer to: Input Range; Linear Input; mADC; Process Variable and VDC Also refer to Motor Travel Time; Self-Tune and Valve Motor Drive Control. On-Off Control When operating in On-Off mode, the control output(s) turn on or off as the process variable crosses the setpoint in a manner similar to a simple thermostat. Some oscillation of the process variable is inevitable when using on-off control. The amount of oscillation is mainly defined by the process characteristics, but is also affected by the on-off differential setting. On-off control can be implemented only with Relay, Triac or SSR driver outputs. It can be assigned to the primary output alone (secondary output not present), primary and secondary outputs or to a secondary output only (with the primary output set for time proportional or continuous control). On-off Control is selected by setting the corresponding proportional band(s) to on-off. Modulating Valve A valve that can be positioned anywhere between fully closed and fully open by means of an incorporated motor. A typical application would be controlling temperature in a furnace heated by gas burners. The controller moves the valve to the desired position in order to control the gas flow. If the valve motor is directly driven with Open and Close outputs from the controller feeding power to the motor, valve motor drive (VMD) control mode must be used. Some modulating valves have positioning circuitry incorporated that requires linear (mA or VDC) signals to set the position. These use the 197 Also refer to: Continuous Control; On-Off Differential; PID; Process Variable; Primary Proportional Band; Secondary Proportional Band; Relay; Setpoint; SSR Driver; Time Proportioning Control and Triac. A sub-menu of configuration mode used to adjust the parameters that relate to the outputs. Available settings include linear output type & scaling, output usage and retransmit output scaling etc. Boolean logical OR / AND can be used to combine alarms and/or events to a single output. On-Off Differential Also refer to: Configuration Mode; Logical Output Combinations and Linear Output. A switching differential, centred about the setpoint, when using On-off control. Relay ‘chatter’ can be eliminated by proper adjustment of this parameter, but too large a value may increase process variable oscillation to unacceptable levels. On-off differential is also known as hysteresis or deadband. Overlap/Deadband The Overlap/Deadband parameter defines the portion of the primary and secondary proportional bands over which both outputs are active (called overlap), or neither is active (called deadband). This is entered in display units, and is limited to -20% to +20% of the sum of the two proportional bands. E.g. if the proportional bands were 2° and 8° (totalling = 10°) the maximum overlap or deadband would be ±2°. Positive values = Overlap, negative values = Deadband. The 5 PID sets for each control loop have their own overlap/deadband setting. Also refer to: Input Span; On-Off Control; PID Sets; Process Variable; Relay and Setpoint On-Off Hysteresis - Refer to On-Off Differential. Operation Mode The mode used during normal operation of the instrument. It can be accessed from the main menu, and is the usual mode entered at power-up. The screens shown include a main screen with bar-graphs, trend views, information about the process, alarms plus optionally, selection of auto/manual control, control output disabling. Recorder and profiler information can be displayed if these features are fitted. Up to 50 configuration menu screens also can be shown in operation mode if set to do so with the PC software. In this mode screens are not protected by a lock code. Overlap/deadband is not applicable if the primary output is set for on-off control or there is no secondary output. If the secondary output is set for on-off, this parameter has the effect of moving the on-off differential band of the secondary output to create the overlap or deadband. When overlap/deadband = OFF, the edge of the secondary output differential band coincides with the point at which the primary output is at 0% (off). The effect of the Overlap/Deadband parameter is shown in the following table Refer to the Operation Mode information in the Configuration & Use section. Also refer to: On-Off Differential; On-Off Control; PID Sets; Primary Proportional Band and Secondary Proportional Band. Also refer to: Bar-Graphs; Configuration Mode; Custom Display Mode; Display Configuration; Lock Codes; Main Menu; PC Software; Profiler Setup Menu; Recorder Menu and Trend Display. Output Configuration 198 OVERLAP WITH PID Output Power (%) Proportional Band 1 Proportional Band 2 Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 Overlap (positive value) DEADBAND WITH PID Output Power (%) Output 2 Process Variable Proportional Proportional Band 1 Band 2 Output 1 Output 2 Output 2 Output 1 Process Variable Deadband (negative value) Proportional Band 1 Output 2 Output 2 ON Proportional Band 2 = 0 Output 1 Output 2 OFF Output Power (%) OVERLAP & DEADBAND WITH ON/OFF Output 2 Output 1 Process Variable ON/OFF Differential Positive values Negative values Overlap/Deadband Figure 65. Overlap/Deadband 199 PC Software tered in the control configuration sub menu or via the automatic tuning. The PID sets might be configured for different applications, or to allow for differing process or load conditions that might occur in a single application. In these cases one set at a time would be selected as the “Active PID” set for that loop. The PID sets are also used by the automatic gain scheduling feature. The PC software can create, download and store instrument configurations & profiles. If the recorder feature is fitted, its recordings can be downloaded and analysed via the software. In addition, changes can be made to the instrument operation by adding extra screens, amending the contact details, alarm status labels or to the functions and labels of the LED’s. The software can download a new language file, change the start-up “splash screen” or configure the “Supervisor Mode” screens. An on-screen simulation of the instrument can be setup and tested on a configurable load simulator. Also refer to: Derivative Action; Gain Scheduling; Integral Action; On-Off Control; PID; Primary Proportional Band; Secondary Proportional Band and Tuning. PLC This stands for Programmable Logic Controller. A microprocessor based device used in machine control. It is particularly suited to sequential control applications, and uses “Ladder Logic” programming techniques. Some PLC’s are capable of basic PID control, but tend to be expensive and often give inferior levels of control. Refer to the PC software and use sections of this manual for full details. Also refer to: LEDs and Supervisor Mode. PD Control Also refer to: PID. Proportional and Derivative (PD) control combines proportional control with derivative action. It is similar to PID control, but without Integral action. Pre-Tune The Pre-Tune facility artificially disturbs the process variable normal start-up pattern, so that an approximation of the PID values can be made prior to the setpoint being reached. During pre-tune, the controller outputs full primary power until the process value reaches the “tuning point”. With Standard Pre-Tune this is halfway to the setpoint, but an alternative method allows the user to specify the process value to tune at. Pre-tune can be selected from the automatic tuning menu and will automatically disengage once complete. Also refer to: Derivative; Integral; PID Control; Proportional Control and Tuning. PI Control Proportional and Integral Control (PI) combines proportional control with integral action. It is similar to PID Control, but without derivative action. It is often used for modulating valves, dampers or motor speed control, where derivative action can sometimes cause instability or wear of mechanical components like valves, due to excessive movement. If self-tune is enabled, it will be suspended while pretune runs. A pre-tune can be configured to run at every power up using the Auto Pre-Tune function. Also refer to: Derivative; Integral; Modulating Valve; PID Control; Proportional Control; Tuning and Valve Motor Control. Refer to the Automatic Tuning section of this manual for full details. PID Control Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune; PID; Process Variable; Self-Tune; and Tuning. Proportional Integral and Derivative control maintains accurate and stable levels in a process (e.g. when controlling temperature or humidity etc). Proportional control avoids the oscillation characteristic of on-off control by continuously adjusting the correcting variable output(s) to keep the process variable stable. Integral action eliminates control deviation errors, and Derivative action counters rapid process movements. Power Output Limits Used to limit the correcting variable. Normally the control algorithm can set these outputs to any value between 0% and 100%. If this is undesirable in a particular application, individual settings can limit the primary power upper and lower levels and the secondary power upper and lower levels for each control loop. The upper limit values must be higher than the lower limits. These parameters are not applicable if that output is set for on-off control. Use with caution: The instrument will not be able to control the process if the limits do not allow the outputs to be set to the correct values needed to maintain setpoint. Also refer to: Control Action; Control Deviation; Control Enable; Control Type; Controller; Correcting Variable; Derivative Action; Gain Scheduling; Integral Action; Manual Mode; On-Off Control; PD Control; PI Control; PID Sets; Primary Proportional Band; Process Variable; Secondary Proportional Band; Setpoint and Tuning. PID Gain Sets Also refer to: Correcting Variable; On-Off Control; PID and Setpoint. The instrument contains PID 5 sets for each control loop, allowing the instrument to be pre-set for differing conditions. Each set has individual values for the proportional bands; overlap/deadband; on-off differential and integral & derivative times. These values are en- Primary Proportional Band The portion of the input span over which the primary output power level is proportional to the process variable value. Applicable if the control type is single or 200 Process Variable Offset dual. For dual control a secondary proportional band is used for the second output. The control action can be direct or reverse acting, switching the direction of change in power relative to the change in PV. - Refer to Calibration. Profile Control Menu Also refer to: Control Action; Control Type; Overlap/ Deadband; PID; Process Variable; Secondary Proportional Band; and Tuning. If the profiler option is fitted, a profile control menu is available from the main menu. It allows the user to select or run a profile, and then control that profile (run, hold, abort, skip to next segment etc.). Process High Alarm Refer to the Profiler Control Menu information in the Configuration & Use section. An alarm configured to as Process High will activate once the process has been above the high alarm value for longer than the alarm minimum duration time. Once activated, the level must drop below the alarm trigger point by more than the alarm hysteresis value before it will deactivate. High alarm activation is not affected by setpoint changes or the level of control deviation. Also refer to: Main Menu; Profile Setup Menu; Profiler and Profiler Mode. Profile Events Events are outputs that can be made active during profile segments. Any of the five events tracks can be configured to be active or inactive for the duration of each segment, from the profile setup menu. For end segments, events selected to be stay active until the unit is powered down or a new profile runs. It is possible to logically link event and alarms to outputs with a boolean OR or AND selection. Also refer to: Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Alarm Duration Minimum; Alarm Hysteresis; Control Deviation; Process Variable and Setpoint. Process Inputs The main inputs used to monitor the process value(s) being controlled. The input are “Universal”, supporting all common thermocouples, PT100 & NI120 RTDs, potentiometers and DC linear mV, voltage or mA signals. Linear inputs are compatible with any parameter that can be converted to a suitable electronic signal. They can be scaled into engineering units to match the process. The 2nd input can also act as an auxiliary input. Also refer to: Alarm Types; Logical Combinations; Profile Segments; Profile Setup Menu; Profiler and Profiler Mode. Profile Header The profile header contains information about how the profile starts and stops, the power loss recovery action, if the profile should repeat multiple times when run as well as whether the profile runs as a single or two loop profile. Also refer to: Auxiliary Inputs; Engineering Units; Input Span; PV Offset; Process Variable; Scaled Input Lower Limit and Scaled Input Upper Limit. Process Low Alarm n Value Refer to the Profile Components information in the Profiler Option section of this manual. An alarm configured to as Process Low will activate once the process has been below the low alarm value for longer than the alarm minimum duration time. Once activated, the level must rise above the alarm trigger point by more than the alarm hysteresis value before it will deactivate. Low alarm activation is not affected by setpoint changes or the level of control deviation. Also refer to: Profile Segments, Profile Setup Menu, Profiler and Profiler Mode. Profile Segments Segments can be ramps, dwells, steps or special segments such as holds, loop-backs, ends or joins. A maximum of 255 segments are possible, shared amongst up to 64 profiles. Also refer to: Alarm Operation; Alarm Types; Alarm Duration Minimum; Alarm Hysteresis; Control Deviation; Process Variable and Setpoint. Refer to the Profile Components information in the Profiler Option section of this manual. Process Variable (PV) Also refer to: Profile Events, Profile Setup Menu, Profiler and Profiler Mode. Process Variables are the parameter to be controlled. Each control loop monitors its PV via one of the process inputs. PVs can be any type that can be measured by these circuits. Common types are thermocouple or RTD temperature probes, or pressure, level, flow etc from transducers that convert these parameters into DC linear input signals (e.g. 4 to 20mA). Linear signals can be scaled into engineering units using the input upper & lower limits. Profile Setup Menu If the Profiler option is fitted, a profile setup menu is available from the main menu. It allows the user to create or edit the profile header and profile segments. Profiles can also be deleted from this menu. This menu is protected by a lock code. Refer to the Profiler Setup Menu information in the Configuration & Use section. Also refer to: Engineering Units; Input Span; Linear Input; Process Input; RTD; Scaled Input Lower Limit; Scaled Input Upper Limit and Thermocouple. Also refer to: Lock Codes; Profile Control Menu; Profile Header; Profile Segments; Profiler and Profiler Mode. 201 Profiler Ratio Control A profiler controls the value of the actual setpoint over time; increasing, decreasing or holding its value as required. This is used in applications where the rate of rise or fall of the process variable must be closely controlled, or where a value must be maintained for a period before moving to the next value. If the Profiler is fitted, up to 64 profiles can be created with 255 segments shared amongst them. These profiles can control the setpoints for loop 1 only or both loops. Each segment can activate/deactivate the five events. Ratio control is where part of the process is controlled in proportion to another part. For example, it could mix two materials at a desired ratio by adjusting the flow of input 1 in relation to the flow measured by input 2. The flow of input 2 may be controlled separately, but not by the ratio loop. If two process inputs are fitted, this instrument can be configured for stoichiometric combustion control, where the fuel-air ratio is controlled for a burner. Refer to the Ratio Control section of this manual for full details. Refer to the Profiler Option section. Also refer to: Actual Setpoint; Controller Mode; Profile Events; Profile Control Menu; Profile Header; Profile Segments; Profile Setup Menu and Profiler Mode. Also refer to: Controller; PID and Process Variable. Profiler Mode If the data recorder is fitted, a recorder configuration sub-menu is added to configuration mode. This is used to adjust the recorder parameters (recording mode, sample interval, recording triggers and values to record). Recorder Configuration This mode is entered when a profile is selected or run. The instrument will remain in profiler mode when the profile finishes or is aborted, unless the segment end type/profile abort action is set to “Use Controller Setpoint”. Also refer to: Configuration Mode; and Data Recorder Recorder Option Also refer to: Controller Mode; Profile Control Menu; Profile Segments; Profile Setup Menu; Profiler and Setpoint. - Refer to Data Recorder. Recorder Menu Proportional Control If the data recorder is fitted, a recorder menu is added to the main menu. This is used to control the recording manual recording trigger, delete recordings or to show the recorder status. This menu is protected by a lock code. Refer to the Recorder Menu information in the Configuration & Use section. Proportional control gradually changes the correcting variable applied from 0 to 100% of the available power as the process moves through the “Proportional Band”. If the control type is dual, both primary & secondary outputs available, equating to -100 to +100%. When the proportional bands are correctly tuned, the process is maintained at a steady value, avoiding the oscillation characteristic of on-off control. Proportional control is commonly used in conjunction with integral and derivative action to give PI. PD or PID control. Also refer to: Lock Codes; Main Menu and Data Recorder Relay An electromechanical switch operated by a solenoid coil. Relays are used for alarms or, on-off/time proportioning control outputs. The limited current capacity and switching cycles of the internal relays means that they are often connected to larger external slave relays/contactors which are capable of switching much larger currents and are easily replaced once worn out. A suitably rated RC snubber should be used to suppress noise generated as they switch (refer to the noise suppression information in the Electrical Installation section). Also refer to: Control Type; Correcting Variable; Derivative Action; Integral Action; PD; PI; PID; Primary Proportional Band; Process Variable; Secondary Proportional Band; and Tuning. Rate - Refer to Derivative Action. Rate of Change Alarm An alarm based on the rate of change in the measured process variable. If the PV changes at a rate greater than the alarm level, the alarm will activate. The rate of change must be above the alarm threshold for longer than the alarm minimum duration time before the alarm will change state (from on to off, or off to on). Caution: If the duration is less than this time, the alarm will not activate no matter how fast the rate of rise. Also refer to: Latching Relay; SSR Driver; Time Proportioning Control and Triac Remote Setpoint (RSP) The alternate setpoint type can be configured as a “remote” setpoint, where an analogue VDC or mADC signal applied to the 2nd input or auxiliary input A sets the controller setpoint value. The signal can be scaled to give the desired setpoint values at the inputs’ minimum & maximum values, but the setpoint is always con- Also refer to: Alarm Hysteresis; Alarm Minimum Duration; Alarm Operation; Alarm Types and Process Variable. 202 variable, such as in a heating application. With reverse action, primary proportional outputs decrease the correcting variable as the process variable increases within the proportional band, and primary On-Off outputs turn off when the process exceeds the setpoint. The control action of a secondary output is always the opposite of the primary. strained by the setpoint limits. This method can also be used for cascade or multi-zone slaves. Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Auxiliary Input; Auxiliary Input Lower Limit; Auxiliary Input Type; Auxiliary Input Upper Limit; Cascade Control; Linear Input; Local Setpoints; Master & Slave; mADC; Setpoint and Setpoint Select; and VDC. Also refer to: Control Action; Control Type; Correcting Variable; Direct Acting Control; On-Off Control and Proportional Control. Retransmit Output A linear VDC or mADC output signal proportional to the process variable or setpoint, for use by slave controllers in multi-zone applications or external devices, such as a chart recorder or PLCs. The output can be scaled to transmit any portion of the input or setpoint span. RS485 RS485 (also known as EIA-485) is two-wire, half-duplex, multi-drop serial communications connection. RS485 only defines the physical layer electrical specification, not the protocol that is transmitted across it. It uses differential signals (the voltage difference between the wires) to convey data. One polarity indicates a logic 1, the reverse polarity indicates logic 0. The applied voltages can be between +12 V and -7 volts, but the difference of potential must be > 0.2 volts for valid operation. RS485 can span distances up to 1200 metres using inexpensive twisted pair wires. Data speeds can be as high as 35 Mbit/s over 10 m and 100 kbit/s at 1200 m. This instrument supports 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps. Also refer to: Input Span; Linear Output; mADC; Master & Slave; PLC; Process Variable; Retransmit Output Scale Maximum; Retransmit Scale Minimum; Setpoint and VDC. Retransmit Output Scale Maximum Scales a linear output if it has been selected to retransmit a process or setpoint value. Retransmit scale maximum defines the point at which the output will be at its maximum value. E.g. for a 0 to 5V output, it is the PV or SP value corresponding to 5V. If this parameter is set to less than the retransmit output scale minimum, the relationship between the process/setpoint value and the retransmission output is reversed so that higher PV/SP values give a lower output. It is recommended that the wires be connected as series of point-to-point (multi-dropped) nodes (not in a star or ring format), with 120Ω termination resistors connected across the wires at the two ends of the network. Without termination resistors, electrical noise sensitivity is increased and signal reflections can cause data corruption. The master device should provide powered resistors to bias the wires to known voltages when they are not being driven. Without biasing the data lines float, so noise can be interpreted as data. Also refer to: Process Variable; Retransmit Output; Retransmit Output Scale Minimum; Scaled Input Upper Limit and Setpoint. Retransmit Output Scale Minimum Scales a linear output if it has been selected to retransmit a process or setpoint value. Retransmit scale minimum defines the point at which the output will be at its minimum value. E.g. for a 0 to 5V output, it is the PV or SP value corresponding to 0V. If this parameter is set to a value greater than that for retransmit output scale maximum, the relationship between the process/setpoint value and the retransmission output is reversed so that higher PV/SP values give a lower output level. Converters from RS232 or USB to RS485 allow computers to communicate over RS485. Repeaters can be used to extend the distance and/or number of nodes on a network. Also refer to: Modbus RTU and Serial Communications RTD Resistance Temperature Detector. A temperature sensor that changes resistance with a change in the measured temperature. This instrument supports PT100 (platinum, 100Ω at 0°C) and NI120 (nickel, 120Ω at 0°C) sensors. These have positive temperature coefficients (PTC) which means their resistance increases with higher temperatures. The temperature measured by the sensor can be displayed as °C; °F or K. Also refer to: Process Variable; Retransmit Output; Retransmit Output Scale Maximum; Scaled Input Lower Limit and Setpoint. Reset To Defaults This Configuration sub-menu selection returns all of the instruments settings back to their factory defaults. It should be used with great care, as the action cannot be undone. Also refer to: Input Range; Process Input and Thermocouple. Also refer to: Configuration Menu. Scaled Input Upper Limit Reverse Acting Control For linear inputs, this parameter is used to scale the displayed process variable. It defines the displayed value when the process variable input is at its maximum value (e.g. if 4 to 20mA represents 0 to 14pH, this Reverse control action is required for applications where the primary control output increases the process 203 Sensor Break Pre-Set Power parameter should be set to 14). The value can be set from -1999 to 9999 and can be set to a value less than (but not within 100 LSDs of) the Scaled Input Lower Limit, in which case the sense of the input is reversed. If a thermocouple or RTD is disconnected or breaks, the instrument detects the condition within 2 seconds, and sets the control loops output(s) to a value defined by the sensor break pre-set power parameter in the control configuration sub-menu. Process, band and deviation alarms behave as though the PV has gone high. Non-zero based linear inputs (e.g. 2 to10V or 4 to 20mA, but not 0 to 20mA) also detect sensor break conditions and set the same pre-set power value, but alarms behave as though the PV has gone low. For thermocouple and RTD inputs, it is used to reduce the effective span of the input. All span related functions work from the trimmed input span. It can be adjusted within the limits of the range, but not less than 100 LSD’s above the Scaled Input Lower Limit. Also refer to: Engineering Units; Input Range; Input Span; LSD; Process Variable and Scaled Input Lower Limit. Also refer to: Input Range; Linear Input; RTD and Thermocouple. Scaled Input Lower Limit Serial Communications Configuration For linear inputs, this parameter is used to scale the displayed process variable. It defines the displayed value when the process variable input is at its minimum value (e.g. if 4 to 20mA represents 0 to 14pH, this parameter should be set to 0). The value can be set from -1999 to 9999 and can be set to a value higher than (but not within 100 LSDs of) the Scaled Input Upper Limit, in which case the sense of the input is reversed. A sub-menu of configuration mode used to adjust the serial communications parameters (addressing, data rate, parity, master/slave settings and write enabling). Also refer to: Configuration Mode and Serial Communications Serial Communications Option For thermocouple and RTD inputs, it is used to reduce the effective range of the input. All span related functions work from the trimmed input span. It can be adjusted within the limits of the range, but not less than 100 LSD’s below the Scaled Input Upper Limit. An optional feature that allows other devices such as a PC, PLC or master controller, to read and change instruments parameters via an RS485 or Ethernet network. Full details can be found in the Serial Communications sections of this manual. Also refer to: Engineering Units; Input Range; Input Span; LSD; Process Variable and Scaled Input Upper Limit. Also refer to: Ethernet; Master & Slave; Modbus RTU; Modbus TCP; PLC; RS485 and Serial Communications Configuration. Secondary Proportional Band If the control type is set to dual, this is the portion of the input span over which the secondary output power level is proportional to the process variable value. The control action for the secondary output is always the opposite of the primary output. Set Valve Closed Position When valve position indication is used in valve motor drive control mode, this parameter defines the input value that is measured by the 2nd input when the valve is fully closed. The valve must be driven to its “Closed” end stop before setting this parameter. It must not be used to limit valve movement; separate Valve Close and Open Limit parameters are available for this purpose. Also refer to Auxiliary Input; Set Valve Opened Position; Valve Close Limit; Valve Open Limit; Valve Motor Control and Valve Position Indication. Also refer to: Control Action; Control Type; On-Off Control; Input Span; Overlap/Deadband; PID; Primary Proportional Band and Tuning. Self-Tune Self-Tune continuously optimizes tuning while a controller is operating. It monitors control deviation errors and uses them to calculate new PID values. If the controller is new or the application has changed, the initial values may be far from ideal, in which case pre-tune can be used to first establish new initial values. Selftune will then fine-tune these values. Self-tune is suspended while pre-tune is running. Set Valve Opened Position When valve position indication is used in valve motor drive control mode, this parameter defines the input value that is measured by the 2nd input, when the valve is fully opened. The valve must be driven to its “Open” end stop before setting this parameter. It must not be used to limit valve movement; separate Valve Close and Open Limit parameters are available for this purpose. Also refer to Auxiliary Input; Set Valve Closed Position; Valve Close Limit; Valve Open Limit; Valve Motor Control and Valve Position Indication. Refer to the Automatic Tuning section of this manual for full details. Also refer to: Control Deviation; Modulating Valves. OnOff Control; Pre-Tune; PI; PID; Setpoint and Tuning. 204 Setpoint Setpoint Selection The target value at which the instrument attempts to maintain the process, by adjusting its control output power (the correcting variable). There are two setpoints for each control loop. A main local setpoint and an alternate setpoint that can be another local setpoint or a remote setpoint input from an auxiliary input. One setpoint at a time is chosen to be active using the setpoint selection, or if the profiler is fitted it can set the actual setpoint value over time. Setpoint values are always limited by the setpoint limits. The setpoint select parameter in the control sub-menu defines whether the active setpoint will be the main or alternate setpoint. The choice of setpoint can also be made via a digital input or an operation mode if the selection screen has been enabled. Also refer to: Active Setpoint; Display Configuration; Alternate Setpoint; Digital Input; and Setpoint. Setup Wizard A sub-set of the configuration menu parameters chosen to allow easy setup for basic applications. Users with more complex applications should select the parameters they need directly from the configuration menus. The wizard runs automatically at the first ever power-up and exits to operation mode when completed. The wizard can be run manually from the main menu (requires an unlock code). An option to reset all parameters to default is offered when manually running the wizard. Also refer to: Alternate Setpoint; Auxiliary Input; Correcting Variable; Local Setpoints; Process Variable; Profiler; Remote Setpoint; Scaled Input Lower Limit; Setpoint Lower Limit; Setpoint Upper Limit and Setpoint Select Setpoint Upper Limit The maximum value allowed for setpoints, adjustable within the scaled input limits. The value should be set below any level that might cause problems in the process. If the value is moved below the current value of a setpoint, that setpoint will automatically adjust to keep it within bounds. Refer to the Setup Wizard information in the Configuration & Use section. Also refer to: Lock Codes; Configuration Menu; Main Menu; Operation Mode and Reset to Defaults. Also refer to: Input Span; Scaled Input Upper Limit; Setpoint and Setpoint Lower Limit. Solid State Relay (SSR) Setpoint Lower Limit An external device manufactured using two silicone controlled rectifiers in reverse parallel. SSRs can replace mechanical relays in most AC power applications. Some special SSRs can switch DC, but most cannot. As a solid-state device, an SSR does not suffer from contact degradation when switching electrical current. Much faster switching cycle times are also possible, leading to superior control. The triac option on this instrument provides is a small 1amp AC internal SSR. The SSR driver options on this instrument provide >10VDC time-proportioned pulses at the rate defined by the cycle time. When applied to the signal input of an external SSR, it causes it to pulse current from the line supply to the load. The external SSR can be any current capacity available. The minimum value allowed for setpoints, adjustable within the scaled input limits. The value should be set above any level that might cause problems in the process. If the value is moved above the current value of a setpoint, that setpoint will automatically adjust to keep it within bounds. Also refer to: Input Span; Scaled Input Lower Limit; Setpoint and Setpoint Upper Limit. Setpoint Ramp Rate Setpoint ramping is used to protect the process from sudden changes in the setpoint, which would result in a rapid change in the process variable. A rate is set at which the actual setpoint value ramps towards its target value, when the setpoint value is adjusted or the active setpoint is changed. The feature can be turned off by setting the ramp rate to “OFF”. Also refer to: Cycle Time; Time Proportioning Control; Relay; and Triac. Solenoid Valve To further protect the process, the initial value of the setpoint is made equal to the current process variable value at power-up, when switching back to automatic from manual control, from control disabled to enabled or after a sensor break is repaired. The actual setpoint will rise/fall from this value at the ramp rate set, until it reaches the target setpoint value. An electromechanical device, use to control the flow of gases or liquids. Unlike a modulating valve, a solenoid valve has just two states, open or closed. Usually a spring holds the valve closed until a current passed through the solenoid coil forces it open. Standard control mode is required with a time-proportioned or onoff output for this type of valve. Solenoid valves are often used with high/low flame burners. A bypass supplies some fuel at all times, but not enough to heat the process more than a nominal amount (low flame). A controller output opens the valve when the process requires additional heat (high flame). Also refer to: Active Setpoint; Actual Setpoint; Manual Mode; Process Variable; Setpoint and Setpoint Selection. 205 Also refer to: Modulating Valves; On-Off Control and Time Proportioning Control. tional Band; Relay; Secondary Proportional Band; Solenoid Valve; SSR and Triac. Supervisor Mode Trend Displays Supervisor Mode allows access to a lock-code protected sub-set of the main configuration parameters. Up to 50 configuration menu parameters can be chosen for inclusion in using the PC configuration software. Trend views are a standard feature on all models. They graphically represent recent process conditions for the control loops, showing the most recent 120 out of 240 stored data points. This data can be the process variable; process variable & setpoint (shown as a doted line) or the minimum and maximum value of the process variable measured since the last sample. The scaling adjusts automatically to the visible data. Any active alarms are indicated above the graph. The user can scroll the right hand cursor line back to examine all 240 data points. Their sample interval and data to display is set in display configuration. Refer to the Supervisor Mode information in the Configuration & Use section. Also refer to: Configuration Menu; Lock Codes and PC Software. Thermocouple A temperature sensor made from two different metals. The thermoelectric effect generates a small signal (a few microvolts per °C) relative to the difference between the “cold” junction (at the measuring instrument) and the “hot” junction. This does mean that the wires and connectors used must match the metals used in their construction. Other issues are their nonlinearity and limited accuracy. However, basic thermocouples are cheap to make and can measure a wide range of temperatures. While those made from more exotic materials can even withstand the very high temperatures found in furnaces. Unlike the optional data recorder, trend views do not retain the stored data if the power is turned off. Also refer to: Alarm Types; Display Configuration; Operation Mode; and Process Variable; Setpoint. Tuning PID Controllers must be tuned to the process in order for them to attain the optimum level of control. Adjustment is made to the tuning terms either manually, or via the automatic tuning facilities. Tuning is not required if the controller is configured for on-off Control. The color codes for the common types are shown in the Thermocouple Wire Identification Chart in the Electrical Installation Section of this manual. Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune; Controller; Derivative Action; Integral Action; On-Off control; PID; Pre-Tune; Primary Proportional Band; Self-Tune; Secondary Proportional Band and Tuning Menu. Also refer to: Input Range; Process Input and RTD. Three Point Stepping Control Tuning Menu Motorized modulating valves normally require a special “Three Point Stepping” control algorithm. This which provides an output to move the valve further open, or further closed whenever there is a control deviation error. When this error is zero, no further output is required to maintain control unless load conditions change. This type of control is use when the instrument is in Valve Motor Drive (VMD) control mode. The tuning menu can be accessed from the main menu. This menu is lock-code protected. It gives access to the pre-tune, auto pre-tune and self-tune facilities. These assist with PID tuning, by setting up Proportional bands, Integral and Derivative time values. Pre-tune can be used to set PID parameters initially. Self-tune may then be used to optimize the tuning if required. Pre-tune can be set to run automatically after every power-up by enabling Auto Pre-Tune. Also refer to: Control Deviation; Modulating Valve and Valve Motor Control Refer to the Automatic Tuning information in the Configuration & Use section. Time Proportioning Control Also refer to: Auto Pre-Tune; Derivative Action; Integral Action; Lock Codes; Main Menu; On-Off control; PID; Pre-Tune; Primary Proportional Band; Self-Tune and Secondary Proportional Band. Time proportioning control is accomplished by cycling the output on and off during the prescribed cycle time, whenever the process variable is within the proportional band(s). The PID control algorithm determines the ratio of time (on vs. off) to achieve the level of the correcting variable required to remove the control deviation error. E.g. for a 32 second cycle time, 25% power would result in the output turning on for 8 seconds, then off to 24 seconds. This type of output might be used with electrical contactors, solid state relays or solenoid valves. Time proportioning control can be implemented with relay, triac or SSR driver outputs. Triac A small internal solid state relay, which can be used in place of a mechanical relay for low power AC switching (0.1 to 1 amp AC). Like a relay, the output is time proportioned. However, as solid-state devices, triacs do not suffer from contact degradation so much faster switching cycle times are possible, offering improved control and reliability. A snubber should be fitted across inductive loads to ensure reliable switch off the triac. Also refer to: Control Deviation; Correcting Variable; Continuous Control; Cycle Time; PID; Primary Propor206 Valve Position or Flow Indication Also refer to: Cycle Time; Relay; SSR and Time Proportioning Control. The valve motor drive control mode does not require any kind of position feedback in order to correctly control the process. However, where potentiometer feedback or (mA or VDC) flow signals are available, they can be connected to the 2nd input to indicate valve position or flow level. The display is a percentage (0 to 100%) shown as a bar-graph in the main operator mode screen. Even if position feedback is provided, it is not used by the VMD control algorithm when positioning the valve, thus avoiding problems associated with faulty feedback signals. USB Menu A lock-code protected USB menu is offered from the main menu for the USB option. This allows the user to read or write files to a USB memory stick. The current configuration of the instrument can be copied to the stick, or the instrument can be reconfigured from a file created using the PC software or copied from another instrument. Profiles can also be copied from the instrument to a USB stick or you can upload pre-stored files created earlier from the PC software or copied from another instrument. Data recordings can be copied to the stick for later analysis on a PC. Also refer to Auxiliary Input; Bar-graph; Display Strategy; Open Loop VMD; PID; Set Valve Closed Position; Set Valve Open Position; Setpoint; and Valve Motor Control. Refer to the USB Menu information in the Configuration & Use section. Valve Open & Closed Limits Also refer to: Data Recorder; Lock Codes; Main Menu; PC Software and Profiler When valve position indication is used in VMD control mode, the valve limit parameters can be used to “clamp” the maximum and minimum valve positions. The controller will not attempt to drive the valve past these points. The position indication input must correctly scaled using “set valve open” and “set valve closed” before using the valve limits. Valve Motor Drive Control (VMD) This control mode is used when directly controlling the motor of a modulating valve or damper. It uses a 3-point stepping Valve Motor Drive control algorithm to open or close the valve. VMD mode is not suitable if the modulating valve has its own positioning circuit (use standard control with a continuous current proportioned linear output) or solenoid valves (use standard control with a time proportioned output). Also refer to Set Valve Closed Position; Set Valve Open Position; Valve Motor Control and Valve Position Indication. Also refer to: Continuous Control; Linear Output; Modulating Valve; Solenoid Valve; Three Point Stepping Control and Time Proportioning Control. 207 22 PC Software The primary function of the software is to create, download and store instrument configurations and profiles. If the data recorder feature is fitted, its recordings can be downloaded and analysed via the software. An additional software tool is available to set the IP address required for the Modbus TCP communications option - refer to the Network Configuration section. Using the PC Software There are several extra features that are only possible via the software. Changes can be made to the operation of the instrument by adding extra screens into operation mode, enabling and configuring a “Supervisor Mode”, as well as changing the contact details, alarm status labels or the functions and labels of the front LED’s. You can download a new language file or customize the controller by changing the start-up “splash screen”. The menus and button bar are used to select the main parameter screena or one of the other modes or functions. Hover the mouse over the parameter description or value to view a fuller description. Consult the comprehensive help (available from the Help Menu) for information about the general software functions. An on-screen simulation of the instrument can be setup and tested on a configurable load simulation prior to downloading the settings to an instrument. Menus Button Bar Functional Groups Parameter Address (hex) Mode Drop Down Description Parameter Values Value Range Figure 66. Main Parameter Screen drop-down list. Refer to the relevant sections of this manual for full information on the various instrument modes and parameters. The main parameter screen is used to change the configuration and other instrument settings. This screen also allows access to the Supervisor and Enhanced Operation Mode configuration screens from the Mode 208 The Button bar, Device and View menus are used to access the other software functions. View & Device Menus Instrument Simulation Parameter Configuration Profile Editor Trend Figure 67. Button Bar & View Menu Instrument Simulation The software has a fully functional and interactive instrument simulation that includes a configurable simulated process, allowing the instrument settings to be tested before use. Inputs are simulated in the top panel. A value (in display units) entered in INP1 & INP2 will override the values from the simulated processes or for a linear inputs, a mA or VDC value preceded by # (e.g. #12.0) can be used to verify the scaling. Enter F to simulate a sensor break. Tick boxes simulate the digital inputs Active analogue and digital outputs are indicated in the lower panel. The simulated instrument can also be accessed and configured by pressing its “buttons” with your mouse, or by using the 4 arrow keys on your keyboards. Figure 68. Chromalox 4081 & 4082 Instrument Simulation 209 Configuring the Connection Connection from PC to Bottom Configuration Socket The software communicates with the instrument using Modbus via the RJ11 configuration socket located on the underside of the case, or via the Ethernet or RS485 options if fitted. Refer to the wiring section for connection details. The configuration socket is intended for initial configuration before installing the instrument in the application. An RS232 to TTL lead (available from your supplier) is required to connect this socket to your PCs RS232 serial port or USB to RS232 adaptor. A front mounted USB port is available on some models; this can also be used to configure the instrument or transfer profile files, via a USB memory stick. When using the built-in configuration socket, set the communications parameters as shown here and in the following table. • Device connector = Configuration Socket • PC connector = the PC Serial Com port number you are connected to • Start and Stop bits = 1 • Data bits = 8. • Parity, Bit Rate & Address = must match settings in the table below Note: When uploading or downloading via the bottom mounted configuration port, the required software communication settings depend on the module fitted in slot A. See the table below. ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. The configuration lead/socket is not isolated from the process input or SSR Driver outputs. It is not intended for use in live applications. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or equipment damage. A communications settings screen is shown whenever the user attempts to connect to the instrument from the software. If the settings are not in-line with the information below, the software may not be able to communicate with the instrument. Slot A Module Slot A Empty Digital Input Ethernet Comms Auxiliary Input RS485 Comms Bit Rate 19200 19200 Parity None None 9600 None • Device connector = Bus • PC connector = the PC Serial Com port number you are connected to • Start and Stop bits = 1 • Data bits = 8 • Parity, Bit Rate & Address = must match the settings in the instruments own Communication Configuration menu. 210 1 4800 None 1 Must match the Communication Configuration menu settings. Connection from PC to Rear RS485 Communications Option When using the optional RS485 communications, set the parameters as shown here. Address 1 1 Connection from PC/Network to Ethernet Port Note: *An IP address must be set before connecting via Ethernet. Use the default address of 0.0.0.0 if your network uses DHCP, BootP or AutoIP or ask your network administrator for a valid address. When using the optional Ethernet communications, set the parameters as shown here. • Device connector = Bus • PC connector = Ethernet (bus coupler) • IP Address = Instrument IP address* • Port Address = 502. Most networks will assign the IP address automatically, but you can use the Lantronix XPort® DeviceInstaller™ tool if you need to assign or change the IP address manually. For the latest version, go to: www.lantronix. com/device-networking/utilities-tools/device-installer. html The supported data rates 10/100BASE-T (10 or 100 Mbps) are automatically detected. Changing the IP Address Connect the instrument to your network by plugging an Ethernet cable into the top mounted RJ45 socket. Run the DeviceInstaller™ tool from a PC on the same net- work. The tool should automatically find this and any other controllers on the network. If not use the search button. The existing IP and Hardware (MAC) addresses are shown for the instruments found. It is recommended to keep all other Ethernet device settings at the default values. If you do change the internal interface transfer speed or parity, matching settings must be made to the instruments Modbus data rate and parity settings in the communications configuration menu. Click the Assign IP button and enter the correct hardware address from the list (if necessary, confirm the number by comparing the hardware address with the number printed on Ethernet adaptor label). Note: You can enter any valid IP address, perhaps for use in another location, but if the number used does not match your existing network settings, further communication with the instrument will cease. At the next screen, choose whether to obtain the IP address automatically or to enter a specific address. For automatic addresses, select the protocols supported on your network (DHCP, BootP or AutoIP. For a specific address, enter the address, sub-net mask and default gateway information. Your network administrator will be able to provide this information. Press the assign button to confirm. 211 USB Memory Stick Folders & Files USB option also limits the file name to 8 characters plus the 3 digit .bct or .pfl extension. Longer file names will be truncated. If a USB flash drive is used to transfer files between instruments and/or the software, the files must be stored in specific DEVICE, CONFIG and PROFILE folders. When saving files from the software to the USB stick, always ensure they are saved to the correct folder. Local file storage on your PC can be in any location. The When saving a file, the data will be overwritten If the file name already exists. DEVICE – This folder must be located in the Root of the USB memory stick CONFIG – Configuration files (*.bct) PROFILE – Profile program files (*.pfl) RECORDER – Recorder log folders/files. These can be created or saved from the PC software. Instrument Configuration Main Parameter Adjustment The main parameter screen contains the configuration settings broken down into functional groups similar to the instruments’ menus. The parameters can be changed in the yellow Value column. Type in new values or select from the list offered. Invalid values will be highlighted in red (possible values are show to the left). Parameters are “greyed out” if they are inaccessible due the hardware not being fitted or if they are disabled by other settings. Once the required changes are made, the configuration can then be download to the instrument or saved to hard disk or a USB stick, with a .bct file extension. The file contains the device information and configuration parameter settings, including any supervisor and enhanced operation mode screens or changes to the LED functions. Transfer of comms settings and clock date/time are via optional tick boxes on the download settings screen. Profiles, splash screens language files and data recordings are not saved in the .bct file. They are uploaded/saved separately. When creating a new configuration with the software, the basic instrument type and the options fitted to it must be defined in the Device Selection screen. You can select these from the drop down lists or by typing the full model number in the Order number field. Note: It is important that the options selected match those fitted to your unit. Alternatively the complete instrument type and existing configuration can be uploaded to the PC from your instrument, via the configuration socket or serial communications. A previously saved configuration file can be opened from the file open menu or button. 212 Extending Functionality via Software LED Functions & Labels To define these screens, first select Supervisor Mode from the mode drop-down list, then select the functional group containing the parameter to be added. Highlight the parameter name and click the Add Entry button. The Move Entry Up and Down buttons are used to change the order which the parameters will appear in the instruments’ Supervisor Mode. Unwanted entries can be highlighted and deleted with the Remove Entry button. The allocated functions and descriptive labels for the 4 LED indicators can be changed with the PC software, replacing the default PRI; SEC; TUNE; ALARM functions. These parameters can be found in the LED settings section of the software’s Display Configuration functional group. LED 1 to 4 Configuring Custom Display Screens for the Extended Operator Mode LED LABELS (max 5 char.) Users can access a sub-set of the configuration parameters at the end of the normal operation mode if this additional screen sequence is defined from the software. Up to 50 parameters from configuration menus can be selected for inclusion in the screen sequence. If the parameter is normally displayed on screen with another parameter, both parameters will appear. Possible functions for each of the LEDs are: Loop 1 or 2 primary/secondary/valve control output indication (output ON = LED ON), or driving them from a logical OR combination of the alarm/profile event/digital inputs/ auto-tune status/manual mode. This logical combination can be inverted to create a logical NOR function for the LEDs. The user can create new 5 characters LED labels for the main and alternate language. It is not possible to configure custom display screens without using the software. To define these screens, first select Extended Operator Mode from the mode dropdown list, then select the functional group containing the parameter to be added. Alarm Status Screen Labels The titles “Alarm n” used in the alarm status screen can be replaced with the software. Two separate sets of 8 characters labels can be entered for each of the seven alarms. One label set is used when the main display language has been selected, the other is used when the alternate language is in use. Highlight the parameter name and click the Add Entry button. The Move Entry Up and Down buttons are used to change the order which the parameters will appear at the end of the normal operator screens. Unwanted entries can be highlighted and deleted with the Remove Entry button. Configuring the Supervisor Mode Note: Any parameters copied into the custom display screens are not password protected. They can be freely viewed and adjusted by anyone with access to the instrument keypad. The purpose of the supervisor mode is to allow selected operators access to a “lock-code” protected sub-set of the configuration parameters, without giving them the higher level configuration menu unlock code Up to 50 configuration parameters can be selected for inclusion in the supervisor mode screen sequence. If the parameter is normally displayed on screen with another parameter, both parameters will appear. It is not possible to configure supervisor mode screens without using the software. Functional Groups Mode Drop Down Add Entry Parameter List Remove Entry Move Up Selected Parameters Move Down Figure 69. Supervisor/Enhanced Operation Mode Configuration 213 Changing the Start-up Splash Screen Changing the Alternate Display Language The graphic shown during the instrument start-up sequence can be changed by selecting the Download Splash Screen option from the Device menu. Choose your new graphic file (most common graphic file types are supported). The chosen image will converted to monochrome and be rescaled to 160 pixels wide by 80 pixels high. For best results, the image should be simple and have an aspect ratio of 2:1. Complex graphics with multiple colors or greyscales will not reproduce well. A preview of the results is shown. Click the Download button to store it to the instrument. The alternate language can be changed by selecting the Download Language File option from the Device menu. Choose the correct file (language files have a .bin extension) and click the Open button to store it to the instrument. Ask your supplier for a copy of the latest language file. Profile Creation and Editing Select the Profile Editor from the button bar or view menu. An existing profile file can be opened from the file open menu or button, or uploaded from an instrument connected to the PC via the configuration socket or serial communications module. The new profile can be download to the instrument or saved to disk with a .pfl file extension. Take care to preserve any profile joins when editing or uploading profile files to an existing configuration. Joins are based on the profile numbers. Ensure profiles is uploaded to the correct location. New / Open / Save / Print Header Parameters Upload Profile Download Profile Header Values Profile Directory List Figure 69. Profile Editor – Header 214 Mode Drop-Down When downloading a profile to the instrument via the configuration socket or over serial communications, a list of existing profiles and empty profile slots is displayed. The user can select where to place the profile (a warning is shown if the profile will overwrite an existing profile). The number of available free segments is also shown. A drop-down menu switches between the Profile Header and Segment Data. Refer to the Profiler Setup Menu and Profiler Option sections for full details of the header and segment data. Header data includes a 16-character profile name, options for starting the profile after a delay or at a specific day and time, the starting setpoint, the action to take after a power/sensor failure or profile abort, the number of times the profile will run and if one or both control loops will be controlled. The segments are shown in Segment Data mode. The last segment type is either End, Join or Repeat Sequence, and cannot be deleted. The user can change any segments’ type and values, or insert additional segments before the selected one. A dynamically scaled graphic shows the setpoint(s) for each segment of the profile, with the current selected segment highlighted in red. The five profile events are shown below the graph If the option to upload a profile is chosen, a list of profiles in the connected instrument is shown. The user can select the required profile from the list. A directory of existing profiles in the instrument can also be requested. This allows one or all of the profiles to be deleted. Insert Segment Un-Zoom Segment List & Values Profile Directory Loop 1 & 2 Setpoints 215 Selected Segment (Red) Active Event Scaling Data Recorder Trend Upload & Analysis Uploading Data To analyse a recording file in the PC software, go to the File | Open Trend menu. Locate and open the .csv file. The recording opens with the analogue traces (process, power or setpoint values) in the main window at the top, and digital traces (alarm or events statuses) below. Recordings can be transferred to a memory stick using the optional USB Port, or they can also be uploaded directly to your PC or network with the software, via the configuration port or RS485/Ethernet communications if fitted. To upload from a connected instrument, go to the Device | Upload recorder Data menu in the software. Select a folder location and enter a file name when prompted, then click Save. Enter the communications parameters for your connection, and click OK to save the data in Comma Separated (.csv) format. Note: Analysis with the PC software is limited to 8 analogue channels, so only the first 8 will be displayed. The number of recorded alarms & events is not limited. The settings button allows trend data channels to be made visible/invisible, or change their color and scaling. Click & drag your mouse over an area of interest to zoom in (use the un-zoom button to cancel) or move the cursor line to that area to see the instantaneous analog values and the alarm & event statuses. Analyzing Data The data can be opened and analysed with the PC software, or with any spreadsheet. It can also be imported into other software that can interpret a .csv file. Enable Cursor Un-Zoom Settings Cursor Line Status/Value at Cursor Analogue Traces Trend Settings Alarms/Events Visibility & Format Project Documentation A hard copy of the instrument configuration can be printed from the File | Print menu. The Project information (file name, instrument model code and version, modules / options fitted) and other user entered information such as the project name and version, operator details, creation and modification dates and a text description of the project can be entered into the file. This includes the project information, configuration parameters and their values, the Modbus parameter addresses, supervisor mode screens and the terminal wiring for your hardware/configuration. Profile information can also be printed. The profile header and segment data is listed along with a graphical representation of the profile. 216 23 Specifications Reference Test Conditions Ambient Temperature: 20˚C ±2˚C Relative Humidity: 60 to 70% Supply Voltage: 100 to 240V AC 50Hz ±1% Source Resistance: <10Ω for thermocouple input RTD Lead Resistance: <0.1Ω/lead balanced (Pt100) Universal Process Inputs General Input 1 and 2 Specifications Input Sample Rate: 100mS (Ten samples per second) Input Filter Time 0.0 (OFF), 0.1 to 100.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments Input Resolution: 16 bits. Always four times better than the display resolution Supply Voltage: Negligible effect on readings within the specified supply tolerances Humidity Influence: Negligible effect on readings if non-condensing Temp. Stability: Error <0.01% of span per °C change in ambient temperature Input Impedance: V DC: 47KΩ mA DC: 5Ω Other ranges: Greater than 10MΩ resistive Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from outputs and other inputs User Calibration: Single or two point. +ve values are added -ve subtracted from PV PV Display: Displays process variable up to 5% over and 5% under span Thermocouple Thermocouple Types and Ranges Sensor Type Range in °C Range in °F Sensor Type L B 100 to 1824°C 211 to 3315°F N C 0 to 2320°C 32 to 4208°F PtRh20%; PtRh40% D 0 to 2315°C 32 to 4199°F R E -240 to 1000°C -400 to 1832°F S J (default) -200 to 1200°C -328 to 2192°F T K -240 to 1373°C -400 to 2503°F Note: Defaults to °F for USA units. Defaults to °C for non-USA units. Range in °C Range in °F 0 to 762°C 0 to 1399°C 0 to 1850°C 0 to 1759°C 0 to 1762°C -240 to 400°C 32 to 1402°F 32 to 2551°F 32 to 3362°F 32 to 3198°F 32 to 3204°F -400 to 752°F The Scaled Input Upper Limit and Scaled Input Lower Limit parameters, can be used to restrict range. An optional decimal place can be displayed. 217 Thermocouple Performance Calibration: Complies with BS4937, NBS125 and IEC584. Measurement Accuracy: ±0.1% of full range span ±1LSD. NOTE: Reduced performance for B Thermocouple from 100 to 600°C. NOTE: PtRh 20% vs PtRh 40% Thermocouple accuracy is 0.25% and has reduced performance below 800°C. Linearization Accuracy: Linearization better than better ±0.2°C (±0.05 typical) for J, K, L, N and T thermocouples; than better than ±0.5°C for other types. Cold Junction: If enabled, CJC error is better than ±1°C under operating conditions. Sensor Resistance Influence: Thermocouple 100Ω: <0.1% of span error. Thermocouple 1000Ω: <0.5% of span error. Sensor Break Protection: Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the pre-set power value. High and Senor Break Alarms operate. Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Input RTD Types & Ranges Sensor Type Range in °C Range in °F Sensor Type Range in °C 3-Wire PT100 -199 to 800°C -328 to 1472°F NI120 -80 to 240°C Range in °F -112 to 464°F Note: The Scale Range Upper Limit and Scale Range Lower Limit parameters, can be used to restrict range. An optional decimal place can be displayed up to 999.9°C/F RTD Performance Measurement Accuracy: Complies with BS4937, NBS125 and IEC584. Linearization Accuracy: Better than ±0.2°C any point (±0.05°C typical). PT100 Input complies with BS1904 and DIN43760 (0.00385Ω/Ω/°C). Sensor Resistance Influence: Pt100 50Ω/lead balanced. Automatic Lead Compensation: <0.5% of span error. RTD Sensor Current: 150μA (approximately). Sensor Break Protection: Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the pre-set power value. High and Senor Break Alarms operate. DC Linear Input DC Linear Types & Ranges Input Type mA DC mV DC Potentiometer Ranges 0 to 20mA 0 to 50mV Input Type V DC 4 to 20mA 10 to 50mV ≥100Ω 218 Ranges 0 to 5V 2 to 10V 1 to 5V 0 to 10V DC Linear Performance Display Scaling: Scalable up to –2000 to 10000 for any DC Linear input type. Minimum Span: 100 display units. Decimal Point Display: Decimal point selectable from 0 to 3 places. Note: Rounds to 2 places above 99.999; 1 place above 999.99 and no decimal above 9999.9 DC Input Multi-Point Linearization: Up to 15 scaling values can be defined anywhere between 0.1 and 100% of input. Measurement Accuracy: ±0.1% of span ±1LSD (Least significant display digit). Maximum Overload: 1A (mA input terminals), 30V (voltage input terminals) at 25°C ambient Sensor Break Protection: Applicable for 4 to 20mA, 1 to 5V and 2 to 10V ranges only. Break detected within two seconds. Process Control outputs go to the pre-set power value. Low and Senor Break Alarms operate. Input Functions Function Input 1 Input 2 Process Control Loop 1 Loop 2 Cascade Control Master Loop Slave Loop Ratio Control Controlled Variable Un-controlled Variable Remote Setpoint (RSP) RSP for loop 1 Valve Position Feedback Valve Position for loop 1 Note: RSP Linear inputs only, scalable between -9999 to 10000, but actual setpoint value is kept within the setpoint limit settings. Auxiliary Inputs Auxiliary Input A Types & Ranges Input Type mA DC V DC Ranges 0 to 20mA 0 to 5V 2 to 10V 4 to 20mA 1 to 5V 0 to 10V Auxiliary Input Performance Input Sampling rate: 4 per second. Input Resolution: 16 bit ADC. Auxiliary Input Scaling: Scalable as a Remote Setpoint (RSP) between ±0.001 & ±10000 Scaled input value used for setpoint (but constrained by setpoint limits). Measurement Accuracy: ±0.25% of input span ±1 LSD (Least significant display digit). Input Resistance: V DC: 47KΩ mA DC: 10Ω Other ranges: Greater than 10MΩ resistive Input protection: Voltage input: will withstand up to 5x input voltage overload without damage or degradation of performance in either polarity. Current input: will withstand 5x input current overload in reverse direction and up to 1A in the normal direction. Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from outputs and inputs. Sensor Break Detection: Applicable for 4 to 20mA, 1 to 5V and 2 to 10V ranges only. Control goes to the pre-set power value if Auxiliary Input is providing the active setpoint source. 219 Digital Inputs Digital Input Functions Function Logic High* ┌ ┐ ┌ ┐ ┌ ┐ ┌ ┐ ┌ ┐ ┌ ┐ ┌ ┐ ┌ ┐ ┌ ┐ ┌ ┐ ┌ ┐ ┌ ┐ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ Loop 1 Control Select Enabled Loop 2 Control Select Enabled Loop 1 Auto/Manual Select Automatic Loop 2 Auto/Manual Select Automatic Loop 1 Setpoint Select Main SP Loop 2 Setpoint Select Main SP Loop 1 Pre-Tune Select Stop Loop 2 Pre-Tune Select Stop Loop 1 Self-Tune Select Stop Loop 2 Self-Tune Select Stop Profile Run/Hold Hold Profile Hold Segment Release No Action Profile Abort No Action Data Recorder Trigger Not Active Output n Forcing Open/Close Off/Open Clear All Latched Outputs No Action Output n Clear Latch No Action Key n Mimic (for f i h g) No Action Inputs C1-C7 can be used as Binary or BCD Profile Binary 0 Selection Note: The above actions apply when a digital input is setup to control the specified High/Low function can be switched using the Inputs to Invert selection screen. Logic Low* Disabled Disabled Manual Manual Alternate SP Alternate SP Run Run Run Run Run Release Abort Active On/Closed Reset Reset Key Pressed Binary1 function(s), *but th Digital Input Performance Type: 0 to 9. One from Module Slot A, 8 from Multi-Digital Input C Logic States Voltage-free or TTL-compatible voltage signals. Held in High state via pull-up resistors. *Inverted Logic Logic High = Open contacts (>5000Ω) or 2 to 24VDC signal Logic Low = Closed contacts (<50Ω) or -0.6 to +0.8VDC signal Digital Input Sensitivity: Inputs set for: Control disable; Auto/Manual; Setpoint Select; Pre-Tune; SelfTune; Profile Run/Hold and Profile Hold Segment Release are all Edge Sensitive, where a High-Low or Low-High transition changes the function status. Pre-Tune is always off at power on (except if using the auto pre-tune feature), but others functions retain their power off status at power on. Inputs set for: Profile Abort; Data Recorder Trigger; Output Forcing; Clearing Latched Outputs; Key Mimic and Profile Selection are all Level Sensitive, where a high or low input sets the function status. Digital inputs generally work in parallel with equivalent menus, where either can change the function status. Response Time: Response within <0.25 second of signal state change. Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs. 220 Output Specifications Output Module Types Plug-in Slot 1: Single SPDT Relay, Single SSR Driver, Triac or DC linear. Plug-in Slot 2: Single SPDT Relay, Dual SPST Relay, Single SSR Driver, Dual SSR Driver, Triac or 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply. Plug-in Slot 3: Single SPDT Relay, Dual SPST Relay, Single SSR Driver, Dual SSR Driver, Triac or 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply. Base Option 4 & 5: Slot 4 SPDT Relay (std.). Slot 5 SPDT Relay (optional.) Base Option 6 & 7: Slots 6 & 7 DC Linear (optional.) Single Relay Output 1-3 Performance Positions Optional in Plug-in Modules 1, 2 & 3. Contact Type: Single pole double throw (SPDT). Contact Rating: 2A resistive at 120/240V AC Lifetime: >500,000 operations at full rated AC voltage/current. De-rate if switching DC loads. Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs. Plastic pegs prevent fitting of older non-reinforced single relay modules – Remove the peg to fit dual relays (all dual relay modules have reinforced isolation). Dual Relay Output 2-3 Performance Positions Optional in Plug-in Modules 2 & 3. Contact Type: 2 x Single pole single throw (SPST) relays with shared common. Contact Rating: 2A resistive at 120/240V AC. Lifetime: >200,000 operations at full rated AC voltage/current. De-rate if switching DC loads. Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs. Base Relay 4-5 Output Performance Positions Base outputs 4 & 5. Contact Type: 1 x Single pole single throw (SPST). Contact Rating: 2A resistive at 120/240V AC. Lifetime: >200,000 operations and which contacts at full rated voltage/current. De-rate if switching DC loads. Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs. 221 Single SSR Driver Output 1-3 Output Performance Positions Optional in Plug-in Modules 1, 2 & 3. Drive Capability: 1 x Logic / SSR Driver output at >10VDC into 500Ω minimum. Isolation: Isolated from all inputs/outputs except other SSR driver outputs and the configuration socket Dual SSR Driver Output 2-3 Performance Positions Optional in Plug-in Modules 2 & 3. Drive Capability: 2 x Logic / SSR Driver outputs* at >10VDC into 500Ω minimum. *Dual SSR Driver modules have shared positive terminal. Isolation: Isolated from all inputs/outputs except other SSR driver outputs and the configuration socket Triac Output 1-3 Performance Positions Optional in Plug-in Modules 1, 2 & 3. Operating Voltage: 20 to 280Vrms @47 to 63Hz. Current Rating: 0.01 to 1A (full cycle rms on-state @ 25˚C); de-rates linearly above 40˚C to 0.5A @ 80˚C. Non-repetitive Surge Current: 25A peak maximum, for <16.6ms. OFF-State dv/dt: 500V/ms Minimum at Rated Voltage. OFF-State leakage: 1mA rms Maximum at Rated Voltage. ON-State Voltage Drop: 1.5V peak Maximum at Rated Current. Repetitive Peak OFF-state Voltage, Vdrm: 600V minimum. Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs. SIngle DC Linear Output Types & Ranges Output Type mA DC Ranges 0 to 20mA Output Type V DC 4 to 20mA Ranges 0 to 5V 2 to 10V 1 to 10V 0 to 10V TxPSU* DC Linear Output 1, 6-7 Performance Positions Optional in Plug-in Module 1, and Base Options 6 & 7. Resolution: Eight bits in 250mS (10 bits in 1 second typical, >10 bits in >1 second typical). Update Rate: Every control algorithm execution (10 times per second). Load Impedance: 0 to 20mA & 4 to 20mA: 500Ω maximum. 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V & 2 to 10V: 500Ω minimum. Short circuit protected. Accuracy: ±0.25% of range at 250Ω _(mA) or 2kΩ (V). Degrades linearly to ±0.5% for increasing burden (to specification limits). Over/Under Drive: For 4 to 20mA and 2 to 10V a 2% over/underdrive is applied (3.68 to 20.32mA and 1.84 to 10.16V) when used as control output Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs. 0 to 10VDC Transmitter Power Supply* Can be used to provide an adjustable 0.0 to 10.0V (regulated), up to 20mA output to excite external circuits & transmitters. 222 24V Transmitter Power Supply 2-3 Performance Positions Optional in Plug-in Modules 2 & 3. Power Rating 1 x 24V nominal (unregulated) excitation for external circuits & transmitters. Rated at 19 to 28VDC at 20mA. Load 910Ω minimum. Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from inputs and other outputs. *see Linear output (above) for adjustable 0 to 10V Transmitter Power Supply Only one Transmit PSU is supported by the instrument. Do not fit in both positions simultaneously. Communications Supported Communication Methods Plug-in Slot A: RS485 or Ethernet PC Configuration Socket TTL socket fitted as standard beneath the case. Requires the optional PC Configuration Lead for use. USB Port Optional front mounted USB socket. Use with memory sticks only. PC Configuration Socket Functions PC software for configuration, data extraction and profile creation. Type: Proprietary TTL level serial communications. Connection RS232 via PC Configurator Cable to RJ11 socket under case Isolation: Not isolated from SSR driver outputs. For bench configuration only. ELECTRIC SHOCK/FIRE HAZARD. The configuration lead/socket is not isolated from SSR Driver outputs. It is not intended for use in live applications. Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury or equipment damage. RS485 Functions Setpoint broadcast master or general communications slave to any suitable Modbus RTU master device (inc. extraction of recordings, transfer of configuration & profile files to or from the PC software). Type: RS485 Asynchronous serial communications module. Connection Locates in Option Slot A. Connection via rear terminals 16-18 (refer to wiring diagram). Protocol: Modbus RTU slave or Modbus RTU setpoint broadcast master. Slave Address Range: 1 to 255 or setpoint master broadcast mode Bit rate: 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200 bps. Bits per character: 10 or 11 (1 start and 1 stop bit, 8 data bits plus 1 optional parity bit). Parity: None, even or odd (selectable). Isolation: 240V reinforced safety isolation from all inputs and outputs. 223 Ethernet Functions General communications (inc. extraction of data recordings, transfer of configuration & profile files to or from the PC software). Type: Ethernet communications module. Connection Locates in plug-in Slot A. Connection via RJ45 socket in case top. Protocol: Modbus TCP Slave only. Supported Speed: 10BaseT or 100BaseT (automatically detected) IP Address Allocation: Via DHCP or manual configuration via PC Tool. Isolation: 240V reinforced safety isolation from all inputs and outputs. USB Socket Functions Extraction of data recordings, transfer of configuration & profiles files to or from the PC software or direct to another controller. Targeted Peripheral: USB Memory Stick with FAT32 formatted file system Supply Current Up to 250mA. Connection Locates in slot C. Provides an optional front mounted connector. Protocol: USB 1.1 or 2.0 compatible. Mass Storage Class. Isolation: Reinforced safety isolation from all inputs and outputs Control Loops Control Loop Tuning Types: 1 or 2 control loops, each with either standard PID (single or dual control) or Valve Motor Drive (3-point stepping PID control). 2 internally linked cascade loops, with standard PID (single or dual control) or Valve Motor Drive (3-point stepping PID control). 1 Ratio loop for combustion control. VMD Feedback Second input can provide valve position feedback or flow indication. Feedback not required or used for control algorithm. Tuning Types: Pre-Tune, Auto Pre-Tune, Self-Tune and Manual Tuning with up to 5 PID sets stored internally for each control loop. Gain Scheduling Automatically switches the 5 PID sets at user definable break-points relating to the process variable or setpoint value. Proportional Bands: Primary & Secondary (e.g. Heat & Cool) 1 to 9999 display units, or On-Off control. Automatic Reset Integral Time Constant, 1s to 99min 59s and OFF Rate Derivative Time Constant, 1s to 99 min 59s and OFF Manual Reset Bias added each control algorithm execution. Adjustable 0 to 100% of output power (single primary control) or -100% to +100% of output power (dual primary & secondary control). Deadband/Overlap: Overlap (+ve values) or Deadband (-ve values) between primary & secondary proportional bands for Dual Control. Adjustable In display units - limited to 20% of the combined proportional bands width. ON/OFF Differential: ON/OFF switching differential 1 to 300 display units. Auto/Manual Control: Selectable with “bumpless” transfer when switching between Automatic and Manual control. Control Cycle Times: Selectable from 0.5 to 512 seconds in 0.1s steps. Setpoint Maximum: Limited by Scaled Input Upper Limit and Setpoint Minimum. Setpoint Minimum: Limited by Scaled Input Lower Limit and Setpoint Maximum. Setpoint Ramp: Ramp rate selectable 1 to 9999 LSD’s (Least significant display digits) per hour and OFF (infinite). 224 Alarms Number of Alarms: Seven alarms are configurable for any supported type. Alarm Types: Process High; Process Low; PV-SP Deviation; Band; Control Loop; Rate Of Signal Change per minute – all with optional minimum duration and start-up inhibit. Input Signal Break; % Recorder Memory Used, Control Power High, Control Power Low. Duration & Start-up Inhibit Process High; Low; Deviation; Band; Loop; Rate Of Change alarms have an optional start-up inhibit function and adjustable minimum duration time from Off to 9999 seconds before activation. CAUTION: If the duration is less than this time, the alarm will not activate no matter what the value is. Alarm Hysteresis: Adjustable deadband from 1 LSD (Least significant display digit) to full span (in display units) for Process, Band or Deviation Alarms. Combination Alarm & Events Outputs: Logically AND or OR any alarm or profile event (inc Profile running or ended) to switch an output. The output can be set to switch on when the condition is true, or when the condition is not true. Profiler Options Profile Limits: Number of profiles = 64 maximum. Total number of segments = 255 maximum (shared by all programs). Segment Types: Ramp Up/Down over time, Ramp Rate Up/Down*, Step, Dwell, Hold, Loop, Join A Profile, End or Repeat Sequence Then End. *Ramp Rate is not available when profile controls two loops Time-base: All times are specified in hh:mm:ss (Hours, Minutes & Seconds). Segment Time: Maximum segment time 99:59:59 hh:mm:ss. Use loop-back for longer segments (e.g. 24:00:00 x 100 loops = 100 days). Ramp Rate: Ramp Up or Down at 0.001 to 9999.9 display units per hour. Hold Segment Release: Release from menu key-press, At Time Of Day or via a Digital Input. Profile Starting Point The first segment setpoint(s) begin from either the setpoint, or current measured input value, of the controlled loop(s) Delayed Start: After 0 to 99:59 (hh:mm) time delay, or at specified day(s) & time. Profile End Action: Selectable from: Keep Last Profile Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint or Control Outputs Off. Profile Abort Action: Selectable from: Keep Last Profile Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint or Control Outputs Off. Power/signal Loss Recovery Action: Selectable from: Continue Profile, Restart Profile, Keep Last Profile Setpoint, Use Controller Setpoint or Control Outputs Off. Auto-Hold: Off or Hold if input >Band above and/or below SP for each segment. Profile Control: Run, Manual Hold/Release, Abort or jump to next segment. Profile Timing Accuracy: 0.02% Basic Profile Timing Accuracy. ±<0.5 second per Loop, End or Join segment. Profile Cycling: 1 to 9999 or Infinite repeats per profile. Sequence Repeats: 1 to 9999 or Infinite repeats of joined profile sequences. Loop Back Segments: 1 to 9999 loops back to specified segment. Segment Events: Events turn on for the duration of the segment. If events are set on for End segments, the event states persist until another profile starts, the user exits profiler mode, or the unit is powered down. 225 Data Recorder Option Recording Memory: 1Mb non-volatile flash memory (data retained when power is off). Recording Interval: 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 seconds or 1; 2; 5; 10; 15; 30 minutes. Recording Capacity: Dependant on sample rate and number of values recorded. Example: 2 values can be recorded for 21 days at 30 second intervals. More values or faster sample rates reduce the duration. RTC Battery Type: VARTA CR 1616 3V Lithium. Clock runs for >1 year without power. RTC accuracy: Real Time Clock error <1second per day. Diasplay Display Type: 160 x 80 pixel, monochrome graphic LCD with a dual color (red/green) backlight. Display Area: 66.54mm (W) x 37.42mm (H). Display Characters: 0 to 9, a to z, A to Z, plus @ ( ) ß ö - and _ Operating Conditions Location Intended for indoor use only. Ambient Temperatures 0˚C to 55˚C (operating) and -20˚C to 80˚C (storage). Relative Humidity: 20% to 90% non-condensing. Altitude: Up to 2000m above sea level. Supply Voltage & Power (Mains versions): Mains Supply: 100 to 240V ±10% AC 50/60Hz. Consumption 20VA Fuse rating: 1amp type-T / Slow-blow Supply Voltage & Power (Low voltage versions): AC Supply: 20 to 48V AC 50/60Hz. Consumption 5VA DC Supply: 22 to 65V DC. Consumption 12W. Fuse rating: 350milliamp type-T / Slow-blow 50Ω per lead maximum, balanced Front Panel Sealing: To IP66 (IP65 front USB connector). IP20 behind the panel. (IP ratings are not tested for or approved by UL) Conformance Norms EMC standards: CE: Complies with EN61326. Safety Standards: CE: Complies with EN61010-1 edition 3 UL, cUL to UL61010C-1. Pollution Degree 2, Installation Category II; RoHS2 2011/65/EU Directive Dimensions Front Bezel Size: 1/4 DIN (96 x 96mm). Mounting: Plug-in with panel mounting fixing strap. Panel & Cut-out Size: Panel must be rigid with Max thickness 6.0mm (0.25inch). Cut-out 92mm x 92mm +0.5, -0.0mm. Depth Behind Panel: 117mm Ventilation 20mm gap required above, below and behind. Weight: 0.65kg maximum. Terminals: Screw type (combination head). 226 24 Ordering Specifications 4081 & 4082 Graphical Profile Controller & Recorder 4081 & 4082 - 80 Series Advanced Temperature & Process Controller 1/4 DIN Process Controller with 1 or 2 Independent Control Loops Featuring: Universal inputs, Large Graphical/Text LCD Display with Trending and % output bar graph, Cascade, Valve Motor Drive and Ratio control, 5 PID Sets for Gain Scheduling & reinforced safety isolation between inputs & outputs. Options: Up to: 9 outputs, 7 programmable events, 9 digital inputs & 2 analog inputs. Profiler with 64 program/255 segment, Data-Logging with Real Time Clock, USB Port, ModBus RTU/RS485 or ModBus TCP/Ethernet Digital Communications, 24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply, Configuration & Monitoring Software. Operating Temperature: 32° to 131°F (0° to 55°C) . cULus, CE, RoHS2 & 2 Year Warranty Model 4081 1 Control Loop 4082 2 Independent Control Loops Code Unit Type C Controller U Controller with USB Port R Controller/Recorder with USB Port & Real Time Clock Code Profiler Option 0 Not Fitted P Profiler Code Output 1 0 None R *Relay (2 Amp resistive at 240 VAC, SPDT, Form C) S SSR (0/10 VDC, 500Ω Minimum load) A *Analog (Linear DC: 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5 V, 0-10 V, 2-10 V) T *Triac (0.01 to 1 Amp AC, 20 to 280 Vrms, 47 to 63 Hz) Code Output 2 & Output 3 (Choose the Appropriate Code for Each) Out 2 Out 3 Output Type 0 0 None R R *Relay (2 Amp resistive at 240 VAC, SPDT, Form C) S S *SSR (0/10 VDC, 500Ω Minimum load) T T *Triac (0.01 to 1 Amp AC, 20 to 280 Vrms, 47 to 63 Hz) M M *Dual Relay Output - 2 Amp resistive, 240 VAC, SPST, Form A, norm. open, comm. term. W W *Dual SSR Output - Non Isolated, 0/10 VDC, 500 Ω Minimum load P P *Isolated Power Supply 24 VDC, 910 Ω Minimum (Only 1 Power Supply Supported) Code Base Outputs 1 1X Relay 2 1X Relay & 1X Analog 3 2X Relay & 1X Analog 4 2X Relay & 2X Analog Code Feature Option A 0 None 1 RS485 (ModBus/RTU) Digital Comms 4082 - R P S R R- 2 2 Digital Input (Voltage Free or TTL Input) 3 Remote Setpoint - Analog Input A 4 Ethernet Port - ModBus TCP Slave Code Auxiliary Input 0 None 1 2 Universal Input (Available on Single Loop Controllers Only) Code Feature Option C 0 None 1 Multiple Digital Inputs (1 - 8 Digital Inputs) Code Power Supply 0 100 – 240 V AC 1 24 – 48 V AC/DC 4 0 1 Order Table Notes: 1 Only available on Single Loop Models. *Reinforced 240V safety isolation from inputs and other outputs 227 0 Typical Model Number Limited Warranty: Please refer to the Chromalox limited warranty applicable to this product at http://www.chromalox.com/customer-service/policies/termsofsale.aspx. Chromalox 103 Gamma Drive Pittsburgh, PA 15238 (412) 967-3800 www.chromalox.com © 2016 Chromalox, Inc. 228
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement